2007 Chevrolet Corvette Owner Manual M - - Official C6 Corvette
486
Seats and Restraint Systems ....................... 7 Front Seats .............................................. 8 Safety Belts ............................................ 16 Child Restraints ...................................... 31 Airbag System ........................................ 50 Restraint System Check ......................... 66 Features and Controls ................................ 69 Keys ....................................................... 71 Doors and Locks .................................... 78 Windows ................................................ 86 Theft-Deterrent Systems ......................... 88 Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ....... 90 Mirrors .................................................. 108 OnStar ® System ................................... 114 Universal Home Remote System .......... 118 Storage Areas ...................................... 128 Roof Panel ........................................... 133 Convertible Top .................................... 138 Instrument Panel ....................................... 151 Instrument Panel Overview ................... 154 Climate Controls ................................... 177 Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators .......................................... 186 Driver Information Center (DIC) ............ 205 Audio System(s) ................................... 242 Driving Your Vehicle ................................. 271 Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle .............................................. 272 Towing ................................................. 313 Service and Appearance Care .................. 315 Service ................................................. 318 Fuel ...................................................... 320 Checking Things Under the Hood ......... 326 Rear Axle ............................................. 370 Bulb Replacement ................................ 370 Windshield Replacement ....................... 374 2007 Chevrolet Corvette Owner Manual M 1
Transcript of 2007 Chevrolet Corvette Owner Manual M - - Official C6 Corvette
Seats and Restraint Systems ....................... 7Front Seats .............................................. 8Safety Belts ............................................ 16Child Restraints ...................................... 31Airbag System ........................................ 50Restraint System Check ......................... 66
Features and Controls ................................ 69Keys ....................................................... 71Doors and Locks .................................... 78Windows ................................................ 86Theft-Deterrent Systems ......................... 88Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ....... 90Mirrors .................................................. 108OnStar® System ................................... 114Universal Home Remote System .......... 118Storage Areas ...................................... 128Roof Panel ........................................... 133Convertible Top .................................... 138
Instrument Panel ....................................... 151Instrument Panel Overview ................... 154Climate Controls ................................... 177Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators .......................................... 186Driver Information Center (DIC) ............ 205Audio System(s) ................................... 242
Driving Your Vehicle ................................. 271Your Driving, the Road, and Your
Vehicle .............................................. 272Towing ................................................. 313
Service and Appearance Care .................. 315Service ................................................. 318Fuel ...................................................... 320Checking Things Under the Hood ......... 326Rear Axle ............................................. 370Bulb Replacement ................................ 370Windshield Replacement ....................... 374
2007 Chevrolet Corvette Owner Manual M
1
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ... 375Tires ..................................................... 378Appearance Care .................................. 407Vehicle Identification ............................. 418Electrical System .................................. 419Capacities and Specifications ................ 427
Maintenance Schedule .............................. 429Maintenance Schedule .......................... 430
Customer Assistance Information ............. 451Customer Assistance and Information ... 452Reporting Safety Defects ...................... 470
Index .......................................................... 473
2
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem,the names CORVETTE and Z06 and theCORVETTE Emblem are registered trademarks ofGeneral Motors Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at thetime it was printed. We reserve the right tomake changes after that time without furthernotice. For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitutethe name “General Motors of Canada Limited”for Chevrolet Motor Division whenever it appearsin this manual.
This manual describes features that may beavailable in this model, but your vehicle may nothave all of them. For example, more than oneentertainment system may be offered or yourvehicle may have been ordered without a frontpassenger or rear seats.
Keep this manual the vehicle, so it will be there ifit is needed when on the road. If the vehicle issold, leave this manual in it.
Canadian OwnersA French language copy of this manual can beobtained from your dealer or from:
Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207
Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 15865975 A First Printing ©2006 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
3
How to Use This ManualMany people read the owner manual frombeginning to end when they first receive their newvehicle. If this is done, it can help you learnabout the features and controls for the vehicle.Pictures and words work together in theowner manual to explain things.
IndexA good place to quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual.It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manualand the page number where it can be found.
Safety Warnings and SymbolsThere are a number of safety cautions in thisbook. We use a box and the word CAUTION totell about things that could hurt you if you were toignore the warning.
{CAUTION:
These mean there is something that couldhurt you or other people.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.Then we tell you what to do to help avoid orreduce the hazard. Please read these cautions. Ifyou do not, you or others could be hurt.
You will also find acircle with a slashthrough it in this book.This safety symbolmeans “Do Not,” “DoNot do this” or “Do Notlet this happen.”
4
Vehicle Damage WarningsAlso, in this manual you will find these notices:
Notice: These mean there is somethingthat could damage your vehicle.
A notice tells about something that can damagethe vehicle. Many times, this damage would not becovered by your vehicle’s warranty, and it couldbe costly. But the notice will tell what to do to helpavoid the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might seeCAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colorsor in different words.
There are also warning labels on the vehicle. Theyuse the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
Vehicle SymbolsThe vehicle has components and labels that usesymbols instead of text. Symbols are shown alongwith the text describing the operation or informationrelating to a specific component, control, message,gage, or indicator.
If you need help figuring out a specific name of acomponent, gage, or indicator, reference thefollowing topics:
• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1
• Features and Controls in Section 2
• Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3
• Climate Controls in Section 3
• Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators inSection 3
• Audio System(s) in Section 3
• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5
5
These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:
6
Front Seats ..................................................... 8Manual Seats ................................................ 8Power Seats ................................................. 8Power Lumbar and Side Bolsters .................. 9Heated Seats .............................................. 10Memory Seat, Mirrors and Steering
Wheel ...................................................... 10Reclining Seatbacks .................................... 13Seatback Latches ........................................ 15
Safety Belts .................................................. 16Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ........... 16Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts ............................................. 20How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............. 21Driver Position ............................................. 22Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy .............. 29Passenger Position ...................................... 30Safety Belt Pretensioners ............................ 30Safety Belt Extender ................................... 30
Child Restraints ............................................ 31Older Children ............................................. 31Infants and Young Children ......................... 34Child Restraint Systems .............................. 37
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) (Z06 Models Only) .................... 42
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) (Coupe and ConvertibleModels Only) ........................................... 45
Securing a Child Restraint in thePassenger Seat Position .......................... 46
Airbag System .............................................. 50Where Are the Airbags? .............................. 53When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................. 56What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ................... 57How Does an Airbag Restrain? ................... 57What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates? ................................................... 58Passenger Sensing System ......................... 59Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...... 64Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......................... 65Restraint System Check ............................... 66
Checking the Restraint Systems .................. 66Replacing Restraint System Parts After
a Crash ................................................... 67
Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems
7
Front Seats
Manual Seats
To move a manual passenger seat, pull up the barlocated under the front of the seat to unlock it.Slide the seat to where you want it and release thebar. Then try to move the seat forward with yourbody to make sure it is locked into place.
Power Seats
The control for the driver’s power seat is locatedon the outboard side of the seat cushion. Yourvehicle may also have a passenger power seat.• Move the seat forward or rearward by
sliding the control forward or rearward.• Raise or lower the front part of the seat
cushion by moving the front of the control upor down.
• Raise or lower the rear part of the seatcushion by moving the rear of the control upor down.
8
Your preferred seat position can be stored andrecalled if you have the memory option. SeeMemory Seat, Mirrors and Steering Wheelon page 10.
Power Lumbar and Side Bolsters
Your vehicle may have power lumbar and sidebolsters. The switches are located on the outboardside of the seat cushion.
Use the power seat control to move the seat tothe proper position. See Power Seats on page 8.
Use the vertical lumbar switch (A) to adjustsupport in the seatback. Press the switch forwardto increase support. Press the switch rearwardto decrease support.
Use the horizontal switch (B) to adjust the sidebolsters. Pull up the switch to move the wings ofthe seatback in closer to your body. Pushdown the switch to move the wings away fromyour body.
Keep in mind that as your seating positionchanges, as it may during long trips, so should theposition of your lumbar support. Adjust the seatas needed.
9
Heated Seats
If your vehicle hasheated seats, thebuttons are located onthe center console.
Each seat has two settings: high and low.
To turn on the heated seats, press the top buttononce. The seat will heat to the high setting.Press the top button again to switch to the lowsetting. The lights on the top button will indicatewhich setting it is in. Press the bottom buttonto turn the system off.
The heated seats can only be used when theignition is on. When the vehicle is off, the heatedseats will turn off.
Memory Seat, Mirrors and SteeringWheel
If your vehicle has this feature, memory canprogram and recall the settings for the driver’sseating position. The controls for this feature arelocated on the driver’s door.
The numbers on the back of the keyless accesstransmitters, 1 and 2, correspond to the numberson the memory buttons.
10
To program each button, use the following steps:
1. Adjust the settings for the driver’s seatposition, both outside mirrors, and thetelescopic steering column position to acomfortable driving position.
2. Press and hold button 1 until two beeps areheard, then release the button.Your settings are now programmed.
A second seating, mirror, and telescopic steeringcolumn position can be programmed by repeatingthe above steps and pressing button 2 for driver 2.
To recall a memory position, do one of thefollowing:
• If you have an automatic transmission vehicle,press and release the desired button 1 or 2while the vehicle is in PARK (P).A single beep will sound and the memoryposition will be recalled after a brief delay.If the vehicle is not in PARK (P), three beepswill sound and the memory position willnot be recalled.
• If you have a manual transmission vehicle,press and release the desired button 1 or 2.If the vehicle is on, the parking brake needs tobe set to recall the memory position.A single beep will sound and the memoryposition will be recalled after a brief delay.If the vehicle is on and the parking brake is notset, three beeps will sound and the memoryposition will not be recalled.
If your vehicle has the Auto Memory Recallfeature and it is turned on in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC), the seat, mirrors, and telescopicsteering column position will automatically adjustto their programmed positions when the engineis started. See “Auto Memory Recall” underDIC Vehicle Personalization on page 232 for moreinformation.
To stop recall movement of the memory feature atany time, press one of the power seat controls,power mirror control buttons, memory buttons, orthe telescopic steering column switch.
11
Easy Exit SeatTwo personalized exit positions can also beprogrammed to allow for an easy exit or entry intothe vehicle. The controls for this memoryfunction are located on the driver’s door.
B (Easy Exit Seat): This button is used toprogram and recall the desired driver’s seat exitposition.
To program an exit position, use the followingsteps:
1. Recall the desired driving position by pressingbutton 1 or 2.The seat will move to the programmedmemory position.
2. Position the seat and the telescopic steeringcolumn position to a comfortable exit position.
3. Press and hold the exit button until two beepssound.Your exit position is now programmed.
A second exit position can be programmed byrepeating the above steps and pressing the othermemory button.
To recall an exit position, do one of the following:
• If you have an automatic transmission vehicle,press and release the exit button while thevehicle is in PARK (P).One beep will sound and the exit position forthe currently identified driver will be recalled.
• If you have a manual transmission vehicle,press and release the exit button. The parkingbrake needs to be set to recall the memoryposition.One beep will sound and the exit position forthe currently identified driver will be recalled.
If your vehicle has the Auto Exit Recall featureand it is turned on in the DIC, automatic seat andtelescopic steering column movement to theexit position will occur when you use the keylessaccess transmitter to unlock your vehicle orwhen you turn the engine off and open the driver’sdoor. See “Auto Exit Recall” under DIC VehiclePersonalization on page 232 for more information.
12
Reclining Seatbacks
{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if youtry to adjust a manual driver’s seat whilethe vehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle and confuse you,or make you push a pedal when you donot want to. Adjust the driver’s seat onlywhen the vehicle is not moving.
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it couldmove forward in a sudden stop or crash.That could cause injury to the personsitting there. Always push and pull on theseatback to be sure it is locked.
The seats have manual reclining seatbacks.The lever used to operate them is located onthe outboard side of the seats.
To adjust the seatback, lean slightly forward to liftyour weight off the seatback. Pull completelyup on the lever until it stops, and lean back toposition the seatback to where you want it.Release the lever to lock the seatback into place.
13
{CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when yourvehicle is in motion can be dangerous.Even if you buckle up, your safety beltscannot do their job when you are reclinedlike this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job. In acrash, you could go into it, receiving neckor other injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In acrash the belt could go up over yourabdomen. The belt forces would be there,not at your pelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle isin motion, have the seatback upright.Then sit well back in the seat and wearyour safety belt properly.
Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle ismoving.
14
Seatback Latches
Both seatbacks fold forward to give you access tothe rear area. To fold a seatback forward, liftthis latch, which is located on top of the backsideof the seat, and pull the seatback forward. Theseatback will lock down in this position.
To unlock, lift up on the latch and push theseatback rearward. When you return the seatbackto its original position, make sure the seatbackis locked in place.
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it couldmove forward in a sudden stop or crash.That could cause injury to the personsitting there. Always push and pull on theseatback to be sure it is locked.
15
Safety Belts
Safety Belts: They Are for EveryoneThis part of the manual tells you how to usesafety belts properly. It also tells you some thingsyou should not do with safety belts.
{CAUTION:
Do not let anyone ride where he or shecan not wear a safety belt properly. If youare in a crash and you are not wearing asafety belt, your injuries can be muchworse. You can hit things inside thevehicle or be ejected from it. You can beseriously injured or killed. In the samecrash, you might not be if you are buckledup. Always fasten your safety belt, andcheck that your passenger’s belt isfastened properly too.
{CAUTION:
It is extremely dangerous to ride in acargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.In a collision, people riding in these areasare more likely to be seriously injured orkilled. Do not allow people to ride in anyarea of your vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and safety belts. Be sureeveryone in your vehicle is in a seat andusing a safety belt properly.
16
Your vehicle has a lightthat comes on as areminder to buckle up.See Safety BeltReminder Lighton page 188.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, thelaw says to wear safety belts. Here is why:They work.
You never know if you will be in a crash. If youdo have a crash, you do not know if it will be abad one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can beso serious that even buckled up, a person wouldnot survive. But most crashes are in between. Inmany of them, people who buckle up can surviveand sometimes walk away. Without belts they couldhave been badly hurt or killed.
After more than 40 years of safety belts invehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashesbuckling up does matter... a lot!
Why Safety Belts WorkWhen you ride in or on anything, you go as fastas it goes.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just aseat on wheels.
17
Put someone on it. Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. Therider does not stop.
18
The person keeps going until stopped bysomething. In a real vehicle, it could be thewindshield...
or the instrument panel...
19
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicledoes. You get more time to stop. You stopover more distance, and your strongest bonestake the forces. That is why safety beltsmake such good sense.
Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after anaccident if I am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing asafety belt or not. But you can unbuckle asafety belt, even if you are upside down. Andyour chance of being conscious during andafter an accident, so you can unbuckle and getout, is much greater if you are belted.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should Ihave to wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; sothey work with safety belts — not instead ofthem. Every airbag system ever offeredfor sale has required the use of safety belts.Even if you are in a vehicle that has airbags,you still have to buckle up to get the mostprotection. That is true not only in frontalcollisions, but especially in side and othercollisions.
20
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive farfrom home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you arein an accident — even one that is not yourfault — you and your passenger can be hurt.Being a good driver does not protect youfrom things beyond your control, such asbad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)of home. And the greatest number ofserious injuries and deaths occur at speeds ofless than 40 mph (65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
How to Wear Safety Belts ProperlyThis part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to knowabout safety belts and children. And thereare different rules for smaller children and babies.If a child will be riding in your vehicle, seeOlder Children on page 31 or Infants and YoungChildren on page 34. Follow those rules foreveryone’s protection.
First, you will want to know which restraintsystems your vehicle has.
We will start with the driver position.
21
Driver Position
Lap-Shoulder BeltThe driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how towear it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. Tosee how, see “Seats” in the Index.
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt acrossyou. Do not let it get twisted.The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull thebelt across you very quickly. If this happens,let the belt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across you more slowly.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle untilit clicks.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure itis secure.If the belt is not long enough, see Safety BeltExtender on page 30.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
22
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on theshoulder belt.It may be necessary to pull stitching on thesafety belt through the latch plate to fullytighten the lap belt on smaller occupants.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low andsnug on the hips, just touching the thighs. Ina crash, this applies force to the strong pelvicbones. And you would be less likely to slide underthe lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt wouldapply force at your abdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulder and across thechest. These parts of the body are best ableto take belt restraining forces. The safety belt locksif there is a sudden stop or crash.
23
Q: What is wrong with this?
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not givenearly as much protection this way.
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulderbelt is too loose. In a crash, you wouldmove forward too much, which couldincrease injury. The shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.
24
Q: What is wrong with this?
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearlyas much protection this way.
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your lap beltis too loose. In a crash, you could slideunder the lap belt and apply force at yourabdomen. This could cause serious oreven fatal injuries. The lap belt should beworn low and snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs.
25
Q: What is wrong with this?
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt isbuckled in the wrong place like this. In acrash, the belt would go up over yourabdomen. The belt forces would be there,not at the pelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries. Always buckleyour belt into the buckle nearest you.
26
Q: What is wrong with this?
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. Itshould be worn over the shoulder at all times.
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wearthe shoulder belt under your arm. In acrash, your body would move too farforward, which would increase the chanceof head and neck injury. Also, the beltwould apply too much force to the ribs,which are not as strong as shoulderbones. You could also severely injureinternal organs like your liver or spleen.
27
Q: What is wrong with this?
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twistedbelt. In a crash, you would not have thefull width of the belt to spread impactforces. If a belt is twisted, make it straightso it can work properly, or ask your dealerto fix it.
28
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is outof the way. If you slam the door on it, you candamage both the belt and your vehicle.
Safety Belt Use During PregnancySafety belts work for everyone, including pregnantwomen. Like all occupants, they are more likelyto be seriously injured if they do not wearsafety belts.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulderbelt, and the lap portion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding, throughout thepregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect themother. When a safety belt is worn properly, itis more likely that the fetus will not be hurtin a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone,the key to making safety belts effective is wearingthem properly.
29
Passenger PositionThe passenger’s safety belt works the same wayas the driver’s safety belt. To learn how towear the passenger’s safety belt properly, seeDriver Position on page 22.
Safety Belt PretensionersYour vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for thedriver and right front passenger. Although youcannot see them, they are part of the safety beltassembly. They help tighten the safety belts duringthe early stages of a moderate to severe frontaland near frontal crash if the threshold conditionsfor pretensioner activation are met. And, ifyour vehicle has side impact airbags, safety beltpretensioners can help tighten the safety belts in aside crash.
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in acrash, you will need to get new ones, andprobably other new parts for your safety beltsystem. See Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash on page 67.
Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,you should use it.
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealerwill order you an extender. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, sothe extender will be long enough for you. Tohelp avoid personal injury, do not let someone elseuse it, and use it only for the seat it is made tofit. The extender has been designed for adults.Never use it for securing child seats. To wear it,just attach it to the regular safety belt. Formore information see the instruction sheet thatcomes with the extender.
30
Child Restraints
Older Children
Older children who have outgrown booster seatsshould wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: If possible, an older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get the additionalrestraint a shoulder belt can provide. Theshoulder belt should not cross the faceor neck. The lap belt should fit snugly belowthe hips, just touching the top of the thighs. Itshould never be worn over the abdomen,which could cause severe or even fatal internalinjuries in a crash.
According to accident statistics, children are saferwhen properly restrained in the rear seatingpositions than in the front seating positions.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up canstrike other people who are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Older children needto use safety belts properly.
31
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the samebelt. The belt can not properly spread theimpact forces. In a crash, the two childrencan be crushed together and seriouslyinjured. A belt must be used by onlyone person at a time.
Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulderbelt, but the child is so small that theshoulder belt is very close to the child’sface or neck?
A: Move the child toward the center of thevehicle, but be sure that the shoulder belt stillis on the child’s shoulder, so that in a crashthe child’s upper body would have the restraintthat belts provide.
32
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has alap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part isbehind the child. If the child wears thebelt in this way, in a crash the child mightslide under the belt. The belt’s forcewould then be applied right on the child’sabdomen. That could cause serious orfatal injuries.
The lap portion of the belt should be worn low andsnug on the hips, just touching the child’s thighs.This applies belt force to the child’s pelvic bones ina crash.
33
Infants and Young ChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needs protection! Thisincludes infants and all other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age and size of thetraveler changes the need, for everyone, to usesafety restraints. In fact, the law in every statein the United States and in every Canadianprovince says children up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Children can be seriously injured orstrangled if a shoulder belt is wrappedaround their neck and the safety beltcontinues to tighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle and never allowchildren to play with the safety belts.
Every time infants and young children ride invehicles, they should have the protection providedby appropriate restraints. Young children shouldnot use the vehicle’s adult safety belts alone,unless there is no other choice. Instead, they needto use a child restraint.
{CAUTION:
People should never hold a baby in theirarms while riding in a vehicle. A babydoes not weigh much — until a crash.During a crash a baby will become soheavy it is not possible to hold it. Forexample, in a crash at only 25 mph(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby willsuddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) forceon a person’s arms. A baby should besecured in an appropriate restraint.
34
{CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very closeto, any airbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer protection foradults and older children, but not foryoung children and infants. Neither thevehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them. Youngchildren and infants need the protectionthat a child restraint system can provide.
35
Q: What are the different types of add-onchild restraints?
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased bythe vehicle’s owner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particular restraint shouldtake into consideration not only the child’sweight, height, and age but also whether or notthe restraint will be compatible with the motorvehicle in which it will be used.
For most basic types of child restraints, thereare many different models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, be sure it isdesigned to be used in a motor vehicle. If it is,the restraint will have a label saying that itmeets federal motor vehicle safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructionsthat come with the restraint state the weightand height limitations for a particular childrestraint. In addition, there are many kinds ofrestraints available for children withspecial needs.
{CAUTION:
Newborn infants need complete support,including support for the head and neck.This is necessary because a newborninfant’s neck is weak and its head weighsso much compared with the rest of itsbody. In a crash, an infant in a rear-facingseat settles into the restraint, so the crashforces can be distributed across thestrongest part of an infant’s body, theback and shoulders. Infants alwaysshould be secured in appropriate infantrestraints.
36
{CAUTION:
The body structure of a young child isquite unlike that of an adult or older child,for whom the safety belts are designed. Ayoung child’s hip bones are still so smallthat the vehicle’s regular safety belt maynot remain low on the hip bones, as itshould. Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child’s abdomen. In a crash, the beltwould apply force on a body area that isunprotected by any bony structure. Thisalone could cause serious or fatal injuries.Young children always should be securedin appropriate child restraints.
Child Restraint Systems
An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for usein a motor vehicle, is an infant restraint systemdesigned to restrain or position a child on acontinuous flat surface. Make sure that the infant’shead rests toward the center of the vehicle.
37
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraintwith the seating surface against the back of theinfant. The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts to keep the infantpositioned in the restraint.
A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraintfor the child’s body with the harness and alsosometimes with surfaces such as T-shapedor shelf-like shields.
38
A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designedto improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety beltsystem. Some booster seats have a shoulder beltpositioner, and some high-back booster seatshave a five-point harness. A booster seat can alsohelp a child to see out the window.
Q: How Should I Use a Child Restraint?
A: A child restraint system is any device designedfor use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, orposition children. A built-in child restraintsystem is a permanent part of the motorvehicle. An add-on child restraint system is aportable one, which is purchased by thevehicle’s owner. To help reduce injuries, anadd-on child restraint must be secured inthe vehicle. With built-in or add-on childrestraints, the child has to be secured withinthe child restraint.
When choosing an add-on child restraint, besure the child restraint is designed to beused in a vehicle. If it is, it will have a labelsaying that it meets federal motor vehiclesafety standards. Then follow the instructionsfor the restraint. You may find theseinstructions on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both.
39
Securing an Add-on Child Restraint inthe Vehicle
{CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killedin a crash if the child restraint is notproperly secured in the vehicle. Make surethe child restraint is properly installed inthe vehicle using the vehicle’s safety beltor LATCH system, following theinstructions that came with that restraint,and also the instructions in this manual.
To help reduce the chance of injury, the childrestraint must be secured in the vehicle. Childrestraint systems must be secured in vehicle seatsby lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap-shoulderbelt, or by the LATCH system.
See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) (Z06 Models Only) on page 42 or LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)(Coupe and Convertible Models Only) on page 45for more information. A child can be endangeredin a crash if the child restraint is not properlysecured in the vehicle.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer tothe instructions that come with the restraintwhich may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet,or both, and to this manual. The child restraintinstructions are important, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacement copy from themanufacturer.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stop andinjure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properlysecure any child restraint in your vehicle — evenwhen no child is in it.
40
Securing the Child Within the ChildRestraintThere are several systems for securing the childwithin the child restraint. One system, thethree-point harness, has straps that come downover each of the infant’s shoulders and buckletogether at the crotch. The five-point harnesssystem has two shoulder straps, two hip straps,and a crotch strap. A shield may take the placeof hip straps. A T-shaped shield has shoulderstraps that are attached to a flat pad whichrests low against the child’s body. A shelf- orarmrest-type shield has straps that are attachedto a wide, shelf-like shield that swings up or tothe side.
{CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killedin a crash if the child is not properlysecured in the child restraint. Make surethe child is properly secured, followingthe instructions that came with thatrestraint.
Because there are different systems, it is importantto refer to the instructions that come with therestraint. A child can be endangered in a crash ifthe child is not properly secured in the childrestraint.
41
Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH) (Z06 Models Only)Some child restraints have a LATCH system. Aspart of the LATCH system, your child restraint mayhave lower attachments and/or a top tether. TheLATCH system can help hold the child restraint inplace during driving or in a crash. Some vehicleshave lower and/or top tether anchors designedto secure a child restraint with lower attachmentsand/or a top tether.
Your vehicle does not have lower anchors toaccommodate lower attachments. Your vehicledoes have a top tether anchor. If your childrestraint has a top tether, make sure your childrestraint is properly installed using the toptether anchor and the vehicle’s safety belt. A childrestraint must never be installed using only thetop tether and anchor. Refer to your child restraintinstructions and see Securing a Child Restraintin the Passenger Seat Position on page 46for instructions on securing your child restraintusing the vehicle’s safety belts.
In order to use the top tether anchors in yourvehicle, you need a child restraint equipped with atop tether. The child restraint manufacturer willprovide you with instructions on how to usethe child restraint and its top tether. The followingexplains how to attach a child restraint with thetop tether in your vehicle.
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the childrestraint to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is builtinto the vehicle.
42
The top tether attachment (B) on the child restraintconnects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle inorder to reduce the forward movement and rotationof the child restraint during driving or in a crash.
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A)or a dual tether (C). Either will have a singleattachment (B) to secure the top tether tothe anchor.
Some top tether-equipped child restraints aredesigned for use with or without the top tetherbeing attached. Others require the top tetheralways to be attached. In Canada, the law requiresthat forward-facing child restraints have a toptether, and that the tether be attached. Inthe United States, some child restraints also havea top tether. Be sure to read and follow theinstructions for your child restraint.
If the child restraint does not have a top tether,one can be obtained, in kit form, for manychild restraints. Ask the child restraintmanufacturer whether or not a kit is available.
Top Tether Anchor Locations
i (Top Tether Anchor):Seating positions withtop tether anchors.
To assist you in locatingthe top tether anchors,the top tether anchorsymbol is located on thetrim cover.
43
The top tether anchor is located behind thepassenger seat.
Securing a Child Restraint with aTop Tether
{CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is notattached to anchors, the restraint will notbe able to protect the child correctly. In acrash, the child could be seriously injuredor killed. Make sure that a LATCH-typechild restraint is properly installed usingthe anchors, or use the vehicle’s safetybelts to secure the restraint, following theinstructions that came with that restraint,and also the instructions in this manual.
1. Secure the child restraint using the vehicle’ssafety belt. See Securing a Child Restraint inthe Passenger Seat Position on page 46.
44
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommendsthat the top tether be attached, attach andtighten the top tether to the top tether anchor,if equipped. Refer to the child restraintinstructions and the following steps:
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.2.2. Press the ribbed area of the trim cover
to open the cover and expose theanchor.
2.3. Route, attach and tighten the top tetheraccording to your child restraintinstructions and the followinginstructions:
If the position you areusing has a fixed headrestraint and youare using a singletether, route the tetherover the headrestraint.
If the position you areusing has a fixed headrestraint and youare using a dual tether,route the tetheraround the headrestraint.
3. Push and pull the child restraint in differentdirections to be sure it is secure.
Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH) (Coupe andConvertible Models Only)Some child restraints have a LATCH system. Aspart of the LATCH system, your child restraint mayhave lower attachments and/or a top tether. TheLATCH system can help hold the child restraint inplace during driving or in a crash. Some vehicleshave lower and/or top tether anchors designedto secure a child restraint with lower attachmentsand/or a top tether.
45
Some child restraints with a top tether aredesigned to be used whether the top tether isanchored or not. Other child restraints require thatthe top tether be anchored. A national or locallaw may require that the top tether be anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facingchild restraints have a top tether, and thatthe tether be attached.
Your vehicle does not have lower anchors or toptether anchors to secure a child restraint with theLATCH system. If a national or local law requiresthat your top tether be anchored, do not use a childrestraint in this vehicle because a top tether cannotbe properly anchored. You must use the safetybelts to secure your child restraint in this vehicle,unless a national or local law requires that the toptether be anchored. Refer to your child restraintinstructions and instructions in this manual forsecuring a child restraint using the vehicle’s safetybelts. See Securing a Child Restraint in thePassenger Seat Position on page 46.
Securing a Child Restraint in thePassenger Seat PositionYour vehicle has a right front passenger airbag.A rear seat is a safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint.
In addition, your vehicle has the passengersensing system. The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the right front passenger’sfrontal airbag and side impact airbag (if equipped)when an infant in a rear-facing infant seat or asmall child in a forward-facing child restraintor booster seat is detected. See PassengerSensing System on page 59 and Passenger AirbagStatus Indicator on page 190 for more informationon this including important safety information.
Your vehicle has a label on the sun visor that says,“Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.”This is because the risk to the rear-facing child isso great, if the airbag deploys.
Never put a child in a rear-facing child restraint inthe passenger’s seat unless the passengerairbag status indicator shows off and the airbag isoff. Here is why:
46
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag. Be sure the airbag is offbefore using a rear-facing child restraintin the passenger’s position.
Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag and sideimpact airbag (if equipped) if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint, nosystem is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommend
CAUTION: (Continued)
CAUTION: (Continued)
that rear-facing child restraints betransported in vehicles with a rear seatthat will accommodate a rear-facing childrestraint, whenever possible.
If you need to secure a forward-facing childrestraint in the passenger’s position, move theseat as far back as it will go before securing theforward-facing child restraint. See Manual Seats onpage 8 or Power Seats on page 8.
If your vehicle is a coupe or a convertible, there isno top tether anchor in the passenger’s position.Do not secure a child restraint in this positionif a national or local law requires that a top tetherbe anchored or if the instructions that camewith your child restraint say that the top tethermust be anchored. See Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCH) (Z06 Models Only)on page 42 or Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH) (Coupe and Convertible ModelsOnly) on page 45 if your child restraint has atop tether.
47
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to securethe child restraint in this position. Be sure to followthe instructions that came with the child restraint.Secure the child in the child restraint when and asthe instructions say.
1. Your vehicle has a right front passenger’sfrontal airbag. See Passenger SensingSystem on page 59. We recommend thatrear-facing child restraints not be transportedin your vehicle, even if the airbag is off. Ifyour child restraint is forward-facing, move theseat as far back as it will go before securingthe child restraint in this seat. See ManualSeats on page 8 or Power Seats on page 8.When the passenger sensing system hasturned off the right front passenger’s frontalairbag and side impact airbag (if equipped), theoff indicator in the passenger airbag statusindicator should light and stay lit whenthe vehicle is started. See Passenger AirbagStatus Indicator on page 190.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap andshoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will show you how.
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release buttonis positioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
48
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set the lock.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the childrestraint, pull the shoulder portion of the beltto tighten the lap portion of the belt andfeed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.If you are using a forward-facing childrestraint, you may find it helpful to use yourknee to push down on the child restraintas you tighten the belt. You should not be ableto pull more of the belt from the retractoronce the lock has been set.
49
7. If your child restraint manufacturerrecommends using a top tether and yourvehicle is a Z06 model, attach and tighten thetop tether to the top tether anchor. Refer tothe instructions that came with the childrestraint and to Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCH) (Z06 Models Only)on page 42 or Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH) (Coupe and ConvertibleModels Only) on page 45.
8. Push and pull the child restraint in differentdirections to be sure it is secure.
9. If the airbag is off, the off indicator in theinside rearview mirror will be lit and stay litwhen the vehicle is started.
If a child restraint has been installed and the onindicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Removethe child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall thechild restraint.
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restartingthe vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check tomake sure that the vehicle’s seatback is notpressing the child restraint into the seat cushion. Ifthis happens, slightly recline the vehicle’sseatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.
If the on indicator is still lit, do not secure a childrestraint in this vehicle and check with your dealer.
To remove the child restraint, if the top tether isattached to the top tether anchor, disconnectit. Unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it goback all the way. The safety belt will movefreely again and be ready to work for an adult orlarger child passenger.
Airbag SystemYour vehicle has a frontal airbag for the driver anda frontal airbag for the passenger. Your vehiclemay also have a side impact airbag for the driver,and a side impact airbag for the right frontpassenger.
If your vehicle has a side impact airbag for thedriver and right front passenger, the word AIRBAGwill appear on the airbag covering on the side ofthe seatback closest to the door.
Airbags are designed to supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts. Even though today’sairbags are also designed to help reduce the riskof injury from the force of an inflating bag, allairbags must inflate very quickly to do their job.
50
Here are the most important things to know aboutthe airbag system:
{CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in acrash if you are not wearing your safetybelt — even if you have airbags. Wearingyour safety belt during a crash helpsreduce your chance of hitting thingsinside the vehicle or being ejected from it.Airbags are “supplemental restraints” tothe safety belts. All airbags are designedto work with safety belts, but do notreplace them.
{CAUTION:
Frontal airbags for the driver andpassenger are designed to deploy inmoderate to severe frontal and nearfrontal crashes. They are not designed toinflate in rollover, rear crashes, or in manyside crashes. And, for some unrestrainedoccupants, frontal airbags may provideless protection in frontal crashes thanmore forceful airbags have provided inthe past.
Side impact airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe crasheswhere something hits the side of yourvehicle. They are not designed to inflate infrontal, in rollover, or in rear crashes.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear asafety belt properly — whether or notthere is an airbag for that person.
51
{CAUTION:
Both frontal and side impact airbagsinflate with great force, faster than theblink of an eye. If you are too close to aninflating airbag, as you would be if youwere leaning forward, it could seriouslyinjure you. Safety belts help keep you inposition for airbag inflation before andduring a crash. Always wear your safetybelt even with frontal airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possible whilestill maintaining control of the vehicle.Occupants should not lean on or sleepagainst the door.
{CAUTION:
Anyone who is up against, or very closeto, any airbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer the bestprotection for adults, but not for youngchildren and infants. Neither the vehicle’ssafety belt system nor its airbag system isdesigned for them. Young children andinfants need the protection that a childrestraint system can provide. Alwayssecure children properly in your vehicle.To read how, see Older Children onpage 31 and Infants and Young Childrenon page 34.
52
There is an airbagreadiness light on theinstrument panel cluster,which shows theairbag symbol.
The system checks the airbag electrical system formalfunctions. The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. See Airbag Readiness Light onpage 189 for more information.
Where Are the Airbags?
The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of thesteering wheel.
53
The passenger’s frontal airbag is in the instrumentpanel on the passenger’s side.
If your vehicle has a side impact airbag for thedriver, it is in the side of the driver’s seatbackclosest to the door.
54
If your vehicle has a side impact airbag for theright front passenger, it is in the side of thepassenger’s seatback closest to the door.
{CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant andan airbag, the airbag might not inflateproperly or it might force the object intothat person causing severe injury or evendeath. The path of an inflating airbag mustbe kept clear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and an airbag, anddo not attach or put anything on thesteering wheel hub or on or near anyother airbag covering. Do not let seatcovers block the inflation path of a sideimpact airbag.
55
When Should an Airbag Inflate?The driver’s and passenger’s frontal airbags aredesigned to inflate in moderate to severe frontal ornear-frontal crashes. But they are designed toinflate only if the impact exceeds a predetermineddeployment threshold. Deployment thresholdstake into account a variety of desired deploymentand non-deployment events and are used topredict how severe a crash is likely to be in timefor the airbags to inflate and help restrain theoccupants. Whether your frontal airbags will orshould deploy is not based on how fast yourvehicle is traveling. It depends largely on what youhit, the direction of the impact, and how quicklyyour vehicle slows down.
In addition, your vehicle has “dual-stage” frontalairbags, which adjust the restraint accordingto crash severity. Your vehicle has electronicfrontal sensors which help the sensing systemdistinguish between a moderate frontal impact anda more severe frontal impact. For moderatefrontal impacts, these airbags inflate at a level lessthan full deployment. For more severe frontalimpacts, full deployment occurs.
If the front of your vehicle goes straight into awall that does not move or deform, the thresholdlevel for the reduced deployment is about10 to 12 mph (16 to 19.3 km/h), and thethreshold level for a full deployment is about18 to 21 mph (28.9 to 33.8 km/h). The thresholdlevel can vary, however, with specific vehicledesign, so that it can be somewhat above or belowthis range.Frontal airbags may inflate at different crashspeeds. For example:• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits a moving object.
• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, theairbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle hits an object thatdoes not deform.
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole),the airbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle hits a wide object(like a wall).
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle,the airbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle goes straight into theobject.
56
Frontal airbags (driver and passenger) are notintended to inflate during vehicle rollovers,rear impacts, or in many side impacts.
Your vehicle may or may not have side impactairbags. See Airbag System on page 50 for moreinformation. Side impact airbags are intendedto inflate in moderate to severe side crashes. Aside impact airbag will inflate if the crash severityis above the system’s designed “thresholdlevel.” The threshold level can vary with specificvehicle design. Side impact airbags are notintended to inflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts,rollovers, or rear impacts. A side impact airbagis intended to deploy on the side of the vehicle thatis struck.
In any particular crash, no one can say whetheran airbag should have inflated simply becauseof the damage to a vehicle or because of what therepair costs were. For frontal airbags, inflation isdetermined by what the vehicle hits, the angleof the impact, and how quickly the vehicle slowsdown in frontal and near-frontal impacts. Forside impact airbags, inflation is determined by thelocation and severity of the impact.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbagsensing system detects that the vehicle isin a crash. The sensing system triggers a releaseof gas from the inflator, which inflates theairbag. The inflator, the airbag and relatedhardware are all part of the airbag modules.Frontal airbag modules are located insidethe steering wheel and instrument panel. Forseating positions with side impact airbags, thereare also airbag modules in the side of theseatbacks closest to the door.
How Does an Airbag Restrain?In moderate to severe frontal or near frontalcollisions, even belted occupants can contact thesteering wheel or the instrument panel. Inmoderate to severe side collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the inside of the vehicle.Airbags supplement the protection providedby safety belts. Airbags distribute the force of theimpact more evenly over the occupant’s upperbody, stopping the occupant more gradually.
57
But the frontal airbags would not help you in manytypes of collisions, including rollovers, rearimpacts, and many side impacts, primarily becausean occupant’s motion is not toward the airbag.Side impact airbags would not help you in manytypes of collisions, including many frontal ornear frontal collisions, rollovers, and rear impacts.
Airbags should never be regarded as anythingmore than a supplement to safety belts, and thenonly in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontalcollisions for the driver’s and right frontpassenger’s frontal airbags, and only in moderateto severe side collisions for vehicles with sideimpact airbags.
What Will You See After an AirbagInflates?After an airbag inflates, it quickly deflates, soquickly that some people may not even realize theairbag inflated. Some components of the airbagmodule — the steering wheel hub for the driver’sfrontal airbag, the instrument panel for theright front passenger’s frontal airbag, and forseating positions with side impact airbags, the sideof the seatback closest to the door — may be
hot for a short time. The parts of the airbag thatcome into contact with you may be warm, but nottoo hot to touch. There may be some smokeand dust coming from the vents in the deflatedairbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent the driverfrom seeing out of the windshield or being ableto steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent peoplefrom leaving the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
When an airbag inflates, there may bedust in the air. This dust could causebreathing problems for people with ahistory of asthma or other breathingtrouble. To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon as it issafe to do so. If you have breathingproblems but cannot get out of the vehicleafter an airbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door. If youexperience breathing problems followingan airbag deployment, you should seekmedical attention.
58
Your vehicle has a feature that may automaticallyunlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on, andturn on the hazard warning flashers when theairbags inflate. You can lock the doors, turn theinterior lamps off, and turn the hazard warningflashers off by using the controls for those features.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate anairbag, windshields are broken by vehicledeformation. Additional windshield breakage mayalso occur from the right front passenger airbag.
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. Afterthey inflate, you will need some new parts forthe airbag system. If you do not get them, theairbag system will not be there to help protectyou in another crash. A new system will includeairbag modules and possibly other parts. Theservice manual for your vehicle covers the needto replace other parts.
• Your vehicle has a crash sensing anddiagnostic module which records informationafter a crash. See Vehicle Data Collection andEvent Data Recorders on page 464.
• Let only qualified technicians work on yourairbag system. Improper service can mean thatan airbag system will not work properly. Seeyour dealer for service.
Passenger Sensing SystemYour vehicle has a passenger sensing system.The passenger airbag status indicator in therearview mirror will be visible when you startthe vehicle.
The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on andoff, will be visible during the system check.
United States
Canada
59
When the system check is complete, either theword ON or the word OFF, or the symbol for on orthe symbol for off, will be visible. See PassengerAirbag Status Indicator on page 190.
The passenger sensing system will turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag and side impact airbag(if equipped) under certain conditions. Thedriver’s airbags are not part of the passengersensing system.
The passenger sensing system works withsensors that are part of the passenger’s seat andsafety belt. The sensors are designed to detectthe presence of a properly seated occupantand determine if the passenger’s frontal airbagand side impact airbag (if equipped) shouldbe enabled (may inflate) or not.
Accident statistics show that children are safer ifthey are restrained in the rear rather than the frontseat. We recommend that rear-facing childrestraints not be transported in your vehicle, evenif the airbag is off.
Your vehicle has a label on the sun visor thatsays, “Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front.” This is because the risk to therear-facing child is so great if the airbag deploys.
Never put a child in a rear-facing child restraintin the passenger’s seat unless the passengerairbag status indicator shows off and the airbagsare off.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if thepassenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag. Be sure the airbag is offbefore using a rear-facing child restraintin the passenger’s position.
CAUTION: (Continued)
60
CAUTION: (Continued)
Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag and sideimpact airbag (if equipped) if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint, nosystem is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints betransported in vehicles with a rear seatthat will accommodate a rear-facing childrestraint, whenever possible.
If you need to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the passenger’s seat,always move the passenger’s seat as farback as it will go. It is better to secure thechild restraint in a rear seat.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turnoff the passenger’s frontal airbag and sideimpact airbag (if equipped) if:
• The passenger’s seat is unoccupied.
• The system determines that an infant ispresent in a rear-facing infant seat.
• The system determines that a small child ispresent in a forward-facing child restraint.
• The system determines that a small child ispresent in a booster seat.
• A passenger takes his/her weight off of theseat for a period of time.
• The passenger’s seat is occupied by a smallerperson, such as a child who has outgrownchild restraints.
• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbagsystem or the passenger sensing system.
When the passenger’s frontal airbag and sideimpact airbag (if equipped) have been turned offby the passenger sensing system, the off indicatorwill light and stay lit to remind you that theairbags are off.
61
If a child restraint has been installed and the onindicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Removethe child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall thechild restraint following the child restraintmanufacturer’s directions and refer to Securing aChild Restraint in the Passenger Seat Positionon page 46.
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restartingthe vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check tomake sure that the vehicle’s seatback is notpressing the child restraint into the seat cushion. Ifthis happens, slightly recline the vehicle’sseatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.
If the on indicator is still lit, do not secure thechild restraint in this vehicle and check with yourdealer.
The passenger sensing system is designed toenable (may inflate) the passenger’s frontal airbagand side impact airbag (if equipped) anytimethe system senses that a person of adult size issitting properly in the passenger’s seat. When thepassenger sensing system has allowed theairbags to be enabled, the on indicator will lightand stay lit to remind you that the airbags areactive.
For some children who have outgrown childrestraints and for very small adults, the passengersensing system may or may not turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag and side impact airbag(if equipped), depending upon the person’sseating posture and body build. Everyone in yourvehicle who has outgrown child restraintsshould wear a safety belt properly — whether ornot there is an airbag for that person.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in thepassenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, itcould be because that person is not sitting properlyin the seat. If this happens, turn the vehicle offand ask the person to place the seatback inthe fully upright position, then sit upright in theseat, centered on the seat cushion, with theperson’s legs comfortably extended. Restart thevehicle and have the person remain in this positionfor about two minutes. This will allow the systemto detect that person and then enable thepassenger’s frontal airbag and side impact airbag(if equipped).
62
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in theinstrument panel cluster ever comes onand stays on, it means that somethingmay be wrong with the airbag system. Ifthis ever happens, have the vehicleserviced promptly, because an adult-sizeperson sitting in the right frontpassenger’s seat may not have theprotection of an airbag. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 189 for more onthis, including important safetyinformation.
63
Aftermarket equipment, such as seat covers, canaffect how well the passenger sensing systemoperates. You may want to consider not using seatcovers or other aftermarket equipment if yourvehicle has the passenger sensing system. SeeAdding Equipment to Your Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 65 for more information aboutmodifications that can affect how the systemoperates.
{CAUTION:
Stowing of articles under the passenger’sseat or between the passenger’s seatcushion and seatback may interfere withthe proper operation of the passengersensing system.
Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicleAirbags affect how your vehicle should beserviced. There are parts of the airbag systemin several places around your vehicle.
You do not want the system to inflate whilesomeone is working on your vehicle. Your dealerand the service manual have information aboutservicing your vehicle and the airbag system. Topurchase a service manual, see ServicePublications Ordering Information on page 471.
{CAUTION:
For up to 10 seconds, after the ignition isturned off and the battery is disconnected,an airbag can still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if you areclose to an airbag when it inflates. Avoidyellow connectors. They are probably partof the airbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, and make surethe person performing work for you isqualified to do so.
The airbag system does not need regularmaintenance.
64
Adding Equipment to YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: Is there anything I might add to the frontor sides of the vehicle that could keep theairbags from working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that change yourvehicle’s frame, bumper system, height,front end or side sheet metal, they may keepthe airbag system from working properly.Also, the airbag system may not work properlyif you relocate any of the airbag sensors. Ifyou have any questions about this, you shouldcontact Customer Assistance before youmodify your vehicle. The phone numbers andaddresses for Customer Assistance are inStep Two of the Customer SatisfactionProcedure in this manual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure on page 452.
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to getmy vehicle modified. How can I find outwhether this will affect my advanced airbagsystem?
A: Changing or moving any parts of the frontseats, safety belts, the airbag sensing anddiagnostic module, steering wheel, instrumentpanel, the inside review mirror, or airbagwiring can affect the operation of the airbagsystem. If you have questions, call CustomerAssistance. The phone numbers andaddresses for Customer Assistance are inStep Two of the Customer SatisfactionProcedure in this manual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure on page 452.
65
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint SystemsNow and then, make sure the safety belt reminderlight and all your belts, buckles, latch plates,retractors and anchorages are working properly.Look for any other loose or damaged safetybelt system parts. If you see anything that mightkeep a safety belt system from doing its job, haveit repaired. See Care of Safety Belts on page 411.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in acrash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If abelt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken airbag covers,and have them repaired or replaced. The airbagsystem does not need regular maintenance.
Notice: If you damage the covering for thedriver’s or the right front passenger’s frontalairbag, or an airbag covering on a seatback(if equipped), the airbag may not work properly.You may have to replace the airbag module inthe steering wheel, both the airbag module andthe instrument panel for the right frontpassenger’s frontal airbag, or both the airbagmodule and the seatback for seating positionswith a side impact airbag (if equipped). Do notopen or break the airbag coverings.
66
Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash
{CAUTION:
A crash can damage the restraint systemsin your vehicle. A damaged restraintsystem may not properly protect theperson using it, resulting in serious injuryor even death in a crash. To help makesure your restraint systems are workingproperly after a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon as possible.
If you have had a crash, do you need new belts orLATCH system (if equipped) parts?After a very minor collision, nothing may benecessary. But if the belts were stretched, as theywould be if worn during a more severe crash,then you need new parts.If your vehicle has the LATCH system and it wasbeing used during a more severe crash, youmay need new LATCH system parts.
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them.Collision damage also may mean you will need tohave LATCH system (if equipped), safety beltor seat parts repaired or replaced. New parts andrepairs may be necessary even if the belt orLATCH system (if equipped) was not being usedat the time of the collision.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replaceairbag system parts. See the part on the airbagsystem earlier in this section.
If the frontal airbags inflate, you will also need toreplace the driver’s and right front passenger’ssafety belt buckle assembly. Be sure to doso. Then the new buckle assembly will be there tohelp protect you in a collision.
After a crash you may need to replace the driverand front passenger’s safety belt buckleassemblies, even if the frontal airbags have notdeployed. The driver and front passenger’s safetybelt buckle assemblies contain the safety beltpretensioners. Have your safety belt pretensionerschecked if your vehicle has been in a collision,or if your airbag readiness light stays on after youstart your vehicle or while you are driving. SeeAirbag Readiness Light on page 189.
67
✍ NOTES
68
Keys .............................................................. 71Keyless Access System .............................. 73Keyless Access System Operation .............. 74
Doors and Locks .......................................... 78Door Locks ................................................. 78Power Door Locks ....................................... 81Automatic Door Lock ................................... 81Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ........ 82Lockout Protection ....................................... 82Hatch/Trunk ................................................. 83
Windows ....................................................... 86Power Windows .......................................... 87Sun Visors .................................................. 87
Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................... 88Theft-Deterrent System ................................ 88
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ........... 90New Vehicle Break-In .................................. 90Ignition Positions ......................................... 90Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ............... 91Starting the Engine ..................................... 91Engine Coolant Heater ................................ 94Automatic Transmission Operation ............... 95
Manual Transmission Operation ................. 100Parking Brake ........................................... 103Shifting Into Park (P)
(Automatic Transmission) ....................... 103Shifting Out of Park (P)
(Automatic Transmission) ....................... 105Parking Your Vehicle
(Manual Transmission) ........................... 105Parking Over Things That Burn ................. 106Engine Exhaust ......................................... 106Running the Engine While Parked ............. 107
Mirrors ......................................................... 108Manual Rearview Mirror ............................. 108Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with
OnStar® and Compass ........................... 108Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with Compass ........................................ 110Outside Power Heated Mirrors ................... 113Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror ............. 114Outside Convex Mirror ............................... 114
OnStar® System .......................................... 114
Section 2 Features and Controls
69
Universal Home Remote System ................ 118Universal Home Remote System
(With One Triangular LED) ..................... 118Universal Home Remote System
(With Three Round LED) ....................... 118Universal Home Remote System
Operation (With Three Round LED) ....... 119Universal Home Remote System
Operation (With One Triangular LED) ..... 124Storage Areas ............................................. 128
Glove Box ................................................. 128Cupholder(s) .............................................. 128Center Console Storage Area .................... 129
Floor Mats ................................................. 129Rear Storage Area .................................... 130Convenience Net ....................................... 131Cargo Cover ............................................. 132
Roof Panel .................................................. 133Removing the Roof Panel ......................... 133Storing the Roof Panel .............................. 136Installing the Roof Panel ........................... 137
Convertible Top .......................................... 138Convertible Top (Manual) .......................... 138Convertible Top (Power) ............................ 145
Section 2 Features and Controls
70
Keys
{CAUTION:
Leaving children unattended in a vehicleis dangerous, but it is even moredangerous if the keyless accesstransmitter is also left in the vehicle.A child or others could be badly injured oreven killed.
They could operate the power windowsor other controls or even make thevehicle move.
Do not leave the keyless accesstransmitter in a vehicle with children.
71
There is a key, locatedinside the keylessaccess transmitter, thatworks the glove boxand can open thehatch/trunk lid if vehiclepower is lost. SeeHatch/Trunk on page 83for more information.
To remove the key,press the button (A)near the bottom of thekeyless accesstransmitter, and pull thekey out. Never pullthe key out withoutpressing the button.
Your vehicle has a keyless access system withpushbutton start. See Ignition Positions on page 90for information on starting the vehicle.
Notice: If you ever lose your transmitter(s)and/or key, it could be difficult to get into yourvehicle. You may even have to damage yourvehicle to get in. Be sure you have a sparetransmitter and/or key.
In an emergency, contact Roadside Assistance.See Roadside Assistance Program on page 458.
72
Keyless Access SystemYour vehicle has a Keyless Access System thatoperates on a radio frequency subject to FederalCommunications Commission (FCC) Rulesand with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmfulinterference.
2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by otherthan an authorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.
If you ever notice a decrease in the keylessaccess transmitter range, try doing one of thefollowing:
• Check the distance. You may be too far fromyour vehicle. You may need to stand closerduring rainy or snowy weather.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objectsmay be blocking the signal. Take a few stepsto the left or right, hold the transmitterhigher, and try again.
• Check to determine if battery replacement isnecessary. See “Battery Replacement”under Keyless Access System Operation onpage 74.
• Check to make sure that an electronic devicesuch as a cellular phone or lap top computeris not causing interference.
• If you are still having trouble, see your dealeror a qualified technician for service.
73
Keyless Access System OperationYour vehicle has a keyless access systemthat allows you to lock and unlock your doors,unlock your hatch/trunk lid and disarm or arm yourtheft-deterrent system. The range distance is asmuch as 100 feet (30 m) away.
Your vehiclecomes standard withtwo transmitters, and upto four can be matchedto your vehicle. See“Matching Transmitter(s)to Your Vehicle” laterin this section.
Q (Lock): Press this button to lock the doors.The light on the door will flash once. If this buttonis pressed two times, the doors will lock, thelight will flash and the horn will sound.
K (Unlock): Press this button to unlock thedriver’s door. The light on the door will flashtwo times. Press the button two times within10 seconds to unlock both doors. If it is darkenough outside, your interior lamps will come on.
Your memory settings may also be recalledwhen you press the unlock button on the keylessaccess transmitter. See Memory Seat, Mirrorsand Steering Wheel on page 10 for moreinformation.
} (Hatch/Trunk): Press and hold this button forabout one second to open the hatch/trunk lidwhile the engine is turned off. If the engineis running the shift lever needs to be in PARK (P)for an automatic transmission or NEUTRALwith the parking brake set for a manualtransmission. See Parking Brake on page 103.
L (Panic): Press this button to sound thevehicle alarm. Press any other button on thekeyless access transmitter to stop the vehiclealarm.
74
Matching Transmitter(s) to YourVehicleEach keyless access transmitter is coded to allowonly transmitters programmed to your vehicle,to work. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, areplacement can be purchased and programmedthrough your dealer. Your dealer can reprogramyour vehicle so lost or stolen transmitters no longerwork with your vehicle. Each vehicle can have amaximum of four transmitters matched to it.
To match a new transmitter to your vehicle whenyou have a recognized transmitter (two recognizedtransmitters are required for Canadian owners), dothe following:
1. The vehicle must be off.
2. Have the recognized and new, unrecognizedtransmitters on your person.
3. Go to the rear of the vehicle and insert thevehicle key into the key cylinder locatedabove the license plate. See Hatch/Trunk onpage 83 for more information on the keycylinder.
4. Open the trunk.
5. Turn the key five times within five seconds.
6. The DIC will display READY FOR FOB #X,where X can be 2, 3 or 4.
7. Place the new, unrecognized transmitter inthe glove box transmitter pocket with thebuttons facing towards the passenger’s side.
8. Once the transmitter is programmed, a beepwill sound. The DIC will display READYFOR #X, where X can be 3 or 4, orMAX # FOBS LEARNED.
9. Press the Acc button (ignition switch).
75
The Canadian immobilizer standard requiresCanadian owners to see their dealer for matchingnew transmitters when a recognized transmitteris not available. United States owners arepermitted to match a new transmitter to theirvehicle when a recognized transmitter isnot available. The procedure will requirethree ten minutes cycles to complete the matchingprocess. Do the following:
1. The vehicle must be off.
2. Place the new, unrecognized transmitter inthe glove box transmitter pocket with thebuttons facing towards the passenger side.
3. Go to the rear of the vehicle and insert thevehicle key into the key cylinder located abovethe license plate. See Hatch/Trunk on page 83for more information on the key cylinder.
4. Open the trunk.
5. Turn the key five times within five seconds.
6. The DIC message will displayOFF-ACCESSORY TO LEARN.
7. Press the Acc. button (ignition switch).
8. The DIC will read WAIT 10 MINUTES and willcount down to zero, one minute at a time.
9. The DIC will display OFF-ACCESSORY TOLEARN again.
10. Press the Acc. button (ignition switch).
11. The DIC will read WAIT 10 MINUTES and willcount down to zero, one minute at a time.
12. The DIC will display OFF-ACCESSORY TOLEARN again.
76
13. Press the Acc. button (ignition switch).
14. The DIC will read WAIT 10 MINUTES and willcount down to zero, one minute at a time.
15. A beep will sound and the DIC will readREADY FOR FOB #1. At this time, allpreviously known transmitters have beenerased.
16. Once the transmitter is recognized andprogrammed, a beep will sound and theDIC will display READY FOR FOB #2.
If you have additional transmitters to program,take transmitter 1 out of the transmitter pocket andplace transmitter 2 in the pocket. This can bedone repeatedly until up to four transmitters havebe programmed. The DIC will then displayMAX # FOBS LEARNED and will exit theprogramming mode.
When you are done programming transmitters,press the Acc. button (ignition switch).
Battery ReplacementUnder normal use, the battery in your keylessaccess transmitter should last about three years.
The battery is weak if the transmitter will notwork at the normal range in any location. If youhave to get close to your vehicle before thetransmitter works, it is probably time to change thebattery.
A weak battery may also cause the DIC to displayNO FOBS DETECTED when you try to startthe vehicle. If this happens, place the transmitterin the glove box transmitter pocket with thebuttons facing towards the passenger’s side. Then,with the vehicle in PARK (P) for an automatictransmission, press the brake pedal and theSTART button. If your vehicle has a manualtransmission, press the clutch and the STARTbutton. Although this will start the vehicle, itis recommended that you replace the transmitterbattery as soon as possible. The DIC maydisplay FOB BATTERY LOW.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use carenot to touch any of the circuitry. Staticfrom your body transferred to these surfacesmay damage the transmitter.
77
1. Insert a flat object with a thin edge into theslot on the side of the transmitter andseparate the bottom half from the top half.
2. Gently pull the battery out of the transmitter.
3. Put the new battery in the transmitter,positive (+) side down. Use a battery,type CR2032, or equivalent.
4. Reassemble the transmitter. Make sure to putit together so water will not get in.
5. Test the transmitter.
Doors and Locks
Door Locks
{CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.• Passengers — especially
children — can easily open the doorsand fall out of a moving vehicle. Whena door is locked it will not open. Youincrease the chance of being thrownout of the vehicle in a crash if thedoors are not locked. So, wear safetybelts properly and lock the doorswhenever you drive.
CAUTION: (Continued)
78
CAUTION: (Continued)
• Young children who get into unlockedvehicles may be unable to get out.A child can be overcome by extremeheat and can suffer permanent injuriesor even death from heat stroke.Always lock your vehicle wheneveryou leave it.
• Outsiders can easily enter through anunlocked door when you slow downor stop your vehicle. Locking yourdoors can help prevent this fromhappening.
There are several ways to lock and unlock yourvehicle.
From the outside, press the lock or unlock buttonon the keyless access transmitter.
When you have the transmitter with you, you mayalso unlock and open the door by squeezingthe door handle sensor (A). You do not have topress the unlock button on the transmitter. You willbe able to open the door when you press thedoor handle sensor and the vehicle recognizesyour keyless access transmitter. When thepassenger door is opened first, the driver’s doorwill also unlock.
From the inside, use the power door lock switchlocated at the top of the door panel near bothwindows. See Power Door Locks on page 81.
Door Open to Show Location of Door Handle Sensor
79
To open a door from the inside, press the button (B)in front of the door handle and push the door open.You will hear a tone when the button is pressed.
If power to the vehicle or the keyless accesstransmitter is lost, there are two ways to openthe door.
From inside the vehicle, use the door releasehandle located on the floor next to each seat. Pullthe handle up to unlock and unlatch the door.
From outside the vehicle, use the key in thecylinder above the license plate to open the hatchthe use the door release tab located on thecarpet inside the trunk on the driver’s side of thevehicle. Pull the tab to unlock and unlatch thedriver’s door. See Keys on page 71 for informationon opening the trunk during a loss of power.
80
Power Door Locks
The power door lockswitches are located onthe door panels.
K (Unlock): Press this part of the switch tounlock the doors.
Q (Lock): Press this part of the switch to lockthe doors.
There is an indicator light on the rear of the doornear the window.
When lock is pressed, a beep will sound. If thedoor is closed when lock is pressed, the light willcome on for a few seconds, then turn off. Ifthe door is open when lock is pressed, the lightwill stay on.
When unlock is pressed, a beep will sound. If thedoor is closed when unlock is pressed, thelight will flash two times. If the door is open whenunlock is pressed, the light will flash.
Automatic Door LockYour vehicle is programmed so that, when thedoors are closed, the ignition is on and theshift lever is moved out of PARK (P) for automatictransmissions, or when vehicle speed becomesfaster than 8 mph (13 km/h) for manualtransmissions, both doors will lock.
If someone needs to get out while the vehicle isrunning or not in PARK (P), have the personuse the power door unlock switch. When the dooris closed again, the doors will lock either whenyour foot is removed from the brake or the vehiclespeed becomes faster than 8 mph (13 km/h).
81
Programmable AutomaticDoor UnlockYour vehicle is programmed so that when the shiftlever is moved into PARK (P) for automatictransmission vehicles or when the ignition is turnedoff or is in Retained Accessory Power (RAP) formanual transmission vehicles, both doors willunlock.
With the vehicle stopped and the engine running,door unlocking can be programmed throughprompts displayed on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). These prompts allow the driver tochoose various unlock settings. For programminginformation, see DIC Vehicle Personalizationon page 232.
Lockout ProtectionYour vehicle can be programmed to sound thehorn three times and unlock the driver’s door whenboth doors are closed and there is a keylessaccess transmitter inside the vehicle. When thedriver’s door is opened, a reminder chime willsound continuously. The vehicle will remain lockedonly when at least one transmitter has beenremoved from the vehicle and both doors areclosed. See DIC Vehicle Personalization onpage 232.
82
Hatch/Trunk
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to drive with thehatch/trunk lid open because carbonmonoxide (CO) gas can come into yourvehicle. You can not see or smell CO. It cancause unconsciousness and even death.If you must drive with the hatch/trunk lidopen or if electrical wiring or other cableconnections must pass through the sealbetween the body and the hatch/trunk lid:
• Make sure all other windows are shut.• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed and selectthe control setting that will forceoutside air into your vehicle. See DualAutomatic Climate Control System onpage 177.
• If you have air outlets on or underthe instrument panel, open them allthe way.
See Engine Exhaust on page 106.
Notice: Closing the hatch/trunk lid forcefullyor from the sides can cause damage to theglass, the defogger or the weather stripping.Be sure objects will fit in the hatch/trunkarea before closing the hatch/trunk lid. Whenclosing the hatch/trunk lid, gently pull downfrom the center.
Notice: Do not store heavy or sharp objectsin the rear storage compartments located in thehatch/trunk area. If you do, the objects coulddamage the underbody.
83
Hatch/Trunk Lid ReleaseThere are several ways to release the hatch/trunklid. If your vehicle has an automatic transmission,the shift lever must be in PARK (P). For manualtransmission vehicles, the parking brake must beset when the ignition is started for the hatch/trunkrelease to operate. The parking brake doesnot need to be set when the ignition is off for thehatch/trunk release to operate. See ParkingBrake on page 103.
• V (Hatch/Trunk): Press the hatch/trunk lidrelease button, located on the instrumentpanel to the left of the steering wheel.The theft-deterrent alarm system must not bearmed.
• } (Hatch/Trunk): Press the hatch/trunk lidrelease button on the keyless accesstransmitter. See Keyless Access System onpage 73.
• Press the hatch/trunk release button locatedon the rear of the hatch/trunk lid above thelicense plate, as long as you have yourtransmitter with you.
If your vehicle has lost battery power, open thehatch/trunk using the vehicle key located inside thekeyless access transmitter. See Keys on page 71for more information. The key lock cylinder islocated on the rear of the hatch/trunk lid above thelicense plate. Turn the vehicle key clockwise inthe lock.
84
Closing the Rear Compartment (Coupe)To assist in closing the rear compartment lidof your coupe, use the pocket on the underside ofthe lid on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.When closing the lid, lower it until the power pulldown latch feature activates and it will closethe rest of the way and latch automatically.
Emergency Trunk Release Handle(Convertible Only)
Notice: Do not use the emergency trunkrelease handle as a tie-down or anchor pointwhen securing items in the trunk as itcould damage the handle. The emergencytrunk release handle is only intended to aid aperson trapped in a latched trunk, enablingthem to open the trunk from the inside.
There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunkrelease handle located on the rear wall of the trunkbelow the latch. This handle will glow followingexposure to light. Pull the release handle down toopen the trunk from the inside.
85
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or petsin a vehicle with the windows closed isdangerous. They can be overcome by theextreme heat and suffer permanentinjuries or even death from heat stroke.Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or apet alone in a vehicle, especially with thewindows closed in warm or hot weather.
86
Power Windows
The power windowswitches are located oneach door.
Pull up on the front of the switch to raise thewindow. Press down on the front of the switch tolower the window.
Your vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP)that allows you to use the power windows when theignition is off. For more information, see RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) on page 91.
Express-Down WindowThis feature is on both power windows. Press thefront of the switch to the second position to activatethe express-down feature. If you want to stop thewindow as it is lowering, press the switch again.
Window IndexingThis feature automatically lowers the window asmall amount when the door is opened. Then,when the door is closed, the window will raise toits full up position. If either window does notindex properly, it could be due to loss of power.Before returning to your dealer for service, performthe power window initialize procedure following.
Power Window InitializeAfter a power reconnect such as batteryreplacement, the window index-up feature will notfunction until the system is initialized. Oncepower is restored, do the following:
1. Close the door.
2. Raise the window by pulling up the switch.
3. Hold the up switch for three seconds after thewindow is closed. Release the switch.
4. Hold the up switch again for three secondsand release.
Sun VisorsTo block out glare, you can swing down thevisors. You can also swing them to the side.
87
Lighted Visor Vanity MirrorsPull down the sun visor and lift the cover toexpose the lighted vanity mirror. When the coveris lifted, the lamps will come on automatically,even if the ignition is off.
Theft-Deterrent SystemsVehicle theft is big business, especially in somecities. Although your vehicle has a number oftheft-deterrent features, we know that nothing weput on it can make it impossible to steal.
Theft-Deterrent SystemYour vehicle is equipped with a theft-deterrentalarm system.
With this system, thesecurity light will flashwhen the door isopen and locked withthe power doorlock switch.
If this light is on continuously while the engine isrunning, your vehicle needs service.
Arming the SystemUse one of the three following items listed here toarm the system:
• Press the lock button on the keyless accesstransmitter.
• Open the door. Lock the door with the powerdoor lock switch. The security light shouldflash. Remove the keyless access transmitterfrom inside the vehicle and close the door.The security light will stop flashing andstay on. After 30 seconds, the light shouldturn off.
• The vehicle can be programmed toautomatically lock the doors and arm thetheft-deterrent system when you exitthe vehicle. See DIC Vehicle Personalizationon page 232.
Now, if a door or the hatch/trunk is opened withoutthe keyless access transmitter, the alarm will gooff. Your horn will sound for two minutes, thenit will go off to save battery power. Your vehicle willnot start without a keyless access transmitterpresent.
88
The theft-deterrent system will not arm if you lockthe driver’s door with the power door lockswitch after the doors are closed.
If your passenger stays in the vehicle when youleave with the keyless access transmitter, have thepassenger lock the vehicle after the doors areclosed. This way the alarm will not arm, and yourpassenger will not set it off.
Testing the AlarmDo the following to test the system:
1. Make sure the trunk lid/hatch is latched.
2. Lower the window on the driver’s door.
3. Manually arm the system.
4. Close the doors and wait 30 seconds.
5. Reach through the open window and manuallypull the release lever on the floor.
6. Turn off the alarm by pressing the unlockbutton on the transmitter.
If the alarm is inoperative, check to see if the hornworks. If not, check the horn fuse. See Fuses andCircuit Breakers on page 420. If the horn works, butthe alarm doesn’t go off, see your dealer.
Disarming the SystemAlways use your keyless access transmitter tounlock a door either by pressing the unlock buttonon the transmitter or by squeezing the doorhandle sensor while you have the transmitter withyou. Unlocking a door any other way will setoff the alarm. If your alarm sounds, pressthe unlock button on the keyless accesstransmitter to disarm it.
89
Starting and Operating YourVehicle
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: Your vehicle does not need anelaborate break-in. But it will perform better inthe long run if you follow these guidelines:• Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h)
or less for the first 500 miles (805 km).• Do not drive at any one constant speed,
fast or slow, for the first 500 miles(805 km). Do not make full-throttle starts.Avoid downshifting to brake, or slow,the vehicle.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first200 miles (322 km) or so. During this timeyour new brake linings are not yet brokenin. Hard stops with new linings can meanpremature wear and earlier replacement.Follow this breaking-in guideline every timeyou get new brake linings.
Following break-in, engine speed and load canbe gradually increased.
Ignition Positions
Your vehicle has anelectronic keylessignition with apushbutton start.
/ (START): Press this button while your foot ison the brake for an automatic transmission, orwhile pressing in the clutch for a manualtransmission, to start the engine. If your vehicle isin OFF or Retained Accessory Power (RAP)mode, the keyless access transmitter must beinside the vehicle to start the engine.
90
9 Acc. (OFF/ACCESSORY): When the engineis on or the vehicle is in accessory power mode, it isrecommended that a manual transmission beplaced in REVERSE (R). An automatictransmission must be placed in PARK (P). Thenpress the Acc. button to turn the engine off andplace the vehicle in RAP. See “Retained AccessoryPower (RAP)” later for more information. If anautomatic vehicle is not correctly placed inPARK (P) a SHIFT TO PARK message will displayon the Driver Information Center (DIC).
For more information, see DIC Warnings andMessages on page 212.
When the engine is off, press this button to placethe vehicle in accessory mode. ACCESSORYMODE ON will display on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). This mode allows you to usethings like the radio and the windshield wiperswhile the engine is off. Use accessory mode if youmust have your vehicle in motion while theengine is off, for example, if your vehicle is beingpushed or towed.
After being in accessory mode for about20 minutes, the vehicle will automatically enterRAP or OFF, depending on if the doors areopened or closed.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)With RAP, your power windows and the audiosystem will continue to work for up to 10 minutesafter the engine is turned off or until eitherdoor is opened. If a door is opened, the powerwindows and audio system will shut off.
Starting the EngineMove the shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)for an automatic transmission. For a manualtransmission the vehicle can be started inNEUTRAL or any other gear as long as the clutch isdepressed. To restart a manual transmission whenyou are already moving, use the NEUTRAL positiononly. To restart an automatic transmission whenyou are already moving, use NEUTRAL (N).
Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if yourvehicle is moving. If you do, you coulddamage the transmission. Shift to PARK (P)only when your vehicle is stopped.
The keyless access transmitter must be inside thevehicle for the ignition to work.
91
Cell phone chargers can interfere with theoperation of the Keyless Access System. Batterychargers should not be plugged in when startingor turning off the engine.
To start your vehicle, do the following:
1. For an automatic transmission, with your footon the brake pedal, press the START buttonlocated on the instrument panel. For amanual transmission, while pressing in theclutch, press the START button.If there is not a keyless access transmitter inthe vehicle or if there is something causinginterference with it, the DIC will displayNO FOBS DETECTED. See DIC Warningsand Messages on page 212 for moreinformation.
2. When the engine begins cranking, let go ofthe button and the engine cranks automaticallyuntil it starts. If the battery in the keylessaccess transmitter is weak, the DIC displaysFOB BATTERY LOW. You can still drivethe vehicle.
See “Battery Replacement” under KeylessAccess System Operation on page 74 for moreinformation. If the fob battery is dead, youneed to insert the fob into the fob slot to enableengine starting. See “No Fobs Detected”under DIC Warnings and Messages onpage 212.
3. Do not race the engine immediately afterstarting it. Operate the engine andtransmission gently until the oil warms up andlubricates all moving parts.
4. If the engine does not start and no DICmessage is displayed, wait 15 secondsbefore trying again to let the cranking motorcool down.If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,especially in very cold weather (below 0°For −18°C), it could be flooded with too muchgasoline. Try pushing the accelerator pedal allthe way to the floor while cranking for up to15 seconds maximum. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to allow the cranking motor tocool down. When the engine starts, let go of theaccelerator. If the vehicle starts briefly but thenstops again, do the same thing. This clears theextra gasoline from the engine.
92
Notice: Cranking the engine for long periodsof time, by pressing the START buttonimmediately after cranking has ended, canoverheat and damage the cranking motor, anddrain the battery. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to allow the cranking motorto cool down.
Your vehicle has a Computer-Controlled CrankingSystem. This feature assists in starting theengine and protects components. Once crankinghas been initiated, the engine continues crankingfor a few seconds or until the vehicle starts.If the engine does not start, cranking automaticallystops after 15 seconds to prevent crankingmotor damage. To prevent gear damage, thissystem also prevents cranking if the engineis already running.
Notice: Your engine is designed to work withthe electronics in your vehicle. If you addelectrical parts or accessories, you couldchange the way the engine operates. Beforeadding electrical equipment, check withyour dealer. If you do not, your engine mightnot perform properly. Any resulting damagewould not be covered by your vehicle’swarranty.
Stopping Your EngineIf your vehicle has an automatic transmission,move the shift lever to PARK (P) and pressthe Acc. (Off/Accessory) button located on theinstrument panel. If the shift lever is not inPARK (P), the engine shuts off and the vehiclegoes into the Accessory Mode. The DIC displays“SHIFT TO PARK”. Once the shifter is movedto PARK (P), the vehicle turns off. If your vehiclehas a manual transmission, it is recommendedthat you move the shift lever to REVERSE (R) andset the parking brake after you turn off theengine by pressing the Acc. (Off/Accessory)button.
If the keyless access transmitter is not detectedinside the vehicle when it is turned to off, the DICdisplays NO FOB – OFF OR RUN?.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 212 formore information.
93
Engine Coolant HeaterYour vehicle may have an engine coolant heater.
In very cold weather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder,the engine coolant heater can help. You will geteasier starting and better fuel economy duringengine warm-up.
Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged ina minimum of four hours prior to starting yourvehicle. At temperatures above 32°F (0°C), use ofthe coolant heater is not required. Your vehiclemay also have an internal thermostat in theplug end of the cord. This will prevent operation ofthe engine coolant heater when the temperatureis at or above 0°F (−18°C) as noted on the cord.
To Use The Engine Coolant Heater1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.The electrical cord is located on the driver’sside of the engine compartment, in front of thecoolant surge tank.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt ACoutlet.
{CAUTION:
Plugging the cord into an ungroundedoutlet could cause an electrical shock.Also, the wrong kind of extension cordcould overheat and cause a fire. Youcould be seriously injured. Plug the cordinto a properly grounded three-prong110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will notreach, use a heavy-duty three-prongextension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplugand store the cord as it was before to keep itaway from moving engine parts. If you donot it could be damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heaterplugged in? The answer depends on the outsidetemperature, the kind of oil you have, and someother things. Instead of trying to list everything here,we ask that you contact your dealer in the areawhere you will be parking your vehicle. The dealercan give you the best advice for that particular area.
94
Automatic Transmission Operation
There are severaldifferent positions foryour shift lever.
PARK (P): This position locks your rear wheels.It is the best position to use when you start yourengine because your vehicle cannot move easily.
{CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicleif the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P)with the parking brake firmly set. Yourvehicle can roll.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engineis running unless you have to. If you haveleft the engine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure your vehicle will notmove, even when you are on fairly levelground, always set your parking brakeand move the shift lever to PARK (P).See Shifting Into Park (P) (AutomaticTransmission) on page 103.
Be sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) beforestarting the engine. Your vehicle has anautomatic transmission shift lock control system.
95
You have to fully apply your regular brakes first andthen press the shift lever button before you can shiftfrom PARK (P) when the vehicle is running. If youcannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on theshift lever and push the shift lever all the way intoPARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Thenpress the shift lever button and move the shift leverinto another gear. See Shifting Out of Park (P)(Automatic Transmission) on page 105.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while yourvehicle is moving forward could damage thetransmission. The repairs would not be coveredby your warranty. Shift to REVERSE (R) onlyafter your vehicle is stopped.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out ofsnow, ice, or sand without damaging yourtransmission, see If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 306.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine doesnot connect with the wheels. To restart whenyou are already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.If your vehicle needs towing, see Towing YourVehicle on page 313.
{CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while yourengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot is firmly onthe brake pedal, your vehicle could movevery rapidly. You could lose control andhit people or objects. Do not shift into adrive gear while your engine is running athigh speed.
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N) with the engine running at highspeed may damage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered by your warranty.Be sure the engine is not running at highspeed when shifting your vehicle.
96
DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving.It provide the best fuel economy for your vehicle.If you need more power for passing, and you are:
• Going less than about 35 mph (56 km/h), pushthe accelerator pedal about halfway down.
• Going about 35 mph (56 km/h) or more, pushthe accelerator all the way down.
Downshifting the transmission in slippery roadconditions could result in skidding, see “Skidding”under Loss of Control on page 289.
SPORT MODE (S): When in SPORT MODE (S),the transmission will work as an automaticuntil you use the Manual Paddle Shift Controls,which activates the driver manual gear selection.See Manual Paddle Shift later in this section.While in automatic SPORT MODE (S), thetransmission computer determines when thevehicle is being driven in a competitive mannerand will select and hold the transmission in lowergears and have more noticeable upshifts forsportier vehicle performance.
Manual Paddle ShiftWhile in the SPORT MODE (S) position, thepaddles located on the steering wheel, can beused to manually up-shift or down-shift thetransmission.
While in the SPORT MODE (S) mode, push thepaddle above the steering wheel spokes to up-shiftto the next gear, or pull on the paddle behindthe steering wheel spokes to down-shift to thenext gear.
97
To use the system, shift from PARK (P) position toSPORT MODE (S) while stopped and with theengine running, or from DRIVE (D) with the vehiclemoving. When accelerating your vehicle from astop in snowy and icy conditions, you may want toshift to second (2) or third (3) gear. A highergear allows you to gain more traction on slipperysurfaces. If the traction control is active, upshiftsare delayed to increase your control of the vehicle.See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 279.
While the Manual Paddle Shift gear selectionsystem is active, the transmission will automaticallydownshift through the gears as the vehicleslows. The transmission will select second gear asthe vehicle stops. From a stop, the vehicle willstart from and hold second (2) gear unlessthe driver manually paddle shifts into a differentgear or selects DRIVE (D). The driver canselect first (1) gear for maximum acceleration froma stop.
When using the ManualPaddle Shift Featurewhile in the SPORTMODE (S), the currentgear will be displayedin the Driver Information(DIC), or the Head-UpDisplay (HUD), ifthe vehicle has either ofthese features.
If your vehicle has a Navigation system, see“Head-Up Display (HUD)” in the Index ofthe navigation manual.
The Manual Paddle Shift system will not alloweither an up-shift or a down-shift if the vehiclespeed is too fast or too slow, nor will it allow a startfrom Fourth (4) or higher gear
If up-shifting does not occur when needed, thevehicle speed will be limited to protect the engine.
The transmission will also automaticallydown-shift as the vehicle slows down and comesto a stop.
98
When the transmission gear does not respond toa shift change, the DIC will show an X overthe gear display.
When a requested shiftis denied due to thespeed restrictionsshown, the DIC willmomentarily show an Xover the gear displayand a chime will sound.
If the vehicle has a HUD, and the transmissiongear does not respond to a shift change, then achime will sound and the HUD will momentarilyshow an X over the gear display.
Manual Paddle Shift operation is available for usewith Cruise Control, see Cruise Control onpage 162 for more information.
The vehicle speeds required for Manual PaddleShift up-shifts depend on several vehicleinputs, which will vary the allowed up-shift speedby a few mph (km/h).
• Up-shifts to Fourth (4) gear requireapproximately 22 mph (35 km/h).
• Up-shifts to Fifth (5) gear requireapproximately 28 mph (45 km/h).
• Up-shifts to Sixth (6) gear requireapproximately 41 mph (65 km/h).
To prevent damage to the powertrain, ManualPaddle downshifts to a lower gear cannot be doneabove certain speeds. The maximum speedallowed for downshifting of gears one (1) throughfourth (4) are:
• Into Fourth (4) gear over 168 mph (270 km/h)
• Into Third (3) gear over 124 mph (200 km/h)
• Into Second (2) gear over 81 mph (130 km/h)
• Into First (1) gear over 45 mph (72 km/h).
If the driver does not request an upshift as theengine speed approaches fuel shut off RPM, theengine speed will be limited to protect the engine.See Tachometer on page 188 for more information.
99
Manual Transmission Operation
This is the shift patternfor the six-speedmanual transmission.
Here is how to operate your transmission:
FIRST (1): Press the clutch pedal and shift intoFIRST (1). Then slowly let up on the clutchpedal as you press the accelerator pedal.
You can shift into FIRST (1) when you are goingless than 40 mph (64 km/h). If you come to acomplete stop and it is hard to shift into FIRST (1),put the shift lever in NEUTRAL and let up onthe clutch. Press the clutch pedal back down. Thenshift into FIRST (1).
SECOND (2): Press the clutch pedal as you letup on the accelerator pedal and shift intoSECOND (2). Then, slowly let up on the clutchpedal as you press the accelerator pedal.
THIRD (3), FOURTH (4), FIFTH (5) andSIXTH (6): Shift into THIRD (3), FOURTH (4),FIFTH (5) and SIXTH (6) the same way you do forSECOND (2). Slowly let up on the clutch pedalas you press the accelerator pedal.
To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and pressthe brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops,press the clutch pedal and the brake pedal,and shift to NEUTRAL.
NEUTRAL: Use this position when you start oridle your engine. Your shift lever is in NEUTRALwhen it is centered in the shift pattern, not inany gear.
REVERSE (R): To back up, press down the clutchpedal and shift into REVERSE (R). Just applypressure to get the lever past FIFTH (5) andSIXTH (6) into REVERSE (R). Let up on the clutchpedal slowly while pressing the accelerator pedal.
100
Your six-speed manual transmission has a featurethat allows you to safely shift into REVERSE (R)while the vehicle is rolling at less than 3 mph(5 km/h). You will be locked out if you try to shiftinto REVERSE (R) while your vehicle is movingfaster than 3 mph (5 km/h).
Shift Speeds (Manual Transmission)
{CAUTION:
If you skip a gear when you downshift,you could lose control of your vehicle.You could injure yourself or others. Donot shift down more than one gear at atime when you downshift.
This chart shows when to shift to the next highergear for the best fuel economy.
Manual Transmission RecommendedShift Speeds in mph (km/h)
EngineAcceleration Shift Speed1 to 2 2 to 3 3 to 4 4 to 5 5 to 6
AllEngines 15 (24) 25 (40) 40 (64) 45 (72) 50 (80)
If your engine speed drops below 900 rpm, or ifthe engine is not running smoothly, you shoulddownshift to the next lower gear. You may have todownshift two or more gears to keep the enginerunning smoothly or for good engine performance.
Notice: When shifting gears, do not movethe shift lever around unnecessarily. This maydamage the transmission. Shift directly intothe next gear.
101
One to Four Shift Light(Manual Transmission)
When this light comeson, you can only shiftfrom FIRST (1) toFOURTH (4) instead ofFIRST (1) toSECOND (2).
See One-to-Four Shift Light (Manual Transmission)on page 193 for more information.
Downshifting (Manual Transmission)Do not downshift into the gear shown belowat a speed greater than shown in the table:
FIRST (1) 50 mph (80 km/h)SECOND (2) 74 mph (119 km/h)
THIRD (3) 101 mph (163 km/h)FOURTH (4) 130 mph (209 km/h)
Notice: If you skip more than one gear whenyou downshift, or if you race the enginewhen you release the clutch pedal whiledownshifting, you could damage the engine,clutch, driveshaft or the transmission.Do not skip gears or race the engine whendownshifting.
The six-speed transmission has a spring thatcenters the shift lever near THIRD (3) andFOURTH (4). This spring helps you know whichgear you are in when you are shifting. Becareful when shifting from FIRST (1) toSECOND (2) or downshifting from SIXTH (6) toFIFTH (5). The spring will try to pull the shift levertoward FOURTH (4) and THIRD (3). Make sureyou move the lever into SECOND (2) or FIFTH (5).If you let the shift lever move in the direction ofthe pulling, you may end up shifting from FIRST (1)to FOURTH (4) or from SIXTH (6) to THIRD (3).
102
Parking BrakeThe parking brake lever is located to the right ofthe center console.
To set the parking brake, hold the brake pedaldown. Pull the parking brake lever up. If theignition is on, the brake system warning light willcome on.
To release the parking brake, hold the brake pedaldown. Then push the release button in as youmove the parking brake lever all the way down.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on canoverheat the brake system and causepremature wear or damage to brake systemparts. Verify that the parking brake is fullyreleased and the brake warning light isoff before driving.
Shifting Into Park (P)(Automatic Transmission)
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of yourvehicle if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured.To be sure your vehicle will not move,even when you are on fairly level ground,use the steps that follow.
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right footand set the parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by holdingin the button on the lever and pushing thelever all the way toward the front of thevehicle.
3. Press the Acc. button (ignition switch) to turnthe engine off.
103
Leaving Your Vehicle With the EngineRunning (Automatic Transmission)
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave your vehiclewith the engine running. Your vehiclecould move suddenly if the shift lever isnot fully in PARK (P) with the parkingbrake firmly set. And, if you leave thevehicle with the engine running, it couldoverheat and even catch fire. You orothers could be injured. Do not leave yourvehicle with the engine running.
If you have to leave your vehicle with the enginerunning, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P)and your parking brake is firmly set before youleave it. After you have moved the shift lever intoPARK (P), hold down the regular brake pedal.See if you can move the shift lever awayfrom PARK (P) without first pulling it toward you.If you can, it means that the shift lever wasnot fully locked into PARK (P).
Torque Lock (Automatic Transmission)If you are parking on a hill and you do not shiftyour transmission into PARK (P) properly,the weight of the vehicle may put too much forceon the parking pawl in the transmission. Youmay find it difficult to pull the shift lever outof PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.” Toprevent torque lock, set the parking brake and thenshift into PARK (P) properly before you leavethe driver’s seat. To find out how, see “Shifting IntoPARK (P)” listed previously in this section.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift leverout of PARK (P) before you release the parkingbrake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to haveanother vehicle push yours a little uphill totake some of the pressure from the transmissionparking pawl, so you can pull the shift leverout of PARK (P).
104
Shifting Out of Park (P)(Automatic Transmission)Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shiftlock control system which locks the shift leverin PARK (P) when the ignition is off. In addition,you have to fully apply your regular brakebefore you can shift from PARK (P) when theignition is on. See Automatic TransmissionOperation on page 95.
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressureon the shift lever and push the shift lever all theway into PARK (P) and release the shift leverbutton as you maintain brake application. Thenpress the shift lever button and move theshift lever into the gear you wish.
If you ever hold the brake pedal down but stillcannot shift out of PARK (P), try this:
1. Press the regular brake.
2. Press the Acc. button twice to pluce theignition in accessory mode. See IgnitionPositions on page 90 for more information.
3. Apply and hold the brake until the end ofStep 4.
4. Shift to NEUTRAL (N).
5. Start the engine and then shift to the drivegear you want.
6. Have your vehicle inspected by your dealer assoon as possible.
Parking Your Vehicle(Manual Transmission)Before you get out of your vehicle, move the shiftlever into REVERSE (R) and firmly apply theparking brake. Once the shift lever has beenplaced into REVERSE (R) with the clutch pedalpressed in, you can turn the ignition off andrelease the clutch.
105
Parking Over Things That Burn
{CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hotexhaust parts under your vehicle andignite. Do not park over papers, leaves,dry grass, or other things that can burn.
Engine Exhaust
{CAUTION:
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains thegas carbon monoxide (CO), which youcannot see or smell. It can causeunconsciousness and death.You might have exhaust coming in if:
• Your exhaust system sounds strangeor different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.• Your vehicle was damaged in a
collision.• Your vehicle was damaged when
driving over high points on the roador over road debris.
• Repairs were not done correctly.• Your vehicle or exhaust system has
been modified improperly.If you ever suspect exhaust is coming intoyour vehicle:
• Drive it only with all the windowsdown to blow out any CO; and
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
106
Running the Engine While ParkedIt is better not to park with the engine running. But ifyou ever have to, here are some things to know.
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate controlsystem off could allow dangerous exhaustinto your vehicle. See the earlier cautionunder Engine Exhaust on page 106.
Also, idling in a closed-in place can letdeadly carbon monoxide (CO) into yourvehicle even if the climate control fan is atthe highest setting. One place this canhappen is a garage. Exhaust — withCO — can come in easily. NEVER park ina garage with the engine running.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.See Winter Driving on page 302.
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of yourvehicle if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll. Do not leaveyour vehicle when the engine is runningunless you have to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured.To be sure your vehicle will not move,even when you are on fairly level ground,always set your parking brake and movethe shift lever to PARK (P).
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehiclewill not move. See Shifting Into Park (P)(Automatic Transmission) on page 103.
107
Mirrors
Manual Rearview MirrorWhen you are sitting in a comfortable drivingposition, adjust the mirror so you can see clearlybehind your vehicle. Grip the mirror in thecenter to move it up or down and side to side.The day/night control, located at the bottom of themirror, lessens glare from the headlamps behindyour vehicle when in the night position. Turnthe control to the right for the night position and tothe left for the day position.
Two buttons under the rearview mirror control maplamps. Push each button to turn each map lampon or off.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirrorwith OnStar® and CompassThe vehicle may have an automatic dimmingrearview mirror with OnStar®, a compass and maplamps. Three OnStar® buttons are at the bottomof the mirror. See OnStar® System on page 114 formore information on the services OnStar®
provides.
Mirror OperationThe mirror automatically changes to reduce glarefrom headlamps behind you. A time delayfeature prevents rapid changing from the day tonight positions while driving under lights andthrough traffic.
P (On/Off): The automatic dimming feature isactivated when the vehicle is started. Theautomatic dimming feature is turned on or off bypressing this button located on the lower partof the mirror. Press and hold the button for up tothree seconds to turn this feature on or off.
T (Indicator Light): This light will turn on whenthe automatic dimming feature is active.
108
Map LampsThe mirror has map lamps located at the bottomof the mirror. To manually turn the lamps on or off,press the button next to each lamp.
Compass OperationThe mirror has an eight-point compass display inthe bottom of the mirror face.
When the ignition and the compass feature areon, the compass will show two character boxes forapproximately two seconds. After two seconds,the mirror will display the current compassheading. For example, NE is displayed fornorth-east.
Compass CalibrationIf after two seconds the display does not show acompass heading, there may be a strong magneticfield interfering with the compass. Suchinterference may be caused by a magneticantenna mount, note pad holder or similar object.If the letter C appears in the compass window,the compass needs calibration.
The mirror compass can be calibrated by drivingthe vehicle in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less untilthe display reads a direction.
The compass can be placed in calibration modeby pressing and holding the left map lightbutton until a C appears on the compass display.
Compass VarianceCompass variance is the difference betweenearth’s magnetic north and true geographic north.If the mirror is not adjusted for compassvariance, your compass could give false readings.
The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving thefactory. It will be necessary to adjust the compassto compensate for compass variance if you liveoutside zone eight. Under certain circumstances,such as a long distance, cross-country trip, itwill be necessary to adjust the compass variance.
109
To adjust for compass variance, do the following:
1. Find your current location and variancezone number on the zone map that follows.
2. Press and hold the on/off button until a Z anda zone number appears on the display. Thecompass is now in zone mode.
3. Once the zone number appears on the display,press the on/off button quickly until you reachthe correct zone number. Stop pressing thebutton and the mirror will return to normaloperation. If C appears in the compasswindow, the compass may need calibration.See “Compass Calibration” listed previously.
Cleaning the MirrorWhen cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel orsimilar material dampened with glass cleaner.Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirroras that may cause the liquid cleaner to enterthe mirror housing.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirrorwith CompassIf the vehicle has this feature, an automaticdimming mirror automatically dims to the properlevel to minimize glare at night from lightsbehind your vehicle.
The mirror also includes a compass display in theupper right corner of the mirror face.
P (On/Off): This is the on/off button.
110
Automatic Dimming Mirror OperationThe automatic dimming mirror function is turned oneach time the ignition is started. A light near theon/off button will come on to indicate the automaticdimming is on.
Press the on/off button for about six seconds tomanually turn the automatic dimming functionon or off.
Compass DisplayPress the on/off button, located to the far left,briefly to turn the compass display on or off.
If the display reads CAL, the compass needs tobe calibrated. For more information, see “CompassCalibration” later in this section.
To adjust between Fahrenheit and Celsius:
1. Press and hold the on/off button forapproximately four seconds until eithera flashing °F, or °C appears.
2. Press the button again to change the displayto the desired unit of measurement. Afterapproximately four seconds of inactivity, thenew unit will be locked in and thecompass/temperature display will return.
If an abnormal temperature reading is displayedfor an extended period of time, please consult yourdealer. Under certain circumstances, a delay inupdating the temperature is normal.
Compass VarianceCompass variance is the difference betweenearth’s magnetic north and true geographic north.If not adjusted to account for compass variance,the mirror’s compass could give false readings.The mirror is set in zone eight upon leavingthe factory. It will be necessary to adjust thecompass to compensate for compass variance ifyou live outside of zone eight. Under certaincircumstances, as during a long distancecross-country trip, it will also be necessary toadjust for compass variance.
To adjust for compass variance do the following:
1. Find your current location and variancezone number on the following zone map.
111
2. Press and hold the on/off button until a Z anda zone number appears in the display. Thecompass is now in zone mode.
3. Keep pressing the on/off button until thedesired zone number appears in thedisplay. Release the button. Afterapproximately four seconds of inactivity, thenew zone number will be locked in andthe compass/temperature display will return.
4. Calibrate the compass as described below.
Compass CalibrationThe compass may need calibration if one of thefollowing occurs:
• After approximately five seconds, the displaydoes not show a compass heading (N forNorth, for example), there may be a strongmagnetic field interfering with the compass.Such interference may be caused by amagnetic antenna mount, magnetic note padholder, or a similar magnetic item.
• The compass does not display the correctheading and the compass zone varianceis set correctly.
In order to calibrate, CAL must be displayed in themirror compass windows. If CAL is not displayed,push the on/off button for approximately12 seconds or until CAL is displayed.
The compass can be calibrated by driving thevehicle in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until thedisplay reads a direction.
112
Cleaning the MirrorWhen cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel orsimilar material dampened with glass cleaner. Donot spray glass cleaner directly on the mirroras that may cause the liquid cleaner to enter themirror housing.
Outside Power Heated Mirrors
The controls for theoutside power mirrorsare located on thedriver’s door.
Move the top selector control to the left or right toselect either the driver’s or passenger’s mirror.To adjust the direction of the mirror, use thearrows on the round four-way control. Adjust eachoutside mirror so that a little of the vehicle andthe area behind it can be seen while sittingin a comfortable, driving position. Keep the controlin the center position when not adjusting eitheroutside mirror.
If the vehicle has the memory feature, a preferredmirror position can be stored. See MemorySeat, Mirrors and Steering Wheel on page 10.
Both mirrors are heated to rid them of snow, ice,or condensation. They will heat when the rearwindow defogger is turned on. See “Rear WindowDefogger” under Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 177.
Both mirrors can manually be folded inward bypulling them toward the vehicle. This feature maybe useful when going through a car wash or aconfined space. Push the mirrors away from thevehicle, to the normal position, before driving.
113
Outside Automatic Dimming MirrorIf your vehicle has this feature, the driver’sside outside mirror will adjust for the glare ofheadlamps behind you. This feature is controlledby the on and off setting on the inside mirror.
Outside Convex Mirror
{CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (likeother vehicles) look farther away thanthey really are. If you cut too sharply intothe right lane, you could hit a vehicle onyour right. Check your inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.
The passenger side mirror is convex. A convexmirror’s surface is curved so more can beseen from the driver’s seat. It also makes thingslook farther away than they really are.
OnStar® System
OnStar® uses several innovative technologies andlive advisors to provide you with a wide rangeof safety, security, information, and convenienceservices. If your airbags deploy, the system isdesigned to make an automatic call to OnStar®
Emergency advisors who can request emergencyservices be sent to your location. If you lockyour keys in the vehicle, call OnStar® at1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signal tounlock your doors. If you need roadsideassistance, press the OnStar® button and theycan contact Roadside Service for you.
114
OnStar® service is provided to you subject to theOnStar® Terms and Conditions. You may cancelyour OnStar® service at any time by contactingOnStar® as provided below. A complete OnStar®
Owner’s Guide and the OnStar® Terms andConditions are included in the vehicle’s OnStar®
Subscriber glove box literature. For moreinformation, visit onstar.com or onstar.ca, contactOnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827) orTTY 1-877-248-2080, or press the OnStar® buttonto speak with an OnStar® advisor 24 hours a day,7 days a week.
Not all OnStar® features are available on allvehicles. To check if your vehicle is equipped toprovide the services described below, or for afull description of OnStar® services and systemlimitations, see the OnStar® Owner’s Guide in yourglove box or visit onstar.com.
OnStar® ServicesFor new vehicles equipped with OnStar®, the Safe& Sound Plan, or the Directions & Connections®
Plan is included for one year from the date ofpurchase. You can extend this plan beyond thefirst year, or upgrade to the Directions &Connections® Plan. For more information, pressthe OnStar® button to speak with an advisor. SomeOnStar® services (such as Remote Door Unlockor Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance) may not beavailable until you register with OnStar®.
115
Available Services with Safe & Sound® Plan• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN)(If equipped)
• Link to Emergency Services
• Roadside Assistance
• Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance
• AccidentAssist
• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
• OnStar® Vehicle Diagnostics
• GM® Goodwrench® On Demand Diagnostics
• OnStar® Hands-Free Calling with30 complimentary minutes
• OnStar® Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only)
Available Services included withDirections & Connections® Plan• All Safe and Sound Plan Services
• Driving Directions - Advisor delivered orOnStar® Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped)
• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services
OnStar® Hands-Free CallingOnStar® Hands-Free Calling allows eligibleOnStar® subscribers to make and receive callsusing voice commands. Hands-Free Calling is fullyintegrated into the vehicle, and can be usedwith OnStar® Pre-Paid Minute Packages.Hands-Free Calling may also be linked to aVerizon Wireless service plan in the U.S. or a BellMobility service plan in Canada, depending oneligibility. To find out more, refer to the OnStar®
Owner’s Guide in the vehicle’s glove box, visitwww.onstar.com or www.onstar.ca, or speak withan OnStar® advisor by pressing the OnStar®
button or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827).
OnStar® Virtual AdvisorOnStar® Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar®
Hands-Free Calling that uses your minutes toaccess location-based weather, local traffic reports,and stock quotes. By pressing the phone buttonand giving a few simple voice commands, you canbrowse through the various topics. See the OnStar®
Owner’s Guide for more information.(Only available in the continental U.S.)
116
How OnStar® Service WorksIn order to provide you with OnStar® services, yourvehicle’s OnStar® system has the capability ofrecording and transmitting vehicle information. Thisinformation is automatically sent to an OnStar® CallCenter at the time of an OnStar® button press,Emergency button press or if your airbags or AACNsystem deploys. The vehicle information usuallyincludes your GPS location and, in the event of acrash, additional information regarding the accidentthat your vehicle has been involved in (e.g. thedirection from which your vehicle was hit). Whenyou use the Virtual Advisor feature of OnStar®
Hands-Free Calling, your vehicle also sendsOnStar® your GPS location so that we can provideyou with location-based services.OnStar® service cannot work unless your vehicleis in a place where OnStar® has an agreementwith a wireless service provider for service in thatarea. OnStar® service also cannot work unlessyou are in a place where the wireless serviceprovider OnStar® has hired for that areahas coverage, network capacity and receptionwhen the service is needed, and technology thatis compatible with the OnStar® service. Not allservices are available everywhere, particularly inremote or enclosed areas, or at all times.
OnStar® service that involves location informationabout your vehicle cannot work unless GPSsatellite signals are unobstructed and available inthat place as well.
Your vehicle must have a working electricalsystem (including adequate battery power) for theOnStar® equipment to operate. There are otherproblems OnStar® cannot control that may preventOnStar® from providing OnStar® service to youat any particular time or place. Some examples aredamage to important parts of your vehicle in anaccident, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weatheror wireless phone network congestion.
Your ResponsibilityYou may need to increase the volume of yourradio to hear the OnStar® advisor. If the light nextto the OnStar® buttons is red, this means thatyour system is not functioning properly and shouldbe checked by a dealer. If the light appearsclear (no light is appearing), your OnStar®
subscription has expired. You can always pressthe OnStar® button to confirm that your OnStar®
equipment is active.
117
Universal Home RemoteSystem
Universal Home Remote System(With One Triangular LED)The Universal Home Remote System provides away to replace up to three hand-heldradio-frequency (RF) transmitters used to activatedevices such as garage door openers, securitysystems, and home lighting.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmfulinterference.
2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.
The FCC Grant of Equipment AuthorizationCertificate number is CB2SAHL3.
This device complies with RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.
The Canadian Registration ID numberis 2791021849A.
Changes or modifications to this system by otherthan an authorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.
Universal Home Remote System(With Three Round LED)The Universal Home Remote System provides away to replace up to three hand-heldradio-frequency (RF) transmitters used to activatedevices such as garage door openers, securitysystems, and home lighting.
118
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmfulinterference.
2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.
The FCC Grant of Equipment AuthorizationCertificate number is KOBGTV06A.
This device complies with RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.
The Canadian Registration ID number is3521A-GTV06A.
Changes or modifications to this system by otherthan an authorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.
Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (With Three Round LED)
Your vehicle may have the Universal Home RemoteSystem. If there are three round Light EmittingDiode (LED) above the Universal Home RemoteSystem buttons, follow the instructions below. Ifthere is one triangular LED above the UniversalHome Remote System buttons, follow theinstructions under Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (with one triangular LED).
This system provides a way to replace up to threeremote control transmitters used to activatedevices such as garage door openers, securitysystems, and home lighting.
Do not use the this system with any garage dooropener that does not have the stop and reversefeature. This includes any garage door openermodel manufactured before April 1, 1982.
119
Read the instructions completely before attemptingto program the transmitter. Because of the stepsinvolved, it may be helpful to have anotherperson available to assist you in programming thetransmitter.
Be sure to keep the original remote controltransmitter for use in other vehicles, as well as, forfuture programming. You only need the originalremote control transmitter for fixed codeprogramming. It is also recommended that uponthe sale or lease termination of the vehicle,the programmed buttons should be erased forsecurity purposes. See “Erasing your UniversalHome Remote Buttons” later in this section.
Be sure that people and objects are clear of thegarage door or security device you areprogramming. When programming a garage door,it is advised to park outside of the garage.
If you do not know if your garage door opener is afixed code or rolling code device, open yourgarage door opener’s remote control battery cover.Your garage door opener is a fixed code deviceif there is a panel of switches. If not, yourgarage door opener is a rolling code device.
120
Programming Universal HomeRemote — Fixed CodeFixed Code garage door openers are used forgarage doors produced prior to 1996. Fixed codeuses the same coded signal every time, whichis manually programmed by setting DIP switchesfor a unique personal code.
To program up to three channels,
1. Remove the battery cover of the hand-heldtransmitter.
2. Write down the eight to 12 coding switchsettings from left to right. When the switchis in the up position, write “on,” and when aswitch is in the down position, write “off”.If a switch is set between the up and downposition, write “middle”.
3. Enter these positions into the Universal HomeRemote System as follows.Press and release all three buttons at the sametime to put the device into programming mode.
Example of Switch Settings
121
4. The indicator light will blink slowly. In orderfrom left to right, and within two and one-halfminutes, enter each switch setting into theUniversal Home Remote System. Pushone button for each switch as follows:
• Left button = “on” switch position.
• Right button = “off” switch position.
• Middle button = “middle” switch position.
5. After entering the switch settings, press andrelease all three buttons at the same time.The indicator lights will turn on.
6. Press and hold the button you would like touse to control the garage door until thegarage door moves. The indicator light abovethe selected button should slowly blink.You may need to hold the button from five to55 seconds.
7. Immediately release the button when thegarage door moves. The indicator light willblink rapidly until programming is complete.
8. Press and release the button again. Thegarage door should move, confirming thatprogramming is successful and complete.
To program another device such as an additionalgarage door opener, a security device, orhome lighting, repeat Steps 1–8, choosing adifferent function button in Step 7 than what youused for the garage door opener.
Programming Universal HomeRemote — Rolling CodeRolling code garage door openers are used forgarage doors produced after 1996 and arecode protected. Rolling code means the codedsignal is changed every time your remote controlgarage door opener is used.
Programming a rolling code garage door openerinvolves time-sensitive actions, so read theentire procedure before you begin. If you do notfollow these actions, the device will time outand you will have to repeat the procedure.
122
Follow these steps to program up to three channels:
1. Press the two outside buttons at the sametime for one to two seconds, and immediatelyrelease them.
2. Go to the garage. Locate the garage doormotor head and press and release the“learn” button.
After pressing the “learn” button, you have10 to 30 seconds to complete Step 4depending on your garage control unit. If youcannot locate the “learn” button, refer tothe owners guide for your garage door opener.
3. Press and hold the button you would liketo use to control the garage door until thegarage door moves. The indicator light, abovethe selected button, should slowly blink.You may need to hold the button from five to20 seconds.
4. Immediately release the button when thegarage door moves. The indicator light willblink rapidly until programming is complete.
5. Press and release the button again. Thegarage door should move, confirming thatprogramming is successful and complete.
To program another device such as an additionalgarage door opener, a security device, orhome lighting, repeat Steps 1–5, choosing adifferent function button in Step 3 than what youused for the garage door opener.
123
Using Universal Home RemotePress and hold the appropriate button for at leasthalf of a second. The indicator light will comeon while the signal is being transmitted.
Reprogramming Universal HomeRemote ButtonsYou can reprogram any of the three buttons byrepeating the instructions.
Erasing Universal Home RemoteButtonsYou should erase the programmed buttons whenyou sell the vehicle or terminate your lease.To erase either rolling code or fixed code on theUniversal Home Remote device, do the following:1. Press and hold the two outside buttons at
the same time for approximately 20 seconds,until the indicator lights, located directlyabove the buttons, begin to blink rapidly.
2. Once the indicator lights begin to blink,release both buttons. The codes from allbutton will be erased.
For additional information on Universal HomeRemote, see Customer Assistance Officeson page 456.
Universal HomeRemote System Operation(With One Triangular LED)
Your vehicle may have the Universal HomeRemote System. If there is one triangular LightEmitting Diode (LED) above the UniversalHome Remote buttons, follow the instructionsbelow. If your vehicle has three round LED abovethe Universal Home Remote buttons, follow theinstructions under Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (With three round LED).
Do not use the Universal Home Remote with anygarage door opener that does not have the stopand reverse feature. This includes any garage dooropener model manufactured before April 1, 1982.
124
If you have a newer garage door opener with rollingcodes, please be sure to follow Steps 6 through 8 tocomplete the programming of your Universal HomeRemote Transmitter.
Read the instructions completely before attemptingto program the Universal Home Remote.Because of the steps involved, it may be helpful tohave another person available to assist you inthe programming steps.
Keep the original hand-held transmitter for use inother vehicles as well as for future UniversalHome Remote programming. It is alsorecommended that upon the sale of the vehicle,the programmed Universal Home Remote buttonsshould be erased for security purposes. See“Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons” later inthis section or, for assistance, see CustomerAssistance Offices on page 456.
Be sure that people and objects are clear of thegarage door or gate operator you areprogramming. When programming a garage door,it is advised to park outside of the garage.
It is recommended that a new battery be installedin your hand-held transmitter for quicker andmore accurate transmission of the radio-frequencysignal.
Programming Universal Home RemoteFollow these steps to program up to threechannels:
1. Press and hold down the two outsideUniversal Home Remote buttons, releasingonly when the Universal Home Remoteindicator light begins to flash, after20 seconds. Do not hold down the buttons forlonger than 30 seconds and do not repeatthis step to program a second and/orthird hand-held transmitter to the remainingtwo Universal Home Remote buttons.
2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitterabout 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from theUniversal Home Remote buttons whilekeeping the indicator light in view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both thedesired Universal Home Remote buttonand the hand-held transmitter button. Do notrelease the buttons until Step 4 has beencompleted.Some entry gates and garage door openersmay require you to substitute Step 3 withthe procedure noted in “Gate Operator andCanadian Programming” later in this section.
125
4. The indicator light will flash slowly at first andthen rapidly after Universal Home Remotesuccessfully receives the frequency signalfrom the hand-held transmitter. Release bothbuttons.
5. Press and hold the newly-trained UniversalHome Remote button and observe theindicator light.If the indicator light stays on continuously,programming is complete and your deviceshould activate when the Universal HomeRemote button is pressed and released.To program the remaining two Universal HomeRemote buttons, begin with Step 2 under“Programming Universal Home Remote.”Do not repeat Step 1 as this will erase all ofthe programmed channels.If the indicator light blinks rapidly fortwo seconds and then turns to a constant light,continue with Steps 6 through 8 following tocomplete the programming of a rolling-codeequipped device, most commonly, a garagedoor opener.
6. Locate in the garage, the garage door openerreceiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”or “Smart” button. This can usually befound where the hanging antenna wire isattached to the motor-head unit.
7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or“Smart” button. The name and color ofthe button may vary by manufacturer.You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8.
8. Return to the vehicle. Firmly press and holdthe programmed Universal Home Remotebutton for two seconds, then release it.Immediately press and hold the same buttona second time for two seconds, thenrelease it. Immediately, press and hold thesame button a third time for two seconds, thenrelease.The Universal Home Remote should nowactivate your rolling-code equipped device.
To program the remaining two Universal HomeRemote buttons, begin with Step 2 of“Programming Universal Home Remote.” You donot want to repeat Step 1, as this will eraseall previous programming from the Universal HomeRemote buttons.
126
Gate Operator and CanadianProgrammingCanadian radio-frequency laws require transmittersignals to time out or quit after several secondsof transmission. This may not be long enoughfor Universal Home Remote to pick up the signalduring programming. Similarly, some U.S. gateoperators are manufactured to time out inthe same manner.
If you live in Canada, or you are having difficultyprogramming a gate operator or garage dooropener by using the “Programming UniversalHome Remote” procedures, regardless of whereyou live, replace Step 3 under “ProgrammingUniversal Home Remote” with the following:
Continue to press and hold the Universal HomeRemote button while you press and release everytwo seconds (cycle) the hand-held transmitterbutton until the frequency signal has beensuccessfully accepted by the Universal HomeRemote. The Universal Home Remote indicatorlight will flash slowly at first and then rapidly.Proceed with Step 4 under “ProgrammingUniversal Home Remote” to complete.
Using Universal Home RemotePress and hold the appropriate Universal HomeRemote button for at least half of a second.The indicator light will come on while the signal isbeing transmitted.
Erasing Universal Home RemoteButtonsTo erase programming from the three UniversalHome Remote buttons do the following:
1. Press and hold down the two outside buttonsuntil the indicator light begins to flash, after20 seconds. Do not hold the two outsidebuttons for longer than 30 seconds.
2. Release both buttons.
The Universal Home Remote is now in the training(learning) mode and can be programmed at anytime beginning with Step 2 under “ProgrammingUniversal Home Remote” shown earlier inthis section.
Individual buttons cannot be erased, but they canbe reprogrammed. See “Reprogramming aSingle Universal Home Remote Button” followingthis section.
127
Reprogramming a Single UniversalHome Remote ButtonTo program a device to Universal Home Remoteusing a Universal Home Remote buttonpreviously trained, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired Universal HomeRemote button. Do not release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after20 seconds. While still holding the UniversalHome Remote button, proceed with Step 2under “Programming Universal Home Remote”shown earlier in this section.
For additional information on Universal HomeRemote, see Customer Assistance Officeson page 456.
Storage Areas
Glove BoxTo open the glove box, lift up on the lever. Usethe key to lock and unlock. The glove boxhas a light inside.
Cupholder(s)There are two cupholders located on the centerconsole next to the shift lever. To access,place your thumb on the left side of the lid andslide the handle to the right.
128
Center Console Storage AreaTo use this storage area, pull up the lid on thedriver’s side front edge of the console and swingit to the passenger side.
Your vehicle may have a lock on the centerconsole storage area. Use the key to lock andunlock the console. Do not leave the key inthe lock, or it could be damaged when the driversits down.
Floor MatsThe floor mats are designed to remain inposition under your feet and out of reach of theaccelerator pedal. The driver side floor mat is heldin place by two locator pins and the passengerside is held in place by one.
Make sure that the driver side floor mat is properlyplaced on the floor so that it does not block themovement of the accelerator pedal.
To remove a floor mat,pull up on the rear ofthe mat to disconnect itfrom the locator pins.
To reinstall the floor mats, line up the openings inthe floor mat over the locator pins and push itdown into place.
129
Rear Storage AreaThere are two rear storage compartments in thefloor of the rear hatch/trunk area.
Your vehicle has two storage compartment lids.
To access a storage compartment, pull up to openthe lid. The lids cannot be removed.
For Z06 models the right rear compartment storesthe battery and cannot be used for storage.
Notice: Do not store heavy or sharp objectsin the rear storage compartments located in thehatch/trunk area. If you do, the objects coulddamage the underbody.
Rear Trunk PartitionFor vehicles with the power convertible top optiononly, there is a trunk partition to keep cargofrom getting in the way of the convertible top. Thetrunk partition must be in place for the top tomove. If the trunk partition is not properly in placethe ATTACH TRUNK PARTITION DriverInformation Center (DIC) message will display andyou will not be able to remove the convertibletop. See DIC Warnings and Messages onpage 212 for more information.
The trunk partition is a flat carpeted board with ahorizontal flap that can be attached to the topof the trunk to divide the storage compartment orstored flat when not in use.
Convertible shown, Coupe similar
130
Pull the divider up and snap it onto the snaps onboth sides of the trunk.
Convenience NetIf your vehicle has this feature it is on the backwall of the rear area of the vehicle.
Put small loads, like grocery bags, in the net.It can help keep them from falling over duringsharp turns or quick starts and stops. Theconvenience net is not for larger, heavier loads.
You can unhook the net and place it in one of therear storage compartments when not in use.
131
Cargo CoverIf your vehicle has this feature, the security shadecan provide hidden storage in the rear area ofthe vehicle. The shade is also helpful in blockingthe glare from the removable roof when it isstored in the rear compartment.
Using the Cargo Cover1. Hook the elastic
loops on the frontcorners (A) ofthe shade to theT-nuts locatedon the front cornersof the rear hatchframe.
2. Hook the elastic loops on the rear corners (B)of the shade to the hooks recessed inside therear hatch frame, near the rear corners.
3. Grasp the loop at the rear center of the shadeand wrap it around the striker assembly.
132
4. Push the loop to thetop of the striker(base plate).
Roof PanelThe vehicle may have a removable roof panel.Follow the procedures listed when removingor installing it.
Removing the Roof Panel
{CAUTION:
Do not try to remove a roof panel whilethe vehicle is moving. Trying to removethe roof panel while the vehicle is movingcould cause an accident. The panel couldfall into the vehicle and cause you to losecontrol, or it could fly off and strikeanother vehicle. You or others could beinjured. Remove the roof panel only whenthe vehicle is parked.
Until you are sure you can remove the panelalone, have someone help you.
133
Notice: If you drop or rest a roof panelon its edges, the roof panel, paint and/orweatherstripping may be damaged. Alwaysplace the roof panel in the stowage receiversafter removing it from the vehicle.
1. Park on a level surface and set the parkingbrake. Shift an automatic transmission intoPARK (P). Shift a manual transmissioninto NEUTRAL.
2. Make sure the ignition is off.
3. Lower both sun visors.
4. Open the rear hatch and remove any itemsthat may interfere with proper storage of theroof panel.
5. Lower the windows.There are two release latches on the front ofthe roof panel and one rear release latchon the back of the roof panel.
6. To unlock the release latches on the front ofthe roof panel, grasp each handle with yourfingers and pull it outward.
Driver’s Side Front Roof Panel Release Latch
134
The driver’s side handle moves toward thedriver’s door. The passenger’s side handlemoves toward the passenger’s door.
7. To unlock the rearof the roof panel’srear releaselatch, press the backof the releasehandle (B). Thenpress the button onthe front of therelease handle, (A)with your thumb.
Pull down the latch lever with your fingers.
8. Stand on one side of the vehicle, and ifnecessary, have someone stand on theother side. Together, carefully lift the frontedge of the roof panel up and forward.
9. When the roof panel is loosened from thevehicle, one person should grasp the roofpanel as close to the center as possible andlift it away from the vehicle.
Driver’s Side Rear Roof Panel Release Hatch
135
Storing the Roof Panel
{CAUTION:
If a roof panel is not stored properly, itcould be thrown about the vehicle in acrash or sudden maneuver. People in thevehicle could be injured. Whenever youstore a roof panel in the vehicle, alwaysbe sure that it is stored securely in theproper location.
Notice: If you drop or rest a roof panel on itsedges, the roof panel, paint and/orweatherstripping may be damaged. Alwaysplace the roof panel in the stowage receiversafter removing it from the vehicle.
1. Turn the roof panel so that the front edge ofthe panel is facing the storage area.
2. Insert the roof panelso that the outsidefront edges line upbetween the receivercovers. Push forwardon the roof paneluntil it stops.
3. Gently place theroof panel down sothat the backpins on the roofpanel drop into thereceivers in theback of thestorage area.
Press down firmly to seat the pins in the receivers.
136
Installing the Roof Panel
{CAUTION:
An improperly attached roof panel mayfall into or fly off the vehicle. You orothers could be injured. After installingthe roof panel, always check that it isfirmly attached by pushing up on theunderside of the panel. Check now andthen to be sure the roof panel is firmly inplace.
Notice: If you drop or rest a roof panel on itsedges, the roof panel, paint and/orweatherstripping may be damaged. Alwaysplace the roof panel in the stowage receiversafter removing it from the vehicle.
In most cases, it makes it easier if two peoplere-install the roof panel.
1. Park on a level surface and set the parkingbrake. Shift an automatic transmission intoPARK (P). Shift a manual transmissioninto NEUTRAL.
2. Check that the front release latches and therear release latch on the vehicle’s roofopening are in their opened positions beforeattempting to install the roof panel.
3. If the roof panel is stored in the rear storagearea of the vehicle, grasp the rear edge of theroof panel with both hands and gently lift itup and remove it from the storage area.
4. Carefully place the roof panel over the top ofthe vehicle.
5. Position the rear edge of the roof panel to theweatherstrip on the back of the roof opening.Then align and fit the pins at the rear ofthe roof panel inside the openings in the rearoverhead weatherstrip. Gently lower thefront edge of the roof panel to the front of theroof opening.
137
6. Turn the frontrelease handlesinward so that theylatch to theclosed position.
7. Push up on the handle of the rear roofrelease handle to latch its hook in the closedposition.
8. Push and pull the roof panel up and downand side-to-side to ensure the roof panel issecurely installed.
Convertible Top
Convertible Top (Manual)For care and cleaning of the convertible top, seeConvertible Top on page 414 under “Serviceand Appearance Care”. High pressure car washesmay cause water to enter the vehicle.
If the vehicle has this feature, the followingprocedures explain the proper operation of themanual convertible top.
138
The parts of the manual convertible top that areused when lowering and raising it are:
A. Front Edge of the Convertible TopB. Rear Edge of the Convertible TopC. Tonneau Cover
Notice: Leaving the convertible top down andexposing the interior of your vehicle tooutdoor conditions may cause damage. Alwaysclose the convertible top if leaving yourvehicle outdoors.
Notice: Lowering the convertible top whenthere are objects in the storage area coulddamage it or break the glass rear window.Always verify that no objects are in the storagearea before lowering the convertible top.
Notice: Lowering the top if it is damp, wet, ordirty can cause stains, mildew, and damageto the inside of your vehicle. Dry off thetop before lowering it.
Notice: If you lower the top on your vehicle incold weather (0°F/-18°C or lower), you maydamage top components. Do not lower the topin cold weather.
Notice: If you raise or lower the convertibletop while the vehicle is in motion, youcould damage the top or the top mechanism.The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Always put an automatictransmission in PARK (P) or a manualtransmission in NEUTRAL before raising orlowering the convertible top.
139
Lowering the Manual Convertible Top1. Park on a level surface. Shift an automatic
transmission into PARK (P) and set theparking brake. Shift a manual transmissioninto NEUTRAL and set the parking brake.
2. Make sure the ignition is off.
3. Make sure the trunk is closed.
4. The convertible top front latch, located abovethe inside rearview mirror, must be unlocked.Pull the convertible top front latch downand turn it clockwise to unlock it.
5. Lift upward on the front edge (A) of theconvertible top off of the windshield frame.Then lift upward on the rear edge (B) ofthe convertible top so it is vertical to thetonneau cover (C). The front edge (A) and rearedge (B) should be straight up.
140
6. Tilt the driver’s seatback forward and pressthe tonneau cover release button located onthe underside of the tonneau cover (C) behindthe driver’s seat. Then raise the tonneaucover (C). If the tonneau cover doesnot release and three chimes are heard,check to make sure the trunk lid is closed.Also, the cover will not release if the vehiclealarm is armed.
After pressing the release button, the driver’sand passenger’s door glass should retractto the full-down position.If the vehicle has lost battery power, thetonneau cover (C) can still be opened usingthe manual release cable.The tonneau cover emergency manual releasecable is located underneath the carpetingbehind the passenger’s seat head restraint, onthe underside forward edge of the tonneaucover. To access the cable, lift and pull backthe carpeting. Also, see Hatch/Trunk onpage 83 for information on the emergencytrunk release handle.
Notice: If you lower the convertible top intothe storage compartment and the rear edge ofthe top is not in the full-down position, youcould damage the top. Always verify thatthe rear edge of the convertible top is in thefull-down position before lowering the top intothe storage compartment.
141
7. Pull the cable to release the tonneau cover. 8. Push forward on the front edge (A) of theconvertible top to allow the rear edge (B)of the convertible top to be moved toits full-down position.
142
9. Then move the top rearward to its fully-storedposition.
10. After the top is stored, apply one even pushon the center of the front edge (A) of theconvertible top to assure that the top is fullyretracted.
11. Close the tonneau cover (B) by pressing downon it with a swift, firm motion.
Raising the Manual Convertible Top1. Park on a level surface. Shift an automatic
transmission into PARK (P) and set theparking brake. Shift a manual transmissioninto NEUTRAL and set the parking brake.
2. Lower both windows.
3. Make sure the ignition is off.
4. Tilt the driver’s seat forward and press thetonneau cover release button, or use themanual release cable if battery powerhas been lost. See Step 6 under “Loweringthe Manual Convertible Top” earlier inthis section.After pressing the release button, the driver’sand passenger’s door glass should retractto the full-down position, if they have notalready been lowered.
5. Lift the tonneau cover.
143
6. Pull the convertible top up by firmly grippingthe front edge (A) near the center andapplying a brisk upward and forward motion toget the top in the full-up position.
7. Lift the rear edge (B) of the convertible top toits full-up position by first raising the frontedge (A).
8. Close the tonneau cover (C) by pushing itdown with a swift, firm motion.
9. Lower the rear edge (B) of the convertible topby first slightly pushing the front edge (A) ofthe convertible top forward.
144
10. Push the front edge (A) of the convertible topdown from the outside of the vehicle, or pullthe front edge (A) of the convertible topdown from the center pull-down handle locatedin the inside of the vehicle.
11. Pull the top front latch handle down and turn itcounterclockwise to lock the convertible top.
Convertible Top (Power)For care and cleaning of the convertible top seeConvertible Top on page 414 under “Serviceand Appearance Care”. High pressure car washesmay cause water to enter the vehicle.
To operate the power convertible top use thefollowing steps.
Notice: Leaving the convertible top down andexposing the interior of your vehicle tooutdoor conditions may cause damage. Alwaysclose the convertible top if leaving yourvehicle outdoors.
Notice: Lowering the convertible top whenthere are objects in the storage area coulddamage it or break the glass rear window.Always verify that no objects are in the storagearea before lowering the convertible top.
Notice: Lowering the top if it is damp, wet, ordirty can cause stains, mildew, and damageto the inside of your vehicle. Dry off thetop before lowering it.
145
Notice: If you lower the top on your vehicle incold weather (0°F/-18°C or lower), you maydamage top components. Do not lower the topin cold weather.
Notice: If you raise or lower the convertibletop while the vehicle is in motion, youcould damage the top or the top mechanism.The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Always put an automatictransmission in PARK (P) or a manualtransmission in NEUTRAL before raising orlowering the convertible top.
Lowering the Power Convertible Top1. Park on a level surface. The vehicle must be
running or in Acc. Shift an automatictransmission into PARK (P) and set theparking brake. Shift a manual transmissioninto NEUTRAL, and set the parking brake.
2. Make sure the trunk is closed and the reartrunk partition in the rear storage area is inthe fastened upright position, and thatno objects are forward of the divider. See“Rear Trunk Partition” under Rear StorageArea on page 130.
3. Release the convertible top front latch,located above the inside rearview mirror,by pulling and turning it clockwise toward thedriver’s door. Push upward on the frontedge. The windows will automatically lower.
146
4. Push and hold thebottom of the powerconvertible topbutton, located tothe left of thesteering wheel, onthe instrumentpanel.
The windows will automatically lower and theconvertible top will lower into the rear of thevehicle. A chime will sound when the convertibletop has lowered completely. If the radio is onthe sound may be muted for a brief time due to anew audio system equalization being loaded.
If the convertible top is operated multiple times,the engine should be running to prevent drainon the vehicle’s battery. Under certain conditions,the Driver Information Center (DIC) may displaya message regarding the power convertibletop. See DIC Warnings and Messages onpage 212 for more information.
Raising the Power Convertible Top
Notice: If you raise or lower the convertibletop while the vehicle is in motion, youcould damage the top or the top mechanism.The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Always put an automatictransmission in PARK (P) or a manualtransmission in NEUTRAL before raising orlowering the convertible top.
1. Park on a level surface. The vehicle must berunning or in Acc. Shift an automatictransmission into PARK (P) and set theparking brake. Shift a manual transmissioninto NEUTRAL and set the parking brake.
2. Make sure the trunk lid is closed and the reartrunk partition in the rear storage area is inthe fastened upright position, and thatno objects are forward of the divider. See“Rear Trunk Partition” under Rear StorageArea on page 130.
3. Push and hold the top of the power convertibletop button. The top will raise and the windowswill lower if they were in the raised position.A chime will sound when the top is raisedcompletely.
147
4. After the convertible top is completely raised,release the power convertible top button.
5. Pull the convertible front top latch downand turn it counterclockwise to lock theconvertible top.
If the radio is on the sound may be muted for abrief time due to a new audio system equalizationbeing loaded.
If the vehicle has lost power, the convertible top canstill be raised by releasing pressure on the hydraulicpump, located under the passenger’s side of the
tonneau cover, by using the following steps. Thecarpet liner on the passenger’s side must be pulledback to access the hydraulic pump.
Manual operation of the power convertible topcannot be attempted for five minutes from the lasttime the convertible top button was pressed ifthe top is not completely stowed, with the top downand the tonneau latched, or closed, with thefront top latch locked in place, at the time theconvertible top button was released.
1. Open the tonneau cover by pulling theemergency release cable.
148
The tonneau cover emergency release cableis located behind the passenger’s seathead restraint, on the underside forward edgeof the tonneau cover. Also, see Hatch/Trunkon page 83 for information on the emergencytrunk release handle.Be careful when opening the tonneau cover byhand. If the tonneau cover is opened quickly,damage can occur to the hinging mechanism,which can prevent proper operation of theconvertible top.
2. Locate the pressure release bolt on the frontside of the hydraulic pump.
3. Use the wrench, located in the console, andturn the pressure release boltcounterclockwise one revolution, to relievepressure to the hydraulic pump. This will allowyou to manually raise the convertible top.
4. Then follow the steps under raising themanual convertible top. See “Convertible Top(Manual)” under Convertible Top (Manual)on page 138 or Convertible Top (Power)on page 145
When power is restored to the vehicle, thehydraulic bolt must be tightened, by turning itclockwise. The power convertible top button canthen be used to lower or raise the convertible top.
If the power convertible top is operated multipletimes, the engine should be running to preventdrain on the vehicle’s battery. Under certainconditions, the Driver Information Center (DIC)may display a message regarding the power top.See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 212for more information.
If the battery has been disconnected, the powerwindows must be initialized for the power topto operate. See Power Windows on page 87 formore information.
149
✍ NOTES
150
Instrument Panel Overview ........................ 154Hazard Warning Flashers .......................... 156Other Warning Devices ............................. 157Horn .......................................................... 157Tilt Wheel .................................................. 157Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................. 158Turn and Lane-Change Signals
(Auto Signal) .......................................... 159Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer .......... 160Flash-to-Pass ............................................ 160Windshield Wipers ..................................... 160Windshield Washer .................................... 161Cruise Control ........................................... 162Exterior Lamps .......................................... 166Wiper Activated Headlamps ....................... 167Headlamps on Reminder ........................... 167Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) ................. 167Fog Lamps ................................................ 169Twilight Sentinel® ...................................... 169Exterior Lighting Battery Saver .................. 170
Instrument Panel Brightness ...................... 170Courtesy Lamps ........................................ 171Entry/Exit Lighting ...................................... 171Reading Lamps ......................................... 171Battery Run-Down Protection ..................... 171Head-Up Display (HUD) ............................ 172Accessory Power Outlet(s) ........................ 176Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter ................ 177
Climate Controls ......................................... 177Dual Automatic Climate Control System .... 177Outlet Adjustment ...................................... 184Passenger Compartment Air Filter ............. 184
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ..... 186Instrument Panel Cluster ........................... 186Speedometer and Odometer ...................... 188Tachometer ............................................... 188Safety Belt Reminder Light ........................ 188Airbag Readiness Light ............................. 189
Section 3 Instrument Panel
151
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............. 190Voltmeter Gage ......................................... 192One-to-Four Shift Light
(Manual Transmission) ........................... 193Brake System Warning Light ..................... 194Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light ...... 195Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light ........................................ 195Active Handling System Light .................... 196Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ............ 197Tire Pressure Light .................................... 197Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........................ 198Engine Oil Pressure Gage ......................... 202Security Light ............................................ 203Fog Lamp Light ......................................... 203Lights On Reminder .................................. 204Highbeam On Light ................................... 204Fuel Gage ................................................. 204
Driver Information Center (DIC) .................. 205DIC Controls and Displays ........................ 206DIC Warnings and Messages .................... 212Other Messages ........................................ 230DIC Vehicle Personalization ....................... 232
Audio System(s) ......................................... 242Setting the Time ........................................ 243Radio with CD ........................................... 244Using an MP3 ........................................... 259XM Radio Messages ................................. 265Navigation/Radio System ........................... 267Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................. 267Audio Steering Wheel Controls .................. 267Radio Reception ........................................ 268Care of Your CDs ..................................... 269Care of the CD Player .............................. 270Diversity Antenna System .......................... 270XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ....... 270
Section 3 Instrument Panel
152
✍ NOTES
153
Instrument Panel Overview
154
The main components of your instrument panel are the following:
A. Air Outlet. See Outlet Adjustment on page 184.B. Head-Up Display Controls (If Equipped). See
Head-Up Display (HUD) on page 172.C. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See Turn
Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 158. CruiseControl. See Cruise Control on page 162.Fog Lamps. See Fog Lamps on page 169.Headlamp Controls. See Exterior Lampson page 166.
D. Manual Shift Paddles (If Equipped). SeeAutomatic Transmission Operation on page 95.
E. Driver Information Center (DIC). See DriverInformation Center (DIC) on page 205.
F. Instrument Panel Cluster. See InstrumentPanel Cluster on page 186.
G. Audio Steering Wheel Controls (If Equipped).See Audio Steering Wheel Controls onpage 267.
H. Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever. SeeWindshield Wipers on page 160 and WindshieldWasher on page 161.
I. Driver Information Center (DIC) Controls. SeeDIC Controls and Displays on page 206.
J. Center Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment onpage 184.
K. Hazard Warning Flasher Button. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 156.
L. Audio System. See Audio System(s) onpage 242.
M. Climate Controls. See Dual Automatic ClimateControl System on page 177.
N. Fuel Door Release Button. See Filling the Tankon page 323. Hatch/Trunk Release Button.See “Hatch/Trunk Lid Release” underHatch/Trunk on page 83.
O. Instrument Panel Brightness Control. SeeInstrument Panel Brightness on page 170.
P. Power Folding Top Switch (If Equipped). SeeConvertible Top (Manual) on page 138 orConvertible Top (Power) on page 145.
Q. Tilt Wheel Lever. See Tilt Wheel on page 157.R. Telescopic Wheel Button (If Equipped). See
Tilt Wheel on page 157.S. Ignition Switch. See Ignition Positions on
page 90.
155
T. Heated Seat Controls (If Equipped). SeeHeated Seats on page 10.
U. Shift Lever (Automatic Shown). See AutomaticTransmission Operation on page 95 orManual Transmission Operation on page 100.
V. Active Handling Button. See Active HandlingSystem on page 281.
W. Accessory Power Outlet. See Accessory PowerOutlet(s) on page 176.
X. Center Console Cupholder. See Cupholder(s)on page 128.
Y. Ashtray and Cigarette Lighter. See Ashtray(s)and Cigarette Lighter on page 177.
Z. Parking Brake. See Parking Brake on page 103.AA. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 128.
BB. Instrument Panel Fuse Block. See InstrumentPanel Fuse Block on page 420.
Hazard Warning FlashersYour hazard warning flashers let you warn others.They also let police know you have a problem.Your front and rear turn signal lamps will flash onand off.
The hazard warningflasher button is locatednear the center of theinstrument panel.
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter whatmode the ignition is in, even if the ignition isturned off.
Press the button to make the front and rear turnsignal lamps flash on and off. Press the buttonagain to turn the flashers off.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, yourturn signals will not work.
156
Other Warning DevicesIf you carry reflective triangles, you can set them upat the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m)behind your vehicle.
HornPress near or on the horn symbols on yoursteering wheel pad to sound the horn.
Tilt WheelA tilt wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheelbefore you drive. You can raise it to the highestlevel to give your legs more room when youexit and enter the vehicle.
The lever that allows you to tilt the steering wheelis located on the left side of the steering column.
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pullthe lever toward you. Then move the wheel toa comfortable position and release the lever to lockthe wheel in place.
157
Telescopic Steering ColumnIf your vehicle has this feature, the telescopicsteering column will allow you to adjust thedistance the steering wheel is from the instrumentpanel.
The telescopic steeringcolumn switch is locatedon the right side ofthe steering column.
To operate the telescopic steering column, pushthe switch forward and the wheel will moveaway from you. Pull the switch rearward and thewheel will move toward you
The telescopic steering column position can bestored with your memory settings. See MemorySeat, Mirrors and Steering Wheel on page 10for more information.
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
The lever on the left side of the steering columnincludes the following:
• G Turn and Lane-Change Signals. See Turnand Lane-Change Signals (Auto Signal) onpage 159.
• 3 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer. SeeHeadlamp High/Low-Beam Changer onpage 160.
• - Fog Lamps. See Fog Lamps on page 169.
158
• Flash-to-Pass Feature. See Flash-to-Pass onpage 160.
• I Cruise Control. See Cruise Control onpage 162.
• P Exterior Lamps Control. See Exterior Lampson page 166.
Turn and Lane-Change Signals(Auto Signal)The turn signal has two upward (for right) and twodownward (for left) positions. These positionsallow you to signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the multifunction lever allthe way up or down. When the turn is finished, thelever will return automatically.
An arrow on theinstrument panel clusterwill flash in thedirection of the turn orlane change.
To signal a lane change, just raise or lower thelever until the arrow starts to flash. Releasethe lever and the turn signal will automatically flashthree times. If more flashes are desired, continueto hold the lever.
If you signal a turn or a lane change and thearrows flash faster than normal, a signal bulb maybe burned out.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid anaccident. If the arrows do not go on at all whenyou signal a turn, check the fuses and checkfor burned-out bulbs. See Fuses and CircuitBreakers on page 420.
Turn Signal on ChimeA chime will remind you if you leave the turnsignal on for more than three-quarters of a mile(1.2 km) of driving.
If you need to leave the turn signal on for morethan three-quarters of a mile (1.2 km), turn off thesignal and then turn it back on.
159
Headlamp High/Low-Beam ChangerTo change the headlamps from low beam tohigh, push the turn signal lever all the way forward.To change from high to low beam, pull the leverrearward.
While the high beamsare on, this light on theinstrument panelcluster will also be lit.
Flash-to-PassTo use the flash-to-pass feature, briefly pull theturn signal lever toward you. The high-beamindicator flashes to indicate to the other driver thatyou intend to pass. If the low-beam headlampsare off and the fog lamps are on, the foglamps flash.
Windshield Wipers
Use the lever located on the right side of thesteering column to operate the windshield wipers.
1 (High Speed): Move the lever to thisposition for steady wiping at high speed.
6 (Low Speed): Move the lever to thisposition for steady wiping at low speed.
& (Delay): Move the lever to this position to seta delay between wipes.
160
x (Delay Adjustment): Move the lever to thisposition to choose a delayed wiping cycle.Turn the intermittent adjust band down for a longerdelay or up for a shorter delay. The wiper speedcan only be manually adjusted when the lever is inthis position.
9 (Off): Move the lever to this position to turn offthe windshield wipers.
8 (Mist): Move the lever all the way down tomist and release for a single wiping cycle.The windshield wipers will stop after one wipe. Ifyou want more wipes, hold the band on mistlonger.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wipers. If thisoccurs, a circuit breaker will stop the wipersuntil the motor cools. So, be sure to clear any iceand snow from the windshield wiper bladesbefore using them. If the wiper blades are frozento the windshield, carefully loosen them orwarm the windshield before turning the wipers on.If your blades do become worn or damaged,get new blades or blade inserts.
Windshield WasherThe lever on the right side of the steering columnalso controls the windshield washer. There is abutton at the end of the lever. To spray washer fluidon the windshield, press the button and hold it. Thewasher will spray until you release the button. Thewipers will continue to clear the window for aboutsix seconds after the button is released and thenstop or return to your preset speed.
{CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use yourwasher until the windshield is warmed.Otherwise the washer fluid can form iceon the windshield, blocking your vision.
If the fluid in the windshield washer fluid reservoir islow, the message CHECK WASHER FLUID willappear on the Driver Information Center (DIC)display. It will take 15 seconds after the bottle isrefilled for this message to turn off. For informationon the correct washer fluid to use, see WindshieldWasher Fluid on page 359 and RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 443.
161
Cruise ControlYour vehicle has cruise control.
9 (Off): Slide the switch to this position to turnthe system off.
R (On): Slide the switch to this position to turnthe system on.
+ (Resume/Accelerate): Slide the switch to thisposition to make the vehicle accelerate orresume a previously set speed.
T (Set): Press this button at the end of thelever to set the speed.
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed ofabout 25 mph (40 km/h) or more withoutkeeping your foot on the accelerator. This canreally help on long trips. Cruise control does notwork at speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h).
Cruise control will not work if your parking brake isset, or if the master cylinder brake fluid level is low.
{CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous whereyou cannot drive safely at a steady speed.So, do not use your cruise control onwinding roads or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous onslippery roads. On such roads, fastchanges in tire traction can causeexcessive wheel slip, and you could losecontrol. Do not use cruise control onslippery roads.
162
If your vehicle is in cruise control, and has theTraction Control System (TCS), and it begins tolimit wheel spin, the cruise control automaticallydisengages. See Traction Control System (TCS) onpage 279. When road conditions allow you to safelyuse it again, you can turn cruise control back on.
Setting Cruise Control
{CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control on whenyou are not using cruise, you might hit abutton and go into cruise when you do notwant to. You could be startled and evenlose control. Keep the cruise control switchoff until you want to use cruise control.
1. Move the cruise control switch to on.
2. Get up to the speed desired.
3. Press in the set button at the end of the leverand release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
When the cruise control is engaged, the CRUISESET TO XX MPH message displays on theDriver Information Center (DIC). See OtherMessages on page 230.
Resuming a Set SpeedSuppose you set your cruise control at a desiredspeed and then you apply the brake. This, ofcourse, disengages the cruise control. But you donot need to reset it.
Once you are going about 25 mph (40 km/h) ormore, you can move the cruise control switchbriefly from on to resume/accelerate.
You will go right back up to your chosen speedand stay there.
If you hold the switch at resume/accelerate thevehicle keeps going faster until you releasethe switch or apply the brake. Do not hold theswitch at resume/accelerate, unless you want thevehicle to go faster.
163
Increasing Speed While UsingCruise ControlThere are two ways to go to a higher speed:
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higherspeed. Press the set button at the end of thelever, then release the button and theaccelerator pedal. You will now cruise at thehigher speed. If the accelerator pedal isheld longer than 60 seconds, cruise controlwill turn off.
• Move the cruise switch from on to resume/accelerate. Hold it there until you get up to thespeed desired, and then release the switch. Toincrease your speed in very small amounts,move the switch briefly to resume/accelerate.Each time you do this, your vehicle will goabout 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
Reducing Speed While UsingCruise Control• Press and hold the set button until you reach
the lower speed you want, then release it.
• To slow down in very small amounts, brieflypress the set button. Each time you do this,you will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Passing Another Vehicle While UsingCruise ControlUse the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.When you take your foot off the pedal, yourvehicle slows down to the cruise control speedyou set earlier.
Using Cruise Control on HillsHow well your cruise control will work on hillsdepends upon your speed, load, and thesteepness of the hills. When going up steep hills,you might want to step on the acceleratorpedal to maintain the vehicle’s speed. When goingdownhill, you might have to brake or shift to alower gear to keep the vehicle’s speed down.Of course, applying the brake turns off the cruisecontrol. Many drivers find this to be too muchtrouble and do not use cruise control on steep hills.
164
Cruise Control in Sport (S) and ManualPaddle Shift Gear SelectionWhen your vehicle is in Sport (S) and the manualpaddle shift controls are not being used, cruisecontrol operates in the same manner as Drive (D).
When your vehicle is in Sport (S) and themanual paddle shift controls are being used,cruise control operates as follows:
• If cruise control is active and a gear isselected with the manual paddle shift controls,the vehicle maintains vehicle speed in thedriver selected gear and will not automaticallyup-shift or down-shift the transmissionwhile the driver’s gear selection is active.
• If driving in hilly terrain, cruise control may notbe able to maintain vehicle speed if anup-shift or down-shift is not selected by thedriver. While driving on hilly terrain and cruisecontrol is active with a manual paddle shiftgear selection, the driver must select theproper gear for the terrain or select Drive (D)on the gear range selector for full automatictransmission operation.
Ending Cruise ControlTo end a cruise control session, step lightly on thebrake pedal. If your vehicle has a manualtransmission, lightly tapping the clutch will alsoend a cruise control session.
Move the cruise control switch to off to turn thesystem completely off.
When cruise control is disengaged, the CRUISEDISENGAGED message displays on the DriverInformation Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 212.
Erasing Speed MemoryWhen you turn off the cruise control or theignition, the cruise control set speed memory iserased.
165
Exterior Lamps
The exterior lamp control is located to the left ofthe steering wheel on the multifunction lever.
O (Exterior Lamp Control): Turn the band withthis symbol on it to operate the exterior lamps.
The exterior lamp band has four positions:
O (Off): Turn the band to this position to turn offall lamps.
AUTO (Automatic): Turn the band to this positionto set the exterior lamps in automatic mode.AUTO mode turns the exterior lamps on and offdepending on how much light is available outsidethe vehicle.
To override AUTO mode, turn the control to off.
To reset to AUTO mode turn the control to exteriorlamps and then back to AUTO. Automatic modealso resets when your vehicle is turned offand then back on again if the control is left in theAUTO position.
; (Parking Lamp): Turning the band to thisposition turns on the parking lamps together withthe following:
• Sidemarker Lamps
• Taillamps
• License Plate Lamps
• Instrument Panel Lights
The parking brake indicator light comes on andstays on when the parking lamps are on with theengine off and the ignition to Acc.
5 (Headlamps): Turning the control to thisposition turns on the headlamps, together with thepreviously listed lamps and lights.
166
Wiper Activated HeadlampsThis feature activates the headlamps and parkinglamps after the windshield wipers have been inuse for approximately 15 seconds and deactivatesand returns to ambient lighting conditions15 seconds after the wipers are turned off.
If the exterior lamp control has been turned off oris in the parking lamp position while the wipercontrol is active in any position, the HEADLAMPSSUGGESTED message appears on the DriverInformation Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 212.
When the ignition is turned off, the wiper-activatedheadlamps will immediately turn off.
Headlamps on ReminderA warning chime will sound if the exterior lampcontrol is left on in either the headlamp or parkinglamp position and the driver’s door is openedwith the ignition off.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easierfor others to see the front of your vehicle duringthe day. DRL can be helpful in many differentdriving conditions, but they can be especiallyhelpful in the short periods after dawn and beforesunset. Fully functional daytime running lampsare required on all vehicles first sold in Canada.
The DRL system will make the front turn signallamps come on when the following conditionsare met:
• It is still daylight and the ignition is on.
• The exterior lamp control is in the AUTOposition.
• The transmission is not in PARK (P) or theparking brake is off.
• The parking brake is off or the vehicle speedis greater than 8 mph (13 km/h).
When DRL are on, only the front turn signal lampswill be on. No other exterior lamps such as theparking lamps, taillamps, etc. will be on when theDRL are being used. Your instrument panelwill not be lit up either.
167
When it is dark enough outside, the front turnsignal lamps will turn off and normal low-beamheadlamps will turn on.
When it is bright enough outside, the regular lampswill go off, and the front turn signal lamps will takeover. If you start your vehicle in a dark garage, theautomatic headlamp system will come onimmediately. Once you leave the garage, it will takeapproximately one minute for the automaticheadlamp system to change to DRL if it is lightoutside. During that delay, the instrument panelcluster may not be as bright as usual. Make sureyour instrument panel brightness knob is in the fullbright position. See Instrument Panel Brightness onpage 170 for more information.
If it is dark enough outside and the exterior lampcontrol is off, a HEADLAMPS SUGGESTEDmessage will display on the Driver’s InformationCenter (DIC). This message informs the driver thatturning on the exterior lamps is recommended.See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 212.
Turning the exterior lamp control to off a secondtime, or turning on the headlamps will removethe HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED message in theDIC. If the parking lamps or the fog lampswere turned on instead, the HEADLAMPSSUGGESTED message will continue to bedisplayed.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on theregular headlamp system when you need it.
To turn off the DRL, turn the exterior lamp controlto the off position or shift into PARK (P). TheDRL will stay off until the control is toggled againor the vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P).
This procedure applies only to vehicles first sold inthe United States.
168
Fog LampsUse fog lamps for better vision in foggy or mistyconditions.
The fog lamps control is located on themultifunction lever next to the exterior lampcontrol.
- (Fog Lamps): Turning the band to thisposition will turn the fog lamps on.
When you turn the fog lamps on, the fog lamplight will appear on the instrument panel cluster toindicate that the fog lamps and the parkinglamps are on.
If you turn the high-beam headlamps on, the foglamps will turn off. They will turn on againwhen you switch to low-beam headlamps.
The ignition must be on for the fog lamps tooperate.
Some localities have laws that require theheadlamps to be on along with the fog lamps.
Twilight Sentinel®
Twilight Sentinel® can turn your lamps on and offfor you. A light sensor on top of the instrumentpanel makes the Twilight Sentinel® work, sobe sure it is not covered.
With Twilight Sentinel®, you will see the followinghappen:
• When it is dark enough outside, the front turnsignal lamps (DRL) will go off, and theheadlamps and parking lamps will come on.The other lamps that come on with headlampswill also come on.
• When it is bright enough outside, theheadlamps will go off, and the front turn signallamps (DRL) will come on, as long as theexterior lamp switch is in the AUTO position.
If you start your vehicle in a dark garage, theautomatic headlamp system will come onimmediately. Once you leave the garage, it will takeabout one minute for the automatic headlampsystem to change to DRL if it is light outside. Duringthat delay, your instrument panel cluster may not beas bright as usual. Make sure your instrument panelbrightness control is in full bright position. SeeInstrument Panel Brightness on page 170.
169
You can idle the vehicle with the lamps off, evenwhen it is dark outside.
After starting the vehicle, turn the exterior lampcontrol band on the multifunction lever to offand then release it. The lamps will remain off untilyou turn the control band to off again.
Twilight Sentinel® also provides exteriorillumination as you leave the vehicle. If TwilightSentinel® has turned on the lamps when you turnoff the ignition, your lamps will remain on until:
• The exterior lamp switch is moved fromoff to the parking lamp position, or
• A delay time that you select has elapsed.
See “Personal Options” under DIC VehiclePersonalization on page 232 to select the delaytime that you want. You can also select nodelay time.
If you turn off the ignition with the exterior lampswitch in the parking lamp or headlamp position,the Twilight Sentinel® delay will not occur.The lamps will turn off as soon as the switch isturned off.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on theregular headlamp system when you need it.
Exterior Lighting Battery SaverIf the manual parking lamps or headlamps havebeen left on, the exterior lamps will turn off as soonas the ignition is turned off or Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) is active. This protects againstdraining the battery in case you have accidentallyleft the headlamps or parking lamps on. The batterysaver does not work if the headlamps are turned onafter the ignition switch is turned to off.
If you need to leave the lamps on, use the exteriorlamp control to turn the lamps back on.
Instrument Panel Brightness
The knob for thisfeature is located on theleft side of theinstrument panel.
Push the knob in to turn on the interior lights.
170
Turn and hold the knob clockwise to brighten thelights or counterclockwise to dim them. Duringthe day, this knob will adjust the instrument panelbrightness and at night will adjust all interiorlighting.
Be sure not to have this knob turned all the waydown with the lamps on during the day. YourDriver Information Center (DIC) may not be visible.
Courtesy LampsWhen any door or the hatch/trunk lid is opened,the interior lamps will go on unless it is brightoutside.
You can also turn the courtesy lamps on and offby pressing the instrument panel brightness knob.
Entry/Exit LightingWith entry lighting, the interior lamps will come onwhen entering the vehicle. The interior lampswill come on for about 20 seconds when theengine is off.
You can turn exit and entry lighting off by quicklyturning the courtesy lamps on and off.
Reading LampsThe inside rearview mirror includes two readinglamps. The lamps will go on when a door isopened. When the doors are closed, each lampcan be turned on individually by pressing theswitch for that lamp.
An ambient light is located in the passenger sunvisor clip. This light stays on while driving tokeep the cabin from being too dark.
Battery Run-Down ProtectionThis vehicle has a feature to help prevent thebattery from being drained in case any ofthe following lamps are left on; the underhoodlamp, if your vehicle has this feature, vanity mirrorlamps, cargo lamps, reading lamps, console orglove box lamps. If any of these lamps are left on,they will automatically time-out after about20 minutes. To reset it, all of the above lampsmust be turned off or the ignition key on.
171
Head-Up Display (HUD)
{CAUTION:
If the HUD image is too bright, or too highin your field of view, it may take you moretime to see things you need to see when itis dark outside. Be sure to keep the HUDimage dim and placed low in your fieldof view.
If your vehicle has the Head-Up Display (HUD),you can see some of the driver informationthat appears on the instrument panel cluster.
The information may be displayed in English ormetric units and appears as an image focused outtoward the front of your vehicle. The HUDconsists of the following information:
• Speedometer
• Turn Signal Indicators
• High-Beam Indicator Symbol
• Tachometer
• Manual Paddle Shift Gear Indicator(If Equipped)These displays on the HUD are for use whenusing the manual paddle shift controls to shiftthe transmission. See “Manual Paddle Shift” inAutomatic Transmission Operation on page 95.
• Shift LightThis light is used for performance driving toindicate that the vehicle’s best performancelevel has been reached to shift the transmissioninto the next higher gear. An arrow pointing upwill light up on the display just prior to reachingthe engine fuel cut-off mode. This cut-off isabout 6,500 RPM for the LS2 engine and7,000 RPM for the LS7 engine.
• Check Gages Warning• Engine Coolant Temperature Gage• Transmission Fluid Temperature Gage,
(Automatic Transmission Vehicles Only)• Engine Oil Temperature Gage• Engine Oil Pressure Gage• G-Force Gage• Audio Functions, Street Mode Only• Navigation, Only with Navigation Radio,
Turn-by-Turn Guidance
172
There are three HUD modes that you can chooseto view in the HUD display. By pressing theMODE button, you can scroll through these modesin the following order:
Street Mode supportsaudio and navigationfunctions with yourchoice of tachometersettings.
Track Mode 1 supportsthe G-Force gage andminor gages with acircular tachometer.
Track Mode 2 supportsG-Force gages andminor gages witha linear tachometer.
When the desired HUD display has been selected,release the MODE button.
Within each mode, the display, can be furthercustomized by pressing the PAGE button. Pressingthis button in each mode will turn off and on thefollowing:
• Street Mode — No tachometer, circulartachometer, and linear tachometer.
• Track Modes 1 and 2 — No minor gage,coolant temperature, transmission oiltemperature, engine oil temperature, andengine oil pressure.While in Track Mode 1 or 2, the maximum Gvalue achieved during the current ignitioncycle can be displayed by pressing andholding the PAGE button. The maximum Gdisplay will be shown until the PAGE button isreleased. The maximum G value displaywill be identical to the normal G valuedisplay, except the maximum G gage digits(X.XX G) and corresponding G gage barwill overwrite the current G value.
173
Be sure to continue scanning the displays,controls and driving environment just as you wouldin a vehicle without HUD. If you never look atyour instrument panel cluster, you may misssomething important, such as a warning light.Under important warning conditions, the CHECKGAGES warning will illuminate in the HUD.View your Driver Information Center (DIC) formore information.
The HUD controls arelocated to the left of thesteering wheel.
To adjust the HUD so you can see it properly, dothe following:
1. Start the engine and press the HUDdimmer control all the way up by pressingthe (+) button.The brightness of the HUD image is determinedby the light conditions in the direction thevehicle is facing and where you have the HUDdimmer control set. If you are facing a darkobject or a heavily shaded area, your HUD mayanticipate that you are entering a dark area andmay begin to dim.
174
It is possible for sunlight to enter the HUDmaking it difficult to see the image. The displaywill return to normal when the sunlight is nolonger entering the HUD.
2. Adjust the seat to a comfortable drivingposition. If you change your seat position later,you may have to re-adjust your HUD.
3. Press the up or down arrows to center theHUD image in your view.The HUD image can only be adjusted up anddown, not side-to-side.
4. Press the dimmer control downward until theHUD image is no brighter than necessary.
To turn HUD off, press and hold the (–) buttonuntil the HUD display turns off.
If the sun comes out or it becomes cloudy, youmay need to adjust the HUD brightness againusing the dimmer control. Polarized sunglassescould make the HUD image harder to see.
The HUD information can be displayed in one ofsix languages including English, Spanish,French, German, Italian or Japanese. Thespeedometer can be displayed in either English orMetric units.
To change the language and unit selections, see“OPTION” under DIC Controls and Displayson page 206.
Clean the inside of the windshield as needed toremove any dirt or film that reduces the sharpnessor clarity of the HUD image.
To clean the HUD, spray household glass cleaneron a soft, clean cloth. Wipe the HUD lens gently,then dry it. Do not spray cleaner directly on the lensbecause the cleaner could leak into the unit.
If the ignition is on and you can not see the HUDimage, check to see if:
• Something is covering the HUD unit.
• The HUD dimmer control is adjusted properly.
• The HUD image is adjusted to the properheight.
• Ambient light is low, in the direction yourvehicle is facing.
• A fuse is blown. See Fuses and CircuitBreakers on page 420.
Keep in mind that your windshield is part of theHUD system. See Windshield Replacementon page 374.
175
Accessory Power Outlet(s)The accessory power outlet can be used toconnect electrical equipment such as a cellularphone or CB radio.
The accessory power outlet is located inside thecenter console storage compartment, on theforward left side.
To use the outlet, remove the tethered cap. Whennot using it, always cover the outlet with theprotective cap.
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment pluggedin for an extended period of time while thevehicle is off will drain the battery. Power isalways supplied to the outlets. Always unplugelectrical equipment when not in use anddo not plug in equipment that exceedsthe maximum 20 ampere rating.
Certain electrical accessories may not becompatible with the accessory power outlet andcould result in blown vehicle or adapter fuses.If you experience a problem, see your dealer foradditional information on accessory power outlets.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment toyour vehicle may damage it or keep othercomponents from working as they should.The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not use equipment exceedingmaximum amperage rating of 20 amperes.Check with your dealer before adding electricalequipment.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure tofollow the installation instructions included with theequipment.
We recommend that you see a qualified technicianor your dealer for the proper installation of yourequipment.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet cancause damage not covered by your warranty.Do not hang any type of accessory oraccessory bracket from the plug because thepower outlets are designed for accessorypower plugs only.
176
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette LighterThe ashtray and cigarette lighter are located onthe instrument panel, in front of the shift lever.To use the ashtray, press on the indentation at thetop of the door.
Notice: If you put papers, pins, or otherflammable items in the ashtray, hot cigarettesor other smoking materials could ignitethem and possibly damage your vehicle. Neverput flammable items in the ashtray.
Loose objects, such as paper clips, can lodgebehind and beneath the ashtray lid and preventmovement of the lid. You should avoid puttingsmall, loose objects near the ashtray.
To use the cigarette lighter, push it in all the wayand let go. When it is ready, it will pop backout by itself.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while itis heating will not allow the lighter to backaway from the heating element when it is hot.Damage from overheating may occur to thelighter or heating element, or a fuse could beblown. Do not hold a cigarette lighter inwhile it is heating.
Climate ControlsDual Automatic Climate ControlSystemWith this system you can control the heating,cooling, and ventilation for your vehicle.
When the vehicle is first started, the display willshow the driver’s temperature setting, the outsidetemperature, the fan speed and the air delivery,for about 10 seconds.The outside temperature is shown in the center ofthe display. The digital display will show thereadings in Fahrenheit or Celsius. See “PersonalOptions” under DIC Vehicle Personalization onpage 232 for information on changing your display.
177
Automatic Operation
AUTO (Automatic): Press the AUTO button toplace the entire system in the automatic mode.When automatic operation is active, the system willautomatically control the inside temperature, theair delivery mode, and the fan speed.
After a ten second display of the current settings,the word AUTO, the driver’s temperature settingand the outside temperature will be shown.The system will operate to achieve your comfortset temperature as quickly as possible. The AUTOcontrol system works best with the windows upand the removable roof installed or the convertibletop up.
1. Press the AUTO button.
2. Adjust the temperature to a comfortablesetting between 60°F (16°C) and 90°F (32°C).Choosing the coldest or warmest temperaturesetting will not cause the system to heat orcool any faster. A setting of 73°F (23°C)is suggested.
In cold weather, the system will start atreduced fan speeds to avoid blowing cold airinto your vehicle until warmer air is available.The system will start out blowing air at the floorbut may change modes automatically as thevehicle warms up to maintain the chosentemperature setting. The length of time neededfor warm up will depend on the outsidetemperature and the length of time that haselapsed since your vehicle was last driven.
3. Wait for the system to regulate. This may takefrom 10 to 30 minutes. Then adjust thetemperature, if necessary.
Do not cover the solar sensor located in thecenter of the instrument panel, near thewindshield. For more information on the solarsensor, see “Sensor” later in this section.
178
Manual Operation
Driver Power/Temperature: Press the drivertemperature knob on the driver side of the climatecontrol panel to turn the climate control systemoff. This is the only setting that completely shuts offthe fan. The digital display will show only theoutside temperature. You can still adjust the driverand the passenger set temperature and the airintake mode when the climate control is off.
Passenger Power/Temperature: Press thepassenger temperature knob on the passengerside of the climate control panel to turn thepassenger’s climate control system on or off. Turnthe knob to increase or decrease the temperaturefor the passenger. If the passenger’s climatecontrol system is off, the driver’s temperature knobwill control the temperature for the entire vehicle.
N (MODE): Press this button to manuallylock in the current air delivery setting and to stopthe automatic mode control. Pressing theMODE button will delete AUTO from the digitaldisplay and the mode graphics will be shown.To change the setting, press the MODE buttonagain. The AUTO button must be pressed to returnto the automatic mode selection.
To change the current mode, select one of thefollowing:
H (Vent): This mode directs most of the air tothe instrument panel outlets, with a very smallamount of air directed to the floor outlets.
% (Bi-Level): This mode directs about half ofthe air to the instrument panel outlets, and directsthe remaining air to the floor outlets. Cooler airis directed to the upper outlets and warmer air tothe floor outlets.
6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air tothe floor outlets with some air directed to theside window defogger outlets and some airdirected toward the windshield.
The MODE button can also be used to select thedefog mode. Information on defogging anddefrosting can be found later in this section.
x 9 w (Fan): Press the button with the fansymbol to manually increase or decrease thefan speed. Keep pressing the up or down arrowon this switch until the desired fan speed appearson the display.
179
Pressing the arrows will delete AUTO from thedigital display. The fan graphics with the fan speedbars will be shown. To increase the fan speedso that more air flows into the vehicle, press the uparrow on the fan switch. To decrease the fanspeed and airflow, press the down arrow.The AUTO button must be pressed to return to theautomatic fan control.
If the airflow seems low when the fan speed is atthe highest setting, the passenger compartmentair filter may need to be replaced. For moreinformation, see Passenger Compartment Air Filteron page 184 and Scheduled Maintenance onpage 433.
? (Recirculation): Press this button to turnthe recirculation mode on or off. When the climatecontrol system is in recirculation mode anindicator light will come on. This mode preventsoutside air from entering your vehicle. It canbe used to prevent outside air and odors fromentering your vehicle and to help cool the air insideyour vehicle more quickly. Recirculation mode isnot available in defrost or defog mode.
^ (Air Conditioning Off): Press this button toturn the air conditioning compressor off. PressAUTO to return to automatic operation. When inAUTO, the air conditioning compressor willcome on automatically, as needed.
Air conditioning does not operate at temperaturesbelow about 35°F to 40°F (2°C to 4°C). Intemperatures above 40°F (4°C), the airconditioning cannot be turned off in defrost anddefog, as it helps to remove moisture fromthe vehicle. It also helps to keep the windowsclear.
You may notice a slight change in engineperformance when the air-conditioning compressorshuts off and turns on again. This is normal.The system is designed to make adjustments tohelp with fuel economy while still maintainingthe selected temperature.
On hot days, open the windows to let hot insideair escape; then close them. This helps to reducethe time it takes for your vehicle to cool down.It also helps the system to operate more efficiently.
180
For quick cool down on hot days press the AUTObutton and adjust the temperature to a cool,comfortable setting. To achieve maximum cooldown, do the following:
1. Select the vent mode.
2. Select recirculation mode.
3. Select the A/C on.
4. Select the coolest temperature.
5. Select the highest fan speed.
Using these settings together for long periods oftime may cause the air inside of your vehicleto become too dry. To prevent this fromhappening, after the air in your vehicle has cooled,turn the recirculation mode off.
The air conditioning system removes moisturefrom the air, so you may sometimes notice a smallamount of water dripping underneath yourvehicle while idling or after turning off the engine.This is normal.
SensorsThe solar sensor on your vehicle monitors thesolar radiation and uses the information tomaintain the selected temperature when operatingin AUTO mode by initiating needed adjustmentsto the temperature, the fan speed and the airdelivery system. The system may also supplycooler air to the side of the vehicle facing the sun.The recirculation mode will also be activated,as necessary. Do not cover the solar sensorlocated on the top of the instrument panel nearthe windshield or the system will not work properly.
There is also a sensor located behind the frontbumper. This sensor reads the outside airtemperature and helps to maintain the temperatureinside the vehicle. Any cover on the front of thevehicle could give a false reading in thetemperature.
If the outside temperature goes up, the displayedtemperature will not change until:
• The vehicle’s speed is above 12 mph (19 km/h)for five minutes.
• The vehicle’s speed is above 32 mph (52 km/h)for two and a half minutes.
181
These delays prevent false readings. If thetemperature goes down, the outside temperaturewill be shown when you start the vehicle. If ithas been turned off for less than three hours, thetemperature will be recalled from the previousvehicle operation.There is also an inside temperature sensorlocated to the left of the ignition switch. Theautomatic climate control system uses this sensorto receive information, so if you block or coverit, the system will not function properly.
Defogging and DefrostingFog on the inside of windows is a result of highhumidity and moisture condensing on the coolwindow glass. This can be minimized if the climatecontrol system is used properly. There are twomodes to clear fog or frost from your windshield.Use the floor/defog mode to clear the windows offog or moisture and warm the passengers. Usedefrost to remove fog or frost from the windshieldmore quickly. To prevent fogging on the inside ofthe windows in modes other than floor/defog anddefrost, make sure the air conditioning compressoris on and recirculation mode is off.Press the mode button until the defog modeappears on the display.
- (Floor/Defog): This mode directs the airequally between the windshield and the flooroutlets with a small amount to the side windowoutlets. When you select this mode, the systemturns off recirculation and runs the air-conditioningcompressor unless the outside temperature isat or below freezing. The recirculation modecannot be selected while in the defog mode.
1 (Defrost): Pressing this button directs most ofthe air to the windshield, with a small amountdirected to the side window outlets. The light onthe button will come on and the digital display willshow the defrost mode symbol and fan speedwhen the front defrost mode is being used. In thismode, the system will automatically turn off therecirculation and run the air-conditioningcompressor, unless the outside temperature is ator below freezing. Recirculation cannot beselected while in the defrost mode. Pressing thisbutton again will return the system to the lastoperating mode.
For severe ice conditions, turn the driver’stemperature knob to 90°F (32°C) while indefrost mode.Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows areclear.
182
Rear Window DefoggerThe rear window defogger uses a warming grid toremove fog or frost from the rear window.
The rear window defogger will only work when theengine is running.
= (Rear Window Defogger): Press this buttonto turn the rear window defogger on. Be sureto clear as much snow from the rear window aspossible. An indicator light in the button will comeon to let you know that the rear window defoggeris activated.
The rear window defogger will turn off about10 minutes after the button is pressed whentraveling less than 30 mph (48 km/h). If turnedon again, the defogger will only run for aboutfive minutes before turning off. The defogger canalso be turned off by pressing the button againor by turning off the engine.
Your vehicle has heated outside rearview mirrors.The mirrors will heat to help clear fog or frostfrom the surface of the mirrors when therear window defog button is pressed.
If your vehicle has the power convertible top, therear window defogger and heated mirrors areautomatically disabled when the power convertibletop is moving or down.
Notice: Do not use anything sharp on theinside of the rear window. If you do, you couldcut or damage the warming grid, and therepairs would not be covered by your warranty.Do not attach a temporary vehicle license,tape, a decal or anything similar to thedefogger grid.
183
Outlet AdjustmentUse the tab located on the air outlets to changethe direction of the airflow.
Operation Tips• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the
air inlets at the base of the windshield thatmay block the flow of air into your vehicle.
• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors mayadversely affect the performance of thesystem.
• Keep the area around the base of theinstrument panel console and air path underthe seats clear of objects to help circulatethe air inside of your vehicle more effectively.
Passenger Compartment Air FilterThe passenger compartment air filter removescertain particles from the air including pollen anddust particles. Reductions in airflow, whichmay occur more often in dusty areas, indicate thatthe filter may need to be replaced. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 433 for information onhow often to replace the filter.
Notice: Driving without a passengercompartment air filter in place can cause waterand small particles, like paper and leaves, tobe pulled into your climate control systemwhich may cause damage to it. Make sure youalways replace the old filter with a new one.
The passenger compartment air filter is located onthe passenger side of the engine compartmentnear the battery. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 328.
184
To check or replace the air filter, do the following:
1. Undo the passenger compartment air filterhousing cover retainer clips (A).
2. Remove the passenger compartment air filterhousing cover.
3. Remove the passenger compartment air filterfrom the housing.
4. Insert the new filter into the housing.
5. Reinstall the passenger compartment air filterhousing cover.
6. Attach the passenger compartment air filterhousing cover retainer clips.
185
Warning Lights, Gages, andIndicatorsThis part describes the warning lights and gagesthat may be on your vehicle. The pictures willhelp you locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal thatsomething is wrong before it becomes seriousenough to cause an expensive repair orreplacement. Paying attention to your warninglights and gages could also save you or othersfrom injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be oris a problem with one of your vehicle’s functions.As you will see in the details on the next fewpages, some warning lights come on briefly whenyou start the engine just to let you know theyare working. If you are familiar with this section,you should not be alarmed when this happens.
Gages can indicate when there may be or isa problem with one of your vehicle’s functions.Often gages and warning lights work together to letyou know when there is a problem with yourvehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on andstays on when you are driving, or when one of thegages shows there may be a problem, checkthe section that tells you what to do aboutit. Please follow this manual’s advice. Waiting todo repairs can be costly — and even dangerous.So please get to know your warning lights andgages. They are a big help.
Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center thatworks along with the warning lights and gages.See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 205.
Instrument Panel ClusterYour instrument panel cluster and DriverInformation Center (DIC) are designed to let youknow at a glance how the vehicle is running.You will know how fast you are going, about howmuch fuel you have left and many other thingsyou will need to know to drive safely andeconomically. The instrument panel clusterindicator warning lights, gages and DIC messagesare explained on the following pages.
186
United States Manual Transmission shown, Canada, Automatic Transmission and Z06 Model similar
187
Speedometer and OdometerYour speedometer lets you see your speed ineither miles per hour (mph) or kilometers perhour (km/h). For more information see “PersonalOptions” under DIC Vehicle Personalizationon page 232.
To read the odometer with the ignition off, turn onthe parking lamps.
You may wonder what happens if your vehicleneeds a new odometer installed. The mileage totalof the new odometer will be set to the originalmiles (kilometers) of the old odometer. See yourdealer if the odometer must be replaced inyour vehicle.
TachometerThe tachometer displays the engine speed inthousands of revolutions per minute (rpm).
Notice: Fuel will shut off at about 6600 rpmfor the base model and 7100 rpm for theZ06 model. If you continue to drive your vehicleat the fuel shut off rpm, you could damageyour engine. Be sure to operate your vehiclebelow the fuel shut off rpm or reduce your rpmquickly when the fuel shuts off.
Safety Belt Reminder LightWhen the ignition is turned on, a chime will comeon for several seconds to remind people tofasten their safety belts, unless the driver’s safetybelt is already buckled.
The safety belt light willalso come on and stayon for severalseconds, then it willflash for several more.
This chime and light will be repeated if the driverremains unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion.
If the driver’s belt is already buckled, neitherthe chime nor the light will come on.
188
Airbag Readiness LightThere is an airbag readiness light on theinstrument panel, which shows a deployed airbagsymbol. The system checks the airbag’selectrical system for malfunctions. The light tellsyou if there is an electrical problem. Thesystem check includes the airbag modules, thewiring and the diagnostic module. For moreinformation on the airbag system, see AirbagSystem on page 50.
This light will come onwhen you start yourvehicle, and it will flashfor a few seconds.Then the light should goout. This means thesystem is ready.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after youstart the vehicle or comes on when you are driving,your airbag system may not work properly.Have your vehicle serviced right away.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light stays on afteryou start your vehicle, it means the airbagsystem may not be working properly. Theairbags in your vehicle may not inflate ina crash, or they could even inflate withouta crash. To help avoid injury to yourselfor others, have your vehicle serviced rightaway if the airbag readiness light stays onafter you start your vehicle.
The airbag readiness light should flash for afew seconds when you turn the vehicle on. If thelight does not come on then, have it fixed so itwill be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
189
Passenger Airbag Status IndicatorYour rearview mirror has a passenger airbagstatus indicator.
When the vehicle is started, the passenger airbagstatus indicator will light ON and OFF, or thesymbol for on and off, for several seconds as asystem check. Then, after several more seconds,the status indicator will light either ON or OFF,or either the on or off symbol, to let you know thestatus of the passenger’s frontal airbag andside impact airbag (if equipped).
Your vehicle has a label on the sun visor thatsays, “Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front.” This is because the risk to therear-facing child is so great if the airbag deploys.United States
Canada
190
Never put a child in a rear-facing child restraint inthe passenger’s seat unless the passenger airbagstatus indicator shows off and the airbag is off.Here is why:
{CAUTION:
Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag and sideimpact airbag (if equipped) if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint, nosystem is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints betransported in vehicles with a rear seatthat will accommodate a rear-facing childrestraint, whenever possible.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on thepassenger airbag status indicator, it means thatthe passenger’s frontal airbag and side impactairbag (if equipped) are enabled (may inflate).
{CAUTION:
If the on indicator comes on when you havea rear-facing child restraint installed in thepassenger’s seat, it means that thepassenger sensing system has not turnedoff the passenger’s frontal airbag and sideimpact airbag (if equipped). A child in arear-facing child restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the passenger’s airbaginflates. This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint would be veryclose to the inflating airbag. Do not use arear-facing child restraint in thepassenger’s seat if the airbag is turned on.
191
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on thepassenger airbag status indicator, it means thatthe passenger sensing system has turned offthe passenger’s airbag(s). See Passenger SensingSystem on page 59 for more on this, includingimportant safety information.
If, after several seconds, all status indicator lightsremain on, or if there are no lights at all, theremay be a problem with the lights or the passengersensing system. See your dealer for service.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag off indicator and the airbagreadiness light ever come on together, itmeans that something may be wrong withthe airbag system. If this ever happens,have the vehicle serviced promptly,because an adult-size person sitting in theright front passenger seat may not havethe protection of the airbag. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 189.
Voltmeter Gage
The voltmeter showsthe voltage output ofyour battery. When theengine is running, itshows the voltageoutput of the chargingsystem.
The reading will change as the rate of chargechanges (with engine speed, for example), but ifthe voltmeter reads at 9 volts or below, yourinstrument panel cluster and other systems mayshut down. The Driver Information Center (DIC) willread BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW when yourvehicle is at 10 volts or below. Have it checkedright away. Driving with the voltmeter readingat 10 volts or below could drain your battery anddisable your vehicle.
192
One-to-Four Shift Light(Manual Transmission)
When this light comeson, you can only shiftfrom FIRST (1) toFOURTH (4) instead ofFIRST (1) toSECOND (2).
You must complete the shift into FOURTH (4) toturn off this feature. This helps you get thebest possible fuel economy.
After shifting to FOURTH (4), you may downshiftto a lower gear if you prefer.
Notice: Forcing the shift lever into any gearexcept FOURTH (4) when the 1 TO 4 SHIFT lightcomes on may damage the transmission.Shift only from FIRST (1) to FOURTH (4) whenthe light comes on.
This light will come on when:
• The engine coolant temperature is higher than169°F (76°C),
• the vehicle is going 15 to 19 mph(24 to 31 km/h) and
• the vehicle 21 percent throttle or less.
193
Brake System Warning LightYour vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is dividedinto two parts. If one part is not working, the otherpart can still work and stop you. For goodbraking, though, you need both parts working well.
This light should come on when you start theengine. If it does not come on then, have it fixedso it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
If this warning light stays on after you start theengine, the parking brake may still be set or therecould be a brake problem. Refer to ParkingBrake on page 103 to see if it is set. If the parkingbrake is not set, have your brake systeminspected right away.
If the light comes on while you are driving and youhave a CHECK BRAKE FLUID message showingon the DIC, pull off the road and stop carefully.You may notice that the pedal is harder to push orthe pedal may go closer to the floor. It may takelonger to stop. If the light is still on, have thevehicle towed for service. See Towing YourVehicle on page 313 and DIC Warnings andMessages on page 212 for more information.
{CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be workingproperly if the brake system warning lightis on. Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to an accident.If the light is still on after you have pulledoff the road and stopped carefully, havethe vehicle towed for service.
United States Canada
194
Anti-Lock Brake SystemWarning Light
With the Anti-LockBrake System (ABS),this light will comeon when the engine isstarted and may stay onfor several seconds.
If the light stays on, turn the ignition off. If the lightcomes on when you are driving, stop as soonas possible and turn the ignition off. Then start theengine again to reset the system. If the light stillstays on, or comes on again while you are driving,your vehicle needs service. If the regular brakesystem warning light is not on, you still havebrakes, but you do not have anti-lock brakes. Ifthe regular brake system warning light is also on,you do not have anti-lock brakes and there isa problem with your regular brakes. See“SERVICE ANTILOCK BRAKES” under DICWarnings and Messages on page 212.The ABS warning light will come on briefly whenyou turn the ignition on. This is normal. If thelight does not come on then, have it fixed so it willbe ready to warn you if there is a problem.
Traction Control System (TCS)Warning Light
This light should comeon briefly as you startthe engine. If thelight does not come onthen, have it fixedso it will be ready towarn you if thereis a problem.
If it stays on, or comes on and the DriverInformation Center (DIC) shows a SERVICETRACTION SYSTEM message when youare driving, there is a problem with your TractionControl System (TCS) and your vehicle needsservice. When this light is on, the system will notlimit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.If the driver turns off the TCS by pressing thebutton on the console, the TCS light will come onand the TRACTION SYSTEM OFF messagewill show on the DIC. See DIC Warningsand Messages on page 212 for more information.
195
Active Handling System LightThe Active Handling System light will come onbriefly as you start the engine. If the light does notcome on then, have it fixed so it will be ready towarn you if there is a problem. This light willalso come on when the ACTIVE HANDLINGCALIBRATING message is displayed in the DriverInformation Center (DIC).
If the light stays on orcomes on while you aredriving, a chime soundsand a SERVICE ACTIVEHANDLING SYSTEMmessage appears on theDIC, there is a problemwith your ActiveHandling System andyour vehicle needsservice.
The driver can acknowledge this message bypressing the RESET button. When the SERVICEACTIVE HANDLING SYSTEM message isdisplayed in the DIC, the Active Handling Systemwill not assist you in controlling the vehicle.
You should have the system serviced as soon aspossible. Adjust your driving accordingly.
When the system is working, you will see theACTIVE HANDLING message displayed inthe DIC. You may also feel or hear the systemworking. This is normal.
If the driver turns off the Active Handling System bypressing the button on the console for five seconds,the Active Handling System light will come on, achime will sound, and the TRACTION SYSTEMAND ACTIVE HANDLING – OFF message will bedisplayed in the DIC. The Traction Control Systemwill also be turned off. See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 212 for more information.
If the Active Handling System and the TractionControl System are off, pressing the consolebutton momentarily will turn both systems on. TheDIC will display the TRACTION SYSTEM ANDACTIVE HANDLING – ON message, theinstrument cluster light will be off, and a chime willsound. See DIC Warnings and Messages onpage 212 for more information.
196
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
This gage shows the engine coolant temperature.If the gage pointer moves into the shaded area,your engine is too hot.
This means that your engine coolant hasoverheated. If you have been operating yourvehicle under normal driving conditions, you shouldpull off the road, stop your vehicle and turn offthe engine as soon as possible.
See Engine Overheating on page 350 for moreinformation.
Tire Pressure LightThis light will come onbriefly when you turnthe ignition on.
This light will also come on when one or more ofyour tires are significantly underinflated.A LOW TIRE PRESSURE message in the DriverInformation Center (DIC) will accompany the light,see DIC Warnings and Messages on page 212Stop and check your tires as soon as it is safe to doso. If underinflated, inflate to the proper pressure.See Tires on page 378 for more information.This light will flash for about 60 seconds and thenturn on solid if a problem is detected with theTire Pressure Monitor system.See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 389for more information.
United States Canada
197
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
Your vehicle has acomputer whichmonitors operation ofthe fuel, ignition,and emission controlsystems.
This system is called OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics-Second Generation) and is intendedto assure that emissions are at acceptablelevels for the life of the vehicle, helping to producea cleaner environment. The check engine lightcomes on to indicate that there is a problem andservice is required. Malfunctions often will beindicated by the system before any problem isapparent. This may prevent more serious damageto your vehicle. This system is also designed toassist your service technician in correctlydiagnosing any malfunction.
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle withthis light on, after awhile, your emissioncontrols may not work as well, your fueleconomy may not be as good, and your enginemay not run as smoothly. This could lead tocostly repairs that may not be covered by yourwarranty.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel systemof your vehicle or the replacement of theoriginal tires with other than those of the sameTire Performance Criteria (TPC) can affectyour vehicle’s emission controls and maycause this light to come on. Modifications tothese systems could lead to costly repairs notcovered by your warranty. This may alsoresult in a failure to pass a required EmissionInspection/Maintenance test. See Accessoriesand Modifications on page 318.
198
This light should come on briefly, as a check toshow you it is working, as you start the engine.If the light does not come on, have it repaired. Thislight will also come on during a malfunction inone of two ways:
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition hasbeen detected. A misfire increases vehicleemissions and may damage the emissioncontrol system on your vehicle. Diagnosis andservice may be required.
• Light On Steady — An emission controlsystem malfunction has been detected on yourvehicle. Diagnosis and service may berequired.
If the Light Is FlashingThe following may prevent more serious damageto your vehicle:
• Reducing vehicle speed
• Avoiding hard accelerations
• Avoiding steep uphill grades
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to doso, stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to parkyour vehicle. Turn the engine off, wait atleast 10 seconds and restart the engine. If thelight remains on steady, see “If the Light IsOn Steady” following. If the light is still flashing,follow the previous steps, and see your dealer forservice as soon as possible.
199
If the Light Is On SteadyYou also may be able to correct the emissionsystem malfunction by considering the following:
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fullyinstall the cap. See Filling the Tank on page 323.The diagnostic system can determine if thefuel cap has been left off or improperly installed.A loose or missing fuel cap will allow fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving tripswith the cap properly installed should turn thelight off.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your vehicle’s electrical system may be wet.The condition will usually be corrected whenthe electrical system dries out. A few driving tripsshould turn the light off.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel.See Gasoline Octane on page 320. Poor fuelquality will cause the engine not to run asefficiently as designed. You may notice this asstalling after start-up, stalling when you putthe vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation onacceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (Theseconditions may go away once the engine iswarmed up.) This will be detected by the systemand cause the light to turn on.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,change the fuel brand you use. It will require atleast one full tank of the proper fuel to turn thelight off.
If none of the above steps have made the lightturn off, your dealer can check the vehicle.Your dealer has the proper test equipment anddiagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electricalproblems that may have developed.
200
Emissions Inspection and MaintenanceProgramsSome state/provincial and local governments haveor may begin programs to inspect the emissioncontrol equipment on your vehicle. Failure to passthis inspection could prevent you from getting avehicle registration.
Here are some things you need to know to helpyour vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if thecheck engine light is on or not working properly.
To perform a check engine light bulb check with thekeyless ignition, make sure the transmitter fob is inthe passenger compartment. See Ignition Positionson page 90. Press the bottom of the Acc. button onthe instrument panel and hold the button down forfive seconds. The instrument panel, including thecheck engine light, will light up and the ignition willbe on, but the engine will not start — if you pressthe bottom of the Acc. button only briefly, less thanfive seconds, the accessory power mode will beturned on, but not the ignition. After the bulb check,be sure to press and release the Acc. button againto turn the ignition off and avoid draining thevehicle’s battery.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if theOBD (on-board diagnostic) system determines thatcritical emission control systems have not beencompletely diagnosed by the system. The vehiclewould be considered not ready for inspection. Thiscan happen if you have recently replaced thebattery or if the battery has run down. Thediagnostic system is designed to evaluate criticalemission control systems during normal driving.This may take several days of routine driving. If youhave done this and your vehicle still does not passthe inspection for lack of OBD system readiness,your dealer can prepare the vehicle for inspection.
201
Engine Oil Pressure Gage The engine oil pressure gage shows the engine oilpressure in psi (pounds per square inch) orkPa (kilopascals) when the engine is running.
Oil pressure should be 20 to 80 psi (140 to550 kPa). In certain situations such as long,extended idles on hot days, it could read as lowas 6 psi (40 kPa) and still be considered normal.It may vary with engine speed, outsidetemperature and oil viscosity, but readings abovethe shaded area show the normal operatingrange. Readings in the shaded area tell you thatthe engine is low on oil, or that you mighthave some other oil problem. See Engine Oil onpage 332.
The engine oil pressure can also be displayed usingthe GAGES button on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See Driver Information Center (DIC)on page 205.
United States Canada
United States — Z06Model
Canada — Z06 Model
202
{CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure islow. If you do, your engine can become sohot that it catches fire. You or otherscould be burned. Check your oil as soonas possible and have your vehicleserviced.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenancemay damage the engine. The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Always followthe maintenance schedule in this manual forchanging engine oil.
Security Light
For informationregarding this light, seeTheft-DeterrentSystems on page 88.
Fog Lamp Light
The fog lamp light willcome on when the foglamps are in use.
The light will go out when the fog lamps areturned off. See Fog Lamps on page 169 for moreinformation.
203
Lights On Reminder
This light comes onwhenever the parkinglamps are on.
See Headlamps on Reminder on page 167 formore information.
Highbeam On Light
This light comes onwhenever thehigh-beam headlampsare on.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer onpage 160 for more information.
Fuel Gage
Your fuel gage tells youabout how much fuelyou have left whenthe engine is on.
When the needle approaches the low fuel symbol,a chime will sound and LOW FUEL will appearon the Driver Information Center (DIC) display.At this time, you still have a little fuel left, but youshould get more soon.
Press the RESET button to acknowledge a DICmessage(s). Pressing the RESET button willalso turn off a DIC message but the LOW FUELmessage will come on again in 10 minutes ifyou have not added fuel to the vehicle.
204
Here are five things that some owners ask about.All these things are normal and do not indicatethat anything is wrong with the fuel gage.
• At the gas station, the gas pump shuts offbefore the gage reads the full symbol.
• It takes more (or less) fuel to fill up than thegage reads. For example, the gage readshalf full, but it took more (or less) than half ofthe tank’s capacity to fit it.
• The gage pointer may move while cornering,braking or speeding up.
• The gage may not indicate the tank is emptywhen the ignition is turned off.
• The gage reading may change slightly withinthe first several minutes after starting thevehicle.
See DIC Controls and Displays on page 206 formore information.
Driver Information Center (DIC)The Driver Information Center (DIC) gives youthe status of many of your vehicle’s systems. It isalso used to display driver personalizationfeatures and warning/status messages. The DICdisplay is located on the instrument panelcluster below the speedometer and tachometer,directly above the steering column. The DICbuttons are located on the instrument panel, to theright of the instrument panel cluster.
The DIC comes on when the ignition is turned on.After displaying CORVETTE BY CHEVROLET,the DIC will display the current driver andthe information that was last displayed before theengine was turned off.
205
If a problem is detected, a warning message willappear on the DIC display. Be sure to takeany message that appears on the display seriouslyand remember that clearing the message willonly make the message disappear, not correct theproblem.
If your vehicle has the Head-Up Display (HUD)and you use the Manual Paddle Shift feature, thegear will display in the HUD, except if yourvehicle has the Navigation system and the HUD isdisplaying turn-by-turn guidance information. Ifthe HUD is displaying turn-by-turn guidanceinformation, the gear instead displays in the DIC.See “Manual Paddle Shift” under AutomaticTransmission Operation on page 95 and “Head-UpDisplay (HUD)” in the index of the Navigationsystem manual for more information.
DIC Controls and DisplaysThe Driver Information Center (DIC) has differentmodes which can be accessed by pressingthe following buttons located on the instrumentpanel, to the right of the instrument panel cluster.
.4 (Fuel): Press this button to display fuelinformation such as fuel economy and range.
206
2 (Gages): Press this button to display gageinformation like oil pressure and temperature,coolant temperature, automatic transmission fluidtemperature, if equipped, battery voltage, andfront/rear tire pressures.
TRIP: Press this button to display your total andtrip distance driven, the elapsed time function,your average speed, and the engine oil life.
OPTION: Press this button to choose personaloptions that are available on your vehicle,depending on the options your vehicle is equippedwith, such as door locks, easy entry seats, andlanguage.
RESET: Press this button, used along with theother buttons, to reset system functions, selectpersonal options, and turn off or acknowledgemessages on the DIC.
FUEL ButtonThe fuel button displays average fuel economyand instantaneous fuel economy, calculatedfor your specific driving conditions, and rangeinformation.
Average Fuel Economy: The average fueleconomy is viewed as a long-term approximationof your overall driving conditions. You shouldreset the average fuel economy display every timeyou refuel. If you press the RESET button inthis mode while you are driving, the system willreset this display and begin figuring fuel economyfrom that point in time.
Press the fuel button to display average fueleconomy, such as:
• AVERAGE FUEL ECONOMY 20.1 MPG or
• AVERAGE FUEL ECONOMY 11.7 L/100 km
Instantaneous Fuel Economy: Instantaneousfuel economy reflects only the fuel economythat the vehicle has right now and will changefrequently as driving conditions change. Unlikeaverage fuel economy, this menu item cannot bereset.
Press the fuel button again to displayinstantaneous fuel economy, such as:
• INSTANT FUEL ECONOMY 20.1 MPG or
• INSTANT FUEL ECONOMY 11.7 L/100 km
207
Fuel Range: The range calculates the remainingdistance you can drive without refueling. It isbased on fuel economy and the fuel remaining inthe tank.
Press the fuel button again to display the range,such as:
• RANGE 30 MI or
• RANGE 48 km
If the LOW FUEL warning is displayed or ifRANGE is less than 40 miles (64 km), the displaywill read RANGE LOW.
The fuel economy data used to determine fuelrange is an average of recent driving conditions.As your driving conditions change, this data isgradually updated automatically.
If the vehicle has been idling for a long time, therange displayed on the DIC could be abnormallylow. The vehicle must be driven 5–10 miles(8–16 km) to get an accurate reading.
GAGES ButtonThe gages button displays oil pressure, oiltemperature, coolant temperature, transmissionfluid temperature for automatic transmissionvehicles only, battery voltage, and tire pressureinformation.
Oil Pressure: This display shows the oil pressure.
Press the gages button to display the oilpressure, such as:
• OIL PRESSURE 40 PSI or
• OIL PRESSURE 276 kPa
Oil Temperature: This display shows the oiltemperature.
Press the gages button again to display the oiltemperature, such as:
• OIL TEMPERATURE 234°F or
• OIL TEMPERATURE 112°C
If the oil temperature is low, the display willshow OIL TEMPERATURE LOW. If the oiltemperature is high, the display will show OILTEMPERATURE HIGH.
208
Coolant Temperature: This display shows theengine coolant temperature.
Press the gages button again to display thecoolant temperature, such as:
• COOLANT TEMPERATURE 123°F or
• COOLANT TEMPERATURE 51°C
If the coolant temperature is low, the display willshow COOLANT TEMPERATURE LOW. Ifthe coolant temperature is high, the display willshow COOLANT TEMPERATURE HIGH.
Transmission Fluid Temperature: If you havean automatic transmission vehicle, this displayshows the automatic transmission fluidtemperature.
Press the gages button again to display theautomatic transmission fluid temperature, such as:
• TRANS FLUID TEMP 123°F or
• TRANS FLUID TEMP 51°C
If the transmission fluid temperature is low, thedisplay will show TRANS FLUID TEMP LOW. If thetransmission fluid temperature is high, thedisplay will show TRANS FLUID TEMP HIGH.
Battery Voltage: This display shows the currentbattery voltage.
Press the gages button again to display thebattery voltage, such as:
• BATTERY VOLTAGE 13.5 VOLTS
Tire Pressure: This display shows the tirepressure for each tire.
Press the gages button again to display the tirepressure for the front tires, such as:
• FRONT TIRE PRESSURES L 34 PSI R 33 PSIor
• FRONT TIRE PRESSURES L 234 kPaR 228 kPa
Press the gages button again to display the tirepressure for the rear tires, such as:
• REAR TIRE PRESSURES L 34 PSI R 33 PSIor
• REAR TIRE PRESSURES L 234 kPaR 228 kPa
209
TRIP ButtonThe TRIP button displays the odometer, tripdistance, elapsed time, average speed, and oil liferemaining information.
Odometer: The odometer shows how far yourvehicle has been driven in either miles orkilometers. Press the TRIP button to displayodometer readings, such as:
• ODOMETER 12345 MI or
• ODOMETER 20008 km
You can also display the odometer by turning onthe parking lamps.
Trip Odometers: There are two trip odometers.Press the TRIP button to display TRIPODOMETER A readings and press the buttonagain to display TRIP ODOMETER B readings,such as:
• TRIP ODOMETER A 130.5 MI or
• TRIP ODOMETER A 209.9 km
• TRIP ODOMETER B 300.5 MI or
• TRIP ODOMETER B 483.5 km
Both of the trip odometers can be usedsimultaneously. TRIP A could be used to track thedistance to a destination. TRIP B could be usedto track maintenance periods. The trip odometerscan be reset by pressing the RESET button onthe DIC.
There is also a miles since last ignition featurethat displays the number of miles (kilometers)driven since you last started the vehicle. Press andhold the RESET button for three seconds, thenrelease it. The miles (kilometers) since thelast ignition cycle will be set into the trip odometer.
Elapsed Timer: Press the TRIP button untilELAPSED TIMER is displayed, such asELAPSED TIMER .00.
When the ignition is in on, the DIC can be used asa stopwatch. The display can show hours,minutes and seconds. The elapsed time indicatorwill record up to 23 hours, 59 minutes and59 seconds, then it will reset to zero and continuecounting. The display appears asELAPSED TIMER .00 in the elapsed time function.
210
You can start or stop the elapsed time by pressingthe RESET button. To reset the elapsed time tozero, press the RESET button for three secondswhile the timer is displayed.
Pressing and holding the RESET button for atleast 10 seconds will reset the timer display to thetime since last ignition cycle.
Average Speed: Press the TRIP button until theaverage speed is displayed, such as:
• AVERAGE SPEED 62 MPH or
• AVERAGE SPEED 100 km/h
Press and hold the RESET button to reset to0.0 mph (km/h).
Engine Oil Life: Press the TRIP button until theengine oil life is displayed, such as OIL LIFEREMAINING 89%.
This is an estimate of the engine oil’s remaininguseful life. It will show 100% when the systemis reset after an oil change. It will alert youto change your oil on a schedule consistent withyour driving conditions.
When the remaining oil life is low, the system willalert you with the message CHANGE ENGINE OIL.
Remember, you must reset the engine oil lifesystem yourself after each oil change. It will notreset itself. To reset the system, see EngineOil Life System on page 340. Be careful not toreset the engine oil life system accidentally at anytime other than when the oil has just beenchanged. It cannot be reset accurately until thenext oil change.
See Scheduled Maintenance on page 433 andEngine Oil on page 332 for more information.
OPTION ButtonThe OPTION button allows you to access thePERSONAL OPTIONS menu and customize thepersonalization settings on your vehicle. SeeDIC Vehicle Personalization on page 232 for moreinformation.
RESET ButtonThe RESET button, used along with other buttons,will reset system functions and turn off oracknowledge messages on the DIC.
211
DIC Warnings and MessagesMessages are displayed on the DIC to notify thedriver that the status of the vehicle has changedand that some action may be needed by the driverto correct the condition. Multiple messages mayappear one after another. You can scroll throughthe messages that may have been sent at thesame time. The DIC is continuously updated withthe vehicle performance status.
Some messages may not require immediateaction, but you can press the RESET button toacknowledge that you received the messages andto clear them from the display.
Some messages cannot be cleared from the DICdisplay because they are more urgent. Thesemessages require action before they can becleared. You should take any messages thatappear on the display seriously and remember thatclearing the messages will only make themessages disappear, not correct the problem.
The following are the possible messages that canbe displayed and some information about them.
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) ACTIVEThis message displays when the Anti-lockBrake System (ABS) is adjusting brake pressureto help avoid a braking skid.
Slippery road conditions may exist if this messageis displayed, so adjust your driving accordingly.The message stays on for a few seconds after thesystem stops adjusting brake pressure. SeeAnti-Lock Brake System (ABS) on page 277 formore information.
ACTIVE HANDLINGThis message displays when the Active HandlingSystem is operating. The Active HandlingSystem is a computer controlled system thatassists the driver in controlling the vehiclein difficult driving conditions. You may feel or hearthe system working and see the ACTIVEHANDLING message displayed in the DIC. Thismessage stays on for a few seconds following theactive handling event. This is normal when thesystem is operating. See Active Handling Systemon page 281 and Braking on page 276.
212
ACTIVE HANDLING CALIBRATINGThis message displays and the active handlingsystem light on the instrument panel cluster turnson while the system is calibrating after exceeding19 mph (30 km/h) for 10 seconds. See ActiveHandling System Light on page 196. The ActiveHandling System is not functional yet. TheActive Handling System performance is affecteduntil the next message ACTIVE HANDLINGREADY is displayed. The Active Handling Systemis off until the ACTIVE HANDLING READYmessage is displayed. See Active HandlingSystem on page 281 for more information.
ACTIVE HANDLING READYThis message displays when the functional checkof the Active Handling System has beencompleted. See Active Handling System onpage 281 for more information.
ACTIVE HANDLING WARMING UPThis message may display when you first startyour vehicle during cold winter weather, and beginto drive away, up to 6 mph (10 km/h). This isnormal. The Active Handling System performanceis affected until the next message ACTIVEHANDLING READY is displayed in the DIC. SeeActive Handling System on page 281 for moreinformation.
To acknowledge the message, press the RESETbutton.
ATTACH TRUNK PARTITIONIf your vehicle has a power convertible top, thismessage displays and a chime sounds if the trunkpartition is not in place. Open the hatch/trunkand make sure the trunk partition is secure and noobjects are on the trunk partition. See RearStorage Area on page 130 for more information.
213
BATTERY SAVER ACTIVEThis message displays when the vehicle hasdetected that the battery voltage is droppingbeyond a reasonable point. The battery saversystem starts reducing certain features ofthe vehicle that you may be able to notice. At thepoint that features are disabled, this messageis displayed. It means that the vehicle is trying tosave the charge in the battery. Turn offunnecessary accessories to allow the battery torecharge.
BUCKLE PASSENGERThis message reminds you to buckle thepassenger’s safety belt.
This message displays and a chime sounds whenthe ignition is on, the driver’s safety belt isbuckled, the passenger’s safety belt is unbuckledwith the passenger airbag enabled, and thevehicle is in motion. You should have thepassenger buckle their safety belt.
The reminder will be repeated if the ignition is on,the vehicle is in motion, the driver is buckledand the passenger is still unbuckled, andthe passenger airbag is enabled. If thepassenger’s safety belt is already buckled, thismessage and chime will not come on.
BUCKLE SEATBELTThis message reminds you to buckle the driver’ssafety belt.
This message displays and a chime sounds whenthe ignition is on, the driver’s safety belt isunbuckled, and the vehicle is in motion. Youshould buckle your safety belt.
If the driver remains unbuckled when the ignitionis on and the vehicle is in motion, the reminderwill be repeated. If the driver’s safety belt isalready buckled, this message and chime will notcome on.
This message is an additional reminder to thesafety belt reminder light in the instrument panelcluster. See Safety Belt Reminder Light onpage 188 for more information.
214
CHANGE ENGINE OILThis message displays when the life of the engineoil has expired. See Scheduled Maintenance onpage 433. After an oil change, the engine oillife system must be reset. See “Engine Oil Life”under DIC Controls and Displays on page 206.Also, see Engine Oil on page 332 and Engine OilLife System on page 340 for more information.
CHECK BRAKE FLUIDThis message displays, a chime sounds, and thebrake system warning light on the instrumentpanel cluster turns on if the ignition is on to informthe driver that the brake fluid level is low. SeeBrake System Warning Light on page 194. Havethe brake system serviced by your dealer assoon as possible. See Brakes on page 360.
CHECK COOLANT LEVELThis message displays when the engine coolantlevel is low. Have the cooling system servicedby your dealer as soon as possible. See EngineCoolant on page 347.
CHECK GAS CAPThis message displays if the fuel cap has notbeen fully tightened. Check the fuel cap to makesure that it is on properly. Once tightened, it takesat least one overnight park to reset or clear thismessage. If both the CHECK GAS CAP messageand the malfunction indicator lamp in theinstrument panel cluster are on, you may need tosee your dealer for service. See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 198 for more information.
CHECK OIL LEVELThis message displays and two chimes sound ifthe oil level in the vehicle is low. Once the vehiclesenses a change in the engine oil level, thelight remains off.
If this message appears after starting the engine,the engine oil level may be too low. You mayneed to add oil. See Engine Overheating onpage 350.
To acknowledge the message, press the RESETbutton. The message reappears every 10 minutesuntil this condition changes.
215
CLOSE TRUNK TO MOVE TOPThis message displays and a chime sounds if thetrunk is open while you are trying to operatethe convertible top. Make sure the trunk is closedbefore operating the convertible top. SeeConvertible Top (Manual) on page 138 orConvertible Top (Power) on page 145.
COMPETITIVE DRIVING MODEThis message displays and a short chime soundswhen the Competitive Driving mode is selected.The instrument panel cluster light will not beon when the Competitive Driving mode is selected.The Traction Control System (TCS) will not beoperating while in the Competitive Driving mode.Adjust your driving accordingly. See Racing orOther Competitive Driving on page 290 for moreinformation.
COOLANT OVER TEMPERATUREThis message displays and a chime sounds if theengine coolant exceeds 255°F (124°C). If you havebeen operating your vehicle under normal drivingconditions, pull off the road, stop your vehicle, andturn off the engine as soon as possible.
You can monitor the coolant temperature with thegages button on the DIC or the engine coolanttemperature gage on the instrument panel cluster.See Engine Overheating on page 350, DICControls and Displays on page 206, and EngineCoolant Temperature Gage on page 197.
To acknowledge the message, press the RESETbutton. The message reappears and a chimesounds every minute until this condition changes.If you do not press the RESET button, themessage remains on until the condition changes.
CRUISE DISENGAGEDThis message displays briefly when you disengagethe cruise control system by stepping on thebrake on an automatic transmission vehicle or theclutch on a manual transmission vehicle, or byturning off the cruise control switch. See CruiseControl on page 162 for more information.
216
ENGINE DRAG CONTROL ACTIVEThis message displays when engine drag controlis active. When driving in a lower gear in rainy,snowy, or icy conditions and then letting up on theaccelerator or downshifting, the rear wheelsmay begin to slip and this message displays. Thismessage stays on for a few seconds followingthe engine drag control event.
ENGINE OVERHEATED – STOPENGINEThis message displays and a continuous chimesounds when the engine has overheated. Stop andturn the engine off immediately to avoid severeengine damage. See Engine Overheating onpage 350.
ENGINE PROTECTION REDUCEENGINE RPMThis message displays if the engine oiltemperature exceeds 320°F (160°C). Check theengine coolant temperature and engine oil level.If the engine is too hot, see Engine Overheating onpage 350. Your vehicle may need service, sosee your dealer.
You can monitor the oil temperature with thegages button on the DIC. See DIC Controls andDisplays on page 206.
Multiple chimes sound when this message isdisplayed. This message remains displayed andactive until the issue is resolved.
HEADLAMPS SUGGESTEDThis message displays if it is dark enough outsideand the headlamps and the Twilight Sentinel®
controls are off. This message informs the driverthat turning on the exterior lamps is recommended.It has become dark enough outside to requirethe headlamps and/or other exterior lamps.
HIGH TIRE PRESSUREThis message displays when one or more of thetires is over-inflated. This message also displaysLEFT FRONT, RIGHT FRONT, LEFT REAR,or RIGHT REAR to indicate which tire is affected.You can receive more than one tire pressuremessage at a time. To read other messages thatmay have been sent at the same time, pressthe RESET button. If a tire pressure messageappears on the DIC, stop as soon as you can.
217
Have the tire pressures checked and set to thoseshown on the Tire Loading Information label.See Extended Mobility Tires on page 384, LoadingYour Vehicle on page 307, Inflation - TirePressure on page 386, and Tire Pressure MonitorSystem on page 389.
To acknowledge the message, press the RESETbutton. A message reappears every 10 minutesuntil the condition is corrected.
The DIC display also shows the tire pressurevalues for the front and rear tires by pressing thegages button. See DIC Controls and Displayson page 206.
HOT ENGINE AIR CONDITIONING OFFThis message displays when the engine coolantbecomes hotter than the normal operatingtemperature. To avoid added strain on a hot engine,the air conditioning compressor is automaticallyturned off. When the coolant temperature returns tonormal, the A/C operation automatically resumes.You can continue to drive your vehicle. If thismessage continues to appear, have the systemrepaired by your dealer as soon as possible toavoid compressor damage.
ICE POSSIBLEThis message displays when the outside airtemperature is cold enough to create icy roadconditions. Adjust your driving accordingly.
LOW FUELThis message displays when the fuel tank is lessthan 10 percent full and the display is turnedoff. A multiple chime also sounds when thismessage is displayed. Refill the fuel tank as soonas possible. See Fuel Gage on page 204.
LOW OIL PRESSUREThis message displays if low oil pressure levelsoccur. If this message appears while the engine isrunning, stop the engine and do not operate ituntil the cause of low oil pressure is corrected.Severe damage to the engine can result.A multiple chime sounds when this message isdisplayed. See Engine Oil on page 332.
218
LOW TIRE PRESSURE
{CAUTION:
When the LOW TIRE PRESSURE or TIREFLAT message is displayed on the DriverInformation Center, your vehicle’shandling capabilities will be reducedduring severe maneuvers. The activehandling system will be affected. SeeActive Handling System on page 281. Ifyou drive too fast, you could lose controlof your vehicle. You or others could beinjured. Do not drive over 55 mph(90 km/h) when the LOW TIRE PRESSUREor TIRE FLAT message is displayed. Drivecautiously and check your tire pressuresas soon as you can.
This message displays when one or more of thetires is under-inflated. This message also displaysLEFT FRONT, RIGHT FRONT, LEFT REAR, orRIGHT REAR to indicate which tire is affected.Multiple chimes sound and the tire pressure lighton the instrument panel cluster turns on whenthis message is displayed. See Tire Pressure Lighton page 197. You can receive more than onetire pressure message at a time. To read othermessages that may have been sent at thesame time, press the RESET button. If a tirepressure message appears on the DIC, stop assoon as you can. Have the tire pressures checkedand set to those shown on the Tire LoadingInformation label. See Extended Mobility Tires onpage 384, Loading Your Vehicle on page 307,Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 386, andTire Pressure Monitor System on page 389.
To acknowledge the message, press the RESETbutton. A message reappears every 10 minutesuntil the condition is corrected.
The DIC display also shows the tire pressurevalues for the front and rear tires by pressing thegages button. See DIC Controls and Displayson page 206.
219
MAXIMUM SPEED 80 MPH (129 km/h)This message displays when a malfunction ispresent in the Selective Ride Control system. Thevehicle speed will be limited to a value determinedby the vehicle when the shock absorber systemhas failed and the shocks are in their full softmode. Have your vehicle serviced by your dealeras soon as possible.
To acknowledge the message, press the RESETbutton. The message reappears every 10 minutesuntil this condition changes.
NO FOBS DETECTEDThis message displays if the vehicle does notdetect the presence of a keyless accesstransmitter when you have attempted to start thevehicle or a vehicle door has just closed. Thefollowing conditions may cause this message toappear:
• Driver-added equipment plugged into theaccessory power outlet on the center consoleis causing interference. Examples of thesedevices are cell phones and cell phonechargers, two-way radios, power inverters, orsimilar items. Try moving the keylessaccess transmitter away from these deviceswhen starting the vehicle. In addition,PDA devices and remote garage and gateopeners may also generate ElectromagneticInterference (EMI) that may interfere withthe keyless access transmitter. Do not carrythe keyless access transmitter in the samepocket or bag as these devices.
• The vehicle is experiencing ElectromagneticInterference (EMI). Some locations, such asairports, automatic toll booths, and somegas stations have EMI fields which mayinterfere with the keyless access transmitter.
220
If moving the transmitter to different locationswithin the vehicle does not help, place thetransmitter in the glove box transmitter pocketwith the buttons facing to the right and thenpress the START button.
• The vehicle’s battery voltage is low. Thebattery voltage must be above 10 volts for thekeyless access transmitter to be detectedproperly.
NO FOB - OFF OR RUN?This message displays when the keyless accesstransmitter is not detected inside the vehicle whileyou are trying to turn the ignition off. Your vehiclemay be near a strong radio antenna signal causingthe keyless access system to be jammed. Thevehicle will remain in Acc. until OFF or START hasbeen pressed or five minutes has expired. If youturn the ignition off and you cannot find the keylessaccess transmitter, you will not be able to restartthe vehicle. The keyless access transmitter needsto be inside of the vehicle in order for the vehicle tostart. See Starting the Engine on page 91 for moreinformation.
OPTIONS UNAVAILABLEThis message displays for a few seconds if akeyless access transmitter that is not labelled 1 or 2is used and you try to personalize the features onyour vehicle by pressing the OPTION button. Thepersonalization system will not recognize thetransmitter and the DIC will not display the currentdriver number or the menus used to setpersonalizations. The personalization features willthen be set to the default states. See DIC VehiclePersonalization on page 232 for more information.
221
PRESS BRAKE TO START ENGINE(Automatic Transmission Only)This message displays if you try to start theengine by pressing the keyless ignition start buttonwithout having the brake pressed. The brakeneeds to be pressed when starting the engine. SeeIgnition Positions on page 90 for more information.
REDUCED ENGINE POWERIf this message displays and the check enginelight comes on, a noticeable reduction in thevehicle’s performance may occur. If the REDUCEDENGINE POWER message is displayed, butthere is no reduction in performance, proceed toyour destination. The performance may be reducedthe next time the vehicle is driven.
The vehicle may be driven at a reduced speedwhile the REDUCED ENGINE POWER messageis displayed, but acceleration and speed maybe reduced. Anytime the check engine light stayson, the vehicle should be taken to your dealeras soon as possible for diagnosis and repair. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp on page 198 formore information.
Multiple chimes sound when this message isdisplayed.
To acknowledge the message, press theRESET button. The message reappears everyfive minutes until this condition changes.
If the REDUCED ENGINE POWER message isdisplayed in combination with the COOLANTOVER TEMPERATURE message, see EngineOverheating on page 350.
SERVICE ACTIVE HANDLING SYSTEMThis message displays if there is a problemwith the Active Handling System and your vehicleneeds service. The active handling systemlight on the instrument panel cluster also turns onand a chime sounds. See your dealer. Whenthis message is displayed, the system is notworking. Adjust your driving accordingly. SeeActive Handling System on page 281 for moreinformation.
222
SERVICE AIR CONDITIONINGThis message displays when the electronic sensorsthat control the air conditioning and heatingsystems are no longer working. Have the climatecontrol system serviced by your dealer if you noticea drop in heating and air conditioning efficiency.
SERVICE ANTILOCK BRAKESIf this message displays while you are driving,stop as soon as possible and turn the ignition off.Then start the engine again to reset the system.If the message stays on, or comes back on againwhile you are driving, your vehicle is in need ofservice. See your dealer. If the anti-lock brakesystem (ABS) warning light is on and the regularbrake system warning light is not on, you stillhave brakes, but do not have ABS. If the regularbrake system warning light is also on, you donot have ABS and there is a problem withthe brakes. See Anti-Lock Brake System WarningLight on page 195 and Brake System WarningLight on page 194.
If this message is displayed, the Traction ControlSystem (TCS) and the Active Handling Systemwill also be disabled. The DIC will scroll threemessages: SERVICE ANTILOCK BRAKES,
SERVICE TRACTION SYSTEM, and SERVICEACTIVE HANDLING, and the instrument panelcluster lights will come on along with a chime.When the service message is displayed, thecomputer controlled systems will not assist thedriver. Have the system repaired by your dealer assoon as possible. Adjust your driving accordingly.To acknowledge these messages, press theRESET button.
SERVICE CHARGING SYSTEMIf this message displays while you are driving,there may be a problem with the electrical chargingsystem. It could mean that there is a loose orbroken drive belt or that there is another electricalproblem. Have your vehicle checked right awayby your dealer. Driving while this message ison could drain the battery.
If you must drive a short distance with themessage on, be certain to turn off the vehicle’saccessories, such as the radio and air conditioner.
Multiple chimes sound when this message isdisplayed.
To acknowledge the message, press the RESETbutton. The message reappears every 10 minutesuntil this condition changes.
223
SERVICE ELECTRICAL SYSTEMThis message displays if an electrical problemhas occurred within the Powertrain ControlModule (PCM). Have your vehicle serviced byyour dealer.
SERVICE FUEL SYSTEMThis message displays if the Powertrain ControlModule (PCM) has detected a problem withinthe fuel system. Have your vehicle servicedby your dealer. This message also displays whenthe cluster is not getting fuel information fromthe PCM.
SERVICE RIDE CONTROLThis message displays when the Selective RideControl system has detected a malfunction and thesystem must be serviced. See your dealer. If afault is present in the Selective Ride Controlsystem which causes the shocks to be in their fullsoft condition, the messages SERVICE RIDECONTROL, SHOCKS INOPERATIVE, andMAXIMUM SPEED 80 MPH (129 km/h) will displaytogether. See Selective Ride Control on page 284for more information.
SERVICE TIRE MONITORThis message displays if a part on the TirePressure Monitor (TPM) system is not workingproperly. If you drive your vehicle while any of thefour sensors are missing or inoperable, thewarning comes on in about 30 minutes. A sensorwould be missing, for example, if you putdifferent wheels on your vehicle withouttransferring the sensors. If the warning comes onand stays on, there may be a problem with theTPM. See your dealer.
SERVICE TRACTION SYSTEMIf this message displays when you are driving,there is a problem with the Traction ControlSystem (TCS) and your vehicle is in need ofservice. See your dealer. When this message isdisplayed, the system will not limit wheel spin.Adjust your driving accordingly.
The traction control system (TCS) warning light onthe instrument panel cluster will also turn onand a chime will sound.
224
When this message is displayed, the computercontrolled systems will not assist the driverin controlling the vehicle. Have the system repairedby your dealer as soon as possible. Adjust yourdriving accordingly. See Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 279 for more information.
To acknowledge the message, press theRESET button.
SERVICE TRANSMISSIONThis message displays when there is a problemwith the transmission. See your dealer for service.
SERVICE VEHICLE SOONThis message displays and a chime sounds whenthere may be an electrical or another systemproblem with your vehicle. Have your vehiclechecked by your dealer if this message keepsappearing.
SET PARK BRAKE FOR SEAT RECALLIf your vehicle has a manual transmission, thismessage displays if you try to recall the memorypositions when the ignition is on and theparking brake is not set. If the vehicle is on, youmust set the parking brake in order for the memorypositions to recall. See Memory Seat, Mirrorsand Steering Wheel on page 10 for moreinformation.
SET PARK BRAKE TO MOVE TOPIf your vehicle has a manual transmission, thismessage displays and a chime sounds if you try tooperate the power convertible top without firstsetting the parking brake. Set the parking brakebefore trying to operate the power convertible top.See Convertible Top (Manual) on page 138 orConvertible Top (Power) on page 145 formore information.
225
SHIFT TO PARKIf your vehicle has an automatic transmission, thismessage displays if the vehicle is not inPARK (P) when the engine is being turned off.The vehicle will be in Acc. Once the shift lever ismoved to PARK (P), the vehicle will turn off.
The vehicle will remain in Acc., without the20 minute time-out period, until the shift lever ismoved to PARK (P) or until the driver presses thepushbutton to restart the vehicle. See IgnitionPositions on page 90 for more information.
SHIFT TO PARK OR SET PARK BRAKEFOR TOPIf your vehicle has an automatic transmission, thismessage displays and a chime sounds if youtry to operate the power convertible top withoutfirst shifting into PARK (P) or setting the parkingbrake. Either shift the vehicle into PARK (P) or setthe parking brake before trying to operate thepower convertible top. See Convertible Top(Manual) on page 138 or Convertible Top (Power)on page 145 for more information.
SHOCKS INOPERATIVEThis message displays when a malfunction ispresent in the Selective Ride Control system whichis causing the shocks to be in their full softmode. This is a warning to the driver that thevehicle handling may be affected. Have yourvehicle serviced by your dealer as soon aspossible.
To acknowledge the message, press the RESETbutton. The message reappears every 10 minutesuntil this condition changes.
226
TIRE FLAT
{CAUTION:
When the LOW TIRE PRESSURE or TIREFLAT message is displayed on the DriverInformation Center, your vehicle’s handlingcapabilities will be reduced during severemaneuvers. If you drive too fast, you couldlose control of your vehicle. You or otherscould be injured. Do not drive over 55 mph(90 km/h) when the LOW TIRE PRESSUREor TIRE FLAT message is displayed. Drivecautiously and check your tire pressuresas soon as you can.
This message displays when one or more of thetires is flat. This message also displays LEFTFRONT, RIGHT FRONT, LEFT REAR, or RIGHTREAR to indicate which tire is affected. Multiplechimes sound and the tire pressure light onthe instrument panel cluster comes on when thismessage is displayed. See Tire Pressure Lighton page 197.
This message is followed by the MAXIMUMSPEED 55 MPH (90 km/h) message, and then bythe REDUCED HANDLING message. TheActive Handling System will intervene more quicklywhen a flat tire has been detected. Adjust yourdriving accordingly.
You can receive more than one tire pressuremessage at a time. To read other messages thatmay have been sent at the same time, pressthe RESET button. If a tire pressure messageappears on the DIC, stop as soon as youcan. Have the tire pressures checked and set tothose shown on the Tire Loading Information label.See Extended Mobility Tires on page 384,Loading Your Vehicle on page 307, Inflation - TirePressure on page 386, and Tire PressureMonitor System on page 389.
To acknowledge the message, press the RESETbutton. A message reappears every 10 minutesuntil the condition is corrected.
227
TOO COLD TO MOVE TOPThis message displays and a chime sounds whenthe power convertible top button is pressed andthe power convertible top pump motor temperatureis below -4°F (-20°C). Wait for the powerconvertible top pump motor to warm up beforeusing the power convertible top.
TOP MOTOR OVER TEMPERATUREThis message displays and a chime sounds whenthe power convertible top button is pressed andthe power convertible top pump motor temperatureis over 221°F (105°C). Wait for the powerconvertible top pump motor to cool down beforeusing the power convertible top.
TOP NOT SECUREThis message displays and a chime sounds whenthe power convertible top button is releasedbefore the top open or close operation is completeor if the top is closed without the header latchengaged. Press and hold the convertible top buttonto fully open or close the top, and make surethat the header latch is engaged after the top isclosed.
TRACTION SYSTEM ACTIVEThis message displays when the Traction ControlSystem (TCS) is limiting wheel spin. Slipperyroad conditions may exist if this messageis displayed, so adjust your driving accordingly.The message stays on for a few seconds after theTCS stops limiting wheel spin. See TractionControl System (TCS) on page 279 for moreinformation.
TRACTION SYSTEM AND ACTIVEHANDLING – OFFThis message displays, the instrument panel clusterlight turns on, and a chime sounds when theTraction Control System (TCS) and Active HandlingSystem are turned off by pressing the ActiveHandling System button on the console forfive seconds. The Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)remains on with the TCS and Active HandlingSystem off. Adjust your driving accordingly. SeeTraction Control System (TCS) on page 279 andActive Handling System on page 281 for moreinformation.
To acknowledge this message, press the RESETbutton.
228
TRACTION SYSTEM AND ACTIVEHANDLING – ONIf the Traction Control System (TCS) and ActiveHandling System are off, this message displaysbriefly, the instrument panel cluster light turns off,and a chime sounds when the TCS and ActiveHandling System are turned on by briefly pressingthe Active Handling System button on theconsole. See Traction Control System (TCS) onpage 279 and Active Handling System onpage 281 for more information.
TRACTION SYSTEM – OFFThis message displays and stays on, a single, quicktone sounds, and the traction control system (TCS)warning light on the instrument panel cluster turnson when the TCS is turned off by pressing theActive Handling System button on the console. SeeTraction Control System (TCS) Warning Light onpage 195. See Traction Control System (TCS) onpage 279 for more information.
To acknowledge the message, press the RESETbutton.
TRACTION SYSTEM – ONThis message displays and a single, quick tonesounds when the Traction Control System (TCS) isturned on by pressing the Active HandlingSystem button on the console. This messageautomatically clears from the DIC display on itsown. See Traction Control System (TCS) onpage 279 for more information.
TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE ENGINEThis message displays and four chimes sound if thetransmission fluid temperature rises above 270°F(132°C) or rises rapidly. The transmission may shiftgears or apply the torque converter clutch to reducethe fluid temperature. Driving aggressively ordriving on long hills can cause the transmission fluidtemperature to be higher than normal. If thismessage appears, you may continue to drive at aslower speed. Monitor the transmission fluidtemperature and allow it to cool to at least 230°F(110°C). The transmission fluid temperature can bemonitored with the gages button on the DIC. SeeDIC Controls and Displays on page 206 andAutomatic Transmission Fluid on page 345. Alsocheck the engine coolant temperature. If it is alsohot, see Engine Overheating on page 350.
229
If this message is displayed during normal vehicleoperation on flat roads, your vehicle may needservice. See your dealer for an inspection.
If driving in a performance or competitive manner,the use of (S) Sport Automatic Mode or (S) SportManual Paddle Shift gear selection isrecommended. See Automatic TransmissionOperation on page 95 for more information.
To acknowledge the message, press the RESETbutton. The message reappears every 10 minutesuntil this condition changes. If you do not pressthe RESET button, the message remains onthe display until the condition changes.
TURN SIGNAL ONThis message displays and a chime sounds if aturn signal is left on for three-quarters of amile (1.2 km). Move the turn signal/multifunctionlever to the off position.
To acknowledge this message, press the RESETbutton.
UNLATCH HEADER TO MOVE TOPThis message displays and a chime sounds if youtry to lower the convertible top without firstunlocking the top. Move the latch handle to unlockthe convertible top. See Convertible Top(Manual) on page 138 or Convertible Top (Power)on page 145.
Other MessagesHere are more messages that you can receive onyour Driver Information Center (DIC). Toacknowledge a message and read anothermessage that may have come on at the sametime, press the RESET button.
• ACCESSORY MODE ON
• BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH
See Voltmeter Gage on page 192.
• BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW
See Voltmeter Gage on page 192.
• CHECK WASHER FLUID
See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 359.
230
• CRUISE SET TO XXX MPH (XXX km/h)
See Cruise Control on page 162.
• DRIVER DOOR AJAR
• FOB AUTOLEARN WAIT XX MINUTES
See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle”under Keyless Access System Operationon page 74.
• FOB BATTERY LOW
See “Battery Replacement” under KeylessAccess System Operation on page 74.
• HATCH AJAR (Coupe)
• INTRUSION SENSOR OFF, if your vehiclehas this feature
• INTRUSION SENSOR ON, if your vehicle hasthis feature
• KNOWN FOB
See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle”under Keyless Access System Operationon page 74.
• MAXIMUM NUMBER OF FOBS LEARNED
See “Matching Transmitter(s) to YourVehicle” under Keyless Access SystemOperation on page 74.
• OFF–ACCESSORY TO LEARN
See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle”under Keyless Access System Operationon page 74.
• PASSENGER DOOR AJAR
• READY FOR FOB #X
See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle”under Keyless Access System Operationon page 74.
• TONNEAU AJAR (Convertible)
• TRUNK AJAR (Convertible)
• UPSHIFT NOW
See Manual Transmission Operation onpage 100.
231
DIC Vehicle PersonalizationMany features on your vehicle can bepersonalized. This means that the operation ofthese features can be set to operate differentlydepending on who is driving the vehicle. See“Personal Options” later in this section forthe features that you can personalize.The personalization settings for other features areautomatically updated and saved as the driveradjusts them. These include the following settingsand presets:• The radio presets, tone, volume, fade,
balance, equalization (EQ) settings and source(radio or CD)
• The last climate control setting• The Head-Up Display (HUD) position and
dimming level, if your vehicle has this feature• The instrument panel cluster dimming
level and last selected DIC displaySeparate personalization settings are saved fortwo different drivers. One of the keyless accesstransmitters is assigned to driver 1. The other isassigned to driver 2. The back of the keylessaccess transmitters are labelled 1 or 2 tocorrespond to each driver.
The current driver’s preferences are recalled whenone of the following occurs:
• The lock or unlock button on the keylessaccess transmitter, labelled 1 or 2, is pressed.
• The appropriate memory button, 1 or 2, locatedon the driver’s door is pressed. See MemorySeat, Mirrors and Steering Wheel onpage 10 for more information.
• A valid keyless access transmitter is detectedupon opening the driver’s door.
If more than one valid keyless access transmitteris detected upon opening the driver’s door, thedriver preferences for the lowest driver number willbe recalled.
If a keyless access transmitter that is notlabelled 1 or 2 is used, the personalization systemwill not recognize the transmitter. The DriverInformation Center (DIC) will not display a currentdriver number and the features that are normallyprogrammed through the DIC will be set tothe default states. Also, if the OPTION button ispressed, the DIC does not display the menus usedto set personalizations, but instead displaysOPTIONS UNAVAILABLE for a few seconds.
232
Entering the Personal Options MenuTo enter the personal options menu, use thefollowing steps:
1. If you have an automatic transmission vehicle,turn the vehicle on with the shift lever inPARK (P).If you have a manual transmission vehicle,turn the vehicle on with the parking brake set.To avoid excessive drain on the battery, itis recommended that the headlamps areturned off.
2. Press the OPTION button and you will enterthe PERSONAL OPTIONS menu.The DIC will display the current drivernumber (1 or 2) for a few seconds and thenwill display instructions on which buttons to usefor setting the personalizations. The RESETbutton is used to select a setting for aparticular feature. The OPTION button is usedto move to the next feature.
3. Press the OPTION button while the instructionscreen is displayed to enter the firstpersonalization menu item.
4. Once you have cycled through all of thepersonal options, pressing the OPTIONbutton a final time exits the personal optionsmenu. In addition, if no button is pressedwithin 45 seconds, the DIC will exit thepersonal options menu.
Personal OptionsThe following options are available forprogramming:
Display Units: This option allows you to choosethe measurement units.
Press the OPTION button until DISPLAY UNITSappears on the display, then press the RESETbutton to scroll through the following modes:
• ENGLISH (default)
• METRIC
If you choose ENGLISH, all information will bedisplayed in English units.
If you choose METRIC, all information will bedisplayed in metric units.
When the mode you want is selected, press theOPTION button to set your choice and advance tothe next personal option.
233
Auto Memory Recall (Automatic Transmissiononly): If your automatic transmission vehiclehas the memory package, you may havethis option. This option allows the driver’s seat, thetelescopic steering column, if your vehicle hasthis feature, and the outside rearview mirrors toautomatically move to the current driver’s setposition when the engine starts.
Press the OPTION button until AUTO MEMORYRECALL appears on the display, then pressthe RESET button to scroll through the followingmodes:
• YES
• NO (default)
If you choose YES, the driver’s seat, the outsiderearview mirrors and the telescopic steeringcolumn, if your vehicle has this feature, positionsare recalled when you turn the ignition on.
If you choose NO, this option will turn off.
When the mode you want is selected, press theOPTION button to set your choice and advance tothe next personal option.
Auto Exit Recall: If your vehicle has the memorypackage, you may have this option. This optionallows the driver’s seat and telescopic steeringcolumn, if your vehicle has this feature, toautomatically move to the current driver’s exitposition when one of the following occurs:
• The vehicle is turned off or in RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) or accessorymode and the driver’s door is opened.
• The vehicle is turned off or in RAP and theunlock button on the keyless accesstransmitter is pressed.
In order for the Auto Exit Recall feature to work onan automatic transmission vehicle, the vehiclemust be in PARK (P). On a manual transmissionvehicle, the parking brake must be set.
Press the OPTION button until AUTO EXITRECALL appears on the display, then press theRESET button to scroll through the followingmodes:
• YES
• NO (default)
234
If you choose YES, when you turn the ignition offand open the driver’s door or press the unlockbutton on the keyless access transmitter, the seatand the telescopic steering wheel, if yourvehicle has this feature, will return to their storedexit positions for an easy exit or an easyentrance when returning to the vehicle.
The seat and steering wheel will only return to thestored driving position if you press the appropriatememory button or activate the auto memoryrecall feature.
If you choose NO, this option will turn off.
When the mode you want is selected, press theOPTION button to set your choice and advance tothe next personal option.
Approach Lights: This option briefly turns on theparking lamps, the front fog lamps and theback-up lamps during low light periods when thekeyless access transmitter is used to unlockthe vehicle.
Press the OPTION button until APPROACHLIGHTS appears on the display, then press theRESET button to scroll through the followingmodes:
• OFF
• ON (default)If you choose OFF, this option will turn off.
If you choose ON, the parking lamps, the front foglamps, and the back-up lamps will come on for20 seconds during low light periods when all of thefollowing occurs:• You press the unlock button on the keyless
access transmitter.
• Both of the doors are closed.
• The vehicle is off or in RAP.The lamps remain on for 20 seconds or until adoor is opened, the lock button on the keylessaccess transmitter is pressed or the vehicle is nolonger off or in RAP.
See Keyless Access System on page 73 for moreinformation.
When the mode you want is selected, press theOPTION button to set your choice and advance tothe next personal option.
235
Twilight Delay: This option allows you to set theamount of time you want the parking lamps andfront fog lamps to remain on after you exit thevehicle. This will occur when the vehicle is off or inRAP and the headlamps are on due to theautomatic headlamp system. The parking lampsand front fog lamps will remain on until the driverselected time expires, the exterior lamp control isactivated or the vehicle is no longer off or in RAP.
Press the OPTION button until TWILIGHT DELAYappears on the display, then press the RESETbutton to scroll through the following modes:
• OFF
• 15 S
• 30 S (default)
• 90 S
If you choose OFF, this option will turn off.
If you choose 15 S, the twilight delay time will beset to 15 seconds.
If you choose 30 S, the twilight delay time will beset to 30 seconds.
If you choose 90 S, the twilight delay time will beset to 90 seconds.
When the mode you want is selected, press theOPTION button to set your choice and advance tothe next personal option.
Flash at Unlock: This option activates the frontand rear turn signals for two short flasheswhen the unlock or hatch/trunk button on thekeyless access transmitter is pressed. This willonly occur when the vehicle is off.
Press the OPTION button until FLASH ATUNLOCK appears on the display, then press theRESET button to scroll through the followingmodes:
• YES (default)
• NO
If you choose YES, the front and rear turn signalswill flash twice when you press the unlockbutton or the hatch/trunk button on the keylessaccess transmitter.
If you choose NO, this option will turn off.
When the mode you want is selected, press theOPTION button to set your choice and advance tothe next personal option.
236
Flash at Lock: This option activates the front andrear turn signals for one long flash when thelock button on the keyless access transmitter ispressed. This will only occur when the vehicleis off. If the lock button on the keyless accesstransmitter is pressed again within five seconds,the horn will sound regardless of which setting youhave selected.
Press the OPTION button until FLASH AT LOCKappears on the display, then press the RESETbutton to scroll through the following modes:
• YES (default)
• NO
If you choose YES, the front and rear turn signalswill flash once when you press the lock buttonon the keyless access transmitter.
If you choose NO, this option will turn off.
When the mode you want is selected, press theOPTION button to set your choice and advance tothe next personal option.
FOB Reminder: This option chirps the hornthree times when the driver’s door is closed andthere is a keyless access transmitter insidethe interior of the vehicle. This will only occur whenthe vehicle is off.
Press the OPTION button until FOB REMINDERappears on the display, then press the RESETbutton to scroll through the following modes:
• YES
• NO (default)
If you choose YES, the horn will chirp three timeswhen a keyless access transmitter is inside ofthe vehicle while the ignition is turned off and thedriver’s door is closed.
If you choose NO, this option will turn off.
When the mode you want is selected, press theOPTION button to set your choice and advance tothe next personal option.
237
Passive Door Locking: This option allows you toselect whether the doors automatically lockduring normal vehicle exit. When the ignition isturned off and all doors become closed, the vehiclewill determine how many keyless accesstransmitters remain in the vehicle interior. If atleast one keyless access transmitter hasbeen removed from the interior of the vehicle, thedoors will lock after eight seconds.
For example, if there are two keyless accesstransmitters in the vehicle and one is removed, theother will be locked in. The keyless accesstransmitter locked in the vehicle can still be usedto start the vehicle or unlock the doors, ifneeded. A person approaching the outside of thelocked vehicle without an authorized keylessaccess transmitter, however, will not be able toopen the door, even with a transmitter in thevehicle.
You may temporarily disable the passive doorlocking feature by pressing the door unlock switchfor three seconds on an open door. Passivedoor locking will then remain disabled until a doorlock switch is pressed or until the power modetransitions from the off power mode.
Press the OPTION button until PASSIVE DOORLOCKING appears on the display, then pressthe RESET button to scroll through the followingmodes:
• OFF (default)
• SILENT
• HORN
If you choose OFF, this option will turn off.
If you choose SILENT, the doors will automaticallylock eight seconds after you turn the ignition off,remove a keyless access transmitter from theinterior of the vehicle, and close both doors.
If you choose HORN, the doors will automaticallylock and the horn will chirp eight seconds afteryou turn the ignition off, remove a keyless accesstransmitter from the interior of the vehicle, andclose both doors.
If you are parking in a quiet area and do not wantthe horn to sound when the doors lock, pressthe lock button on the keyless access transmitterimmediately after removing it from the interiorand closing the doors. This will lock the doors andcancel the passive locking for this ignition cycle.
238
When the mode you want is selected, press theOPTION button to set your choice and advance tothe next personal option.
Passive Door Unlock: This option allows you toselect which doors will automatically unlockwhen you approach and open the driver’s doorwith your keyless access transmitter. SeeDoor Locks on page 78 for more information.
Press the OPTION button until PASSIVE DOORUNLOCK appears on the display, then pressthe RESET button to scroll through the followingmodes:
• DRIVER (default)
• BOTH
If you choose DRIVER, only the driver’s door willautomatically unlock when you approach andopen the driver’s door with your keyless accesstransmitter.
If you choose BOTH, both doors will automaticallyunlock when you approach and open the driver’sdoor with your keyless access transmitter.
Auto Unlock: This option allows you to selectwhether the driver’s door, both doors or neitherdoor automatically unlocks when the shift lever is
moved into PARK (P) for automatic transmissionvehicles or when the ignition is turned off or isin RAP for manual transmission vehicles.
Press the OPTION button until AUTO UNLOCKappears on the display, then press the RESETbutton to scroll through the following modes:
• OFF
• DRIVER
• BOTH (default)If you choose OFF, this option will turn off.If you choose DRIVER, on automatic transmissionvehicles, the driver’s door will automaticallyunlock when the shift lever is moved intoPARK (P). On manual transmission vehicles, thedriver’s door will automatically unlock whenthe ignition is turned off or is in RAP.If you choose BOTH, on automatic transmissionvehicles, both doors will automatically unlock whenthe shift lever is moved into PARK (P). Onmanual transmission vehicles, both doors willautomatically unlock when the ignition is turned offor is in RAP.
When the mode you want is selected, press theOPTION button to set your choice and advance tothe next personal option.
239
Language: This option allows you to select thelanguage the DIC, the Head-Up Display (HUD), ifyour vehicle has this feature, and the radiouses to display messages. Each language modewill be displayed in its own language. For example,English will be displayed as ENGLISH, Spanishas ESPANOL, etc. If your vehicle has thenavigation system, you will not have the Japaneselanguage mode.
Press the OPTION button until LANGUAGEappears on the display, then press the RESETbutton to scroll through the following modes:
• ENGLISH (default)
• DEUTSCH (German)
• FRANCAIS (French)
• ITALIANO (Italian)
• ESPANOL (Spanish)
If you choose a language that you do notunderstand, press the OPTION and RESETbuttons for five seconds. The DIC will begindisplaying all of the various languages one by onefor as long as the buttons are pressed. Whenthe desired language is displayed, releasethe buttons and the DIC will set to this language.
When the mode you want is selected, press theOPTION button to set your choice and advance tothe next personal option.
Personalize Name: This option allows you totype in a name or greeting that will appear on theDIC display whenever the correspondingkeyless access transmitter (1 or 2) is used or oneof the memory buttons (1 or 2) located on thedriver’s door is pressed.
Press the OPTION button until PERSONALIZENAME appears on the display, then press theRESET button to scroll through the followingmodes:
• YES
• NO (default)
If you choose YES, you can type in a name thatwill appear on the DIC display.
To program a name, use the following procedure:
1. Enter the PERSONAL OPTIONS menuand select the driver number (1 or 2) that youwould like to program by following theinstructions listed previously under “Enteringthe Personal Options Menu”.
240
2. Press the OPTION button until thePERSONALIZE NAME option appearson the display.
3. Select YES under PERSONALIZE NAME bypressing the RESET button.
4. Press the OPTION button and a cursor willdisplay where you can insert a letter.
5. Press the OPTION button again until the letteryou want is displayed. To scroll through theletters faster and without a beeping noise,keep the OPTIONS button depressed. Thereare alpha/numeric characters and a blankspace available.
6. Then press the RESET button to select theletter of your choice and proceed on to thenext space to the right.If you make a mistake and would like to clear orreplace a letter, perform the following steps:
6.1. Press the RESET button to reach theletter you would like to change.
6.2. Press the OPTION button to scrollthrough the letter choices.
6.3. Press the RESET button to select theletter and proceed on to the next spaceto the right.
7. Repeat Steps 5 and 6 until the name orgreeting you want is complete. After the nameor greeting is complete, keep pressing theRESET button until the display turns blank andexits out of this option. You can program upto 20 characters.
If you choose NO, this option will turn off.
If a customized name or greeting is notprogrammed, the DIC display will show Driver 1 orDriver 2 to correspond with either the numberon the back of the keyless accesstransmitter (1 or 2) that is being used or to thememory button (1 or 2) that is pressed.
PERSONALIZE NAME is the last option availableto program in the PERSONAL OPTIONS menu.Pressing the OPTION button after this setting willexit you from the PERSONAL OPTIONS menu. Thelast item you were in prior to entering PERSONALOPTIONS will then display on the DIC.
241
Audio System(s)Determine which radio your vehicle has and thenread the pages following to familiarize yourselfwith its features.
Driving without distraction is a necessity for asafer driving experience. See Defensive Driving onpage 272. By taking a few moments to read thismanual and get familiar with your vehicle’saudio system, you can use it with less effort, aswell as take advantage of its features. While yourvehicle is parked, set up your audio system bypresetting your favorite radio stations, setting thetone and adjusting the speakers. Then, whendriving conditions permit, you can tune toyour favorite stations using the presets andsteering wheel controls if the vehicle has them.
{CAUTION:
This system provides you with a far greateraccess to audio stations and song listings.Giving extended attention to entertainmenttasks while driving can cause a crash andyou or others can be injured or killed.Always keep your eyes on the road andyour mind on the drive — avoid engagingin extended searching while driving.
Keeping your mind on the drive is important forsafe driving. For more information, see DefensiveDriving on page 272.
242
Here are some ways in which you can help avoiddistraction while driving.
While your vehicle is parked:
• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.
• Familiarize yourself with its operation.
• Set up your audio system by presetting yourfavorite radio stations, setting the tone, andadjusting the speakers. Then, when drivingconditions permit, you can tune to your favoriteradio stations using the presets and steeringwheel controls if the vehicle has them.
Notice: Before adding any sound equipmentto your vehicle, such as an audio system,CD player, CB radio, mobile telephone,or two-way radio, make sure that it can beadded by checking with your dealer. Also,check federal rules covering mobile radio andtelephone units. If sound equipment can beadded, it is very important to do it properly.Added sound equipment may interfere with theoperation of your vehicle’s engine, radio, orother systems, and even damage them.Your vehicle’s systems may interfere with theoperation of sound equipment that hasbeen added.
Your vehicle has a feature called RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). With RAP, the audiosystem can be played even after the ignitionis turned off. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) on page 91 for more information.
Setting the TimeWith the ignition on and the radio off, press the Hor the M button to enter clock mode. Pressand hold H until the correct hour appears on thedisplay. Press and hold M until the correctminute appears on the display.
To change the time default setting from 12 hour to24 hour, press either the H or the M button toenter the clock mode. Press the tune knobto select between the 12 or 24 hour display format.The clock mode will automatically time out withthe changed display format set as the currentdefault setting.
243
Radio with CD
An indicator light on the upper left side of theradio flashes when the ignition is off, to indicatethe theft deterrent feature is set. For moreinformation, see Theft-Deterrent Feature onpage 267
Your vehicle has seven Bose® amplified speakers.See your dealer for details.
Radio Data System (RDS)The audio system has a Radio Data System(RDS). RDS features are available for use only onFM stations that broadcast RDS information.
With RDS, the radio can do the following:
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selectedtype of programming
• Receive announcements concerning local andnational emergencies
• Display messages from radio stations
• Seek to stations with traffic announcements
This system relies upon receiving specificinformation from these stations and works onlywhen the information is available. In rare cases, aradio station may broadcast incorrect informationthat causes the radio features to work improperly.If this happens, contact the radio station.
While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, thestation name or call letters appear on the display.RDS stations may also provide the time of day,a program type (PTY) for current programming,and the name of the program being broadcast.
Radio with CD shown, Radio with Six-Disc CDsimilar
244
XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceIf your vehicle has the XM™ satellite radioservice, it is based in the 48 contiguous UnitedStates and Canada. XM™ offers a large variety ofcoast-to-coast channels including music, news,sports, talk, traffic/weather (U.S. subscribers), andchildren’s programming. XM™ provides digitalquality audio and text information that includessong title and artist name. A service fee is requiredin order to receive the XM™ service. For moreinformation, contact XM™; In the U.S. atwww.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696)or in Canada at www.xmradio.ca or call1-877-GET-XMSR (438-9677).
Playing the Radio
Top Knob (Power/Volume): Press this knob toturn the system on and off. Turn this knobclockwise or counterclockwise to increase ordecrease the volume.
4 (Information): For RDS, press this button tochange what appears on the display whileusing RDS. The display options are station name,RDS station frequency, PTY, and the name ofthe program (if available).
For XM™ (if equipped), press the informationbutton while in XM™ mode to retrieve four differentcategories of information related to the currentsong or channel: Artist, Song Title, Categoryor PTY, Channel Number/Channel Name.
To change the default on the display, press theinformation button until you see the desireddisplay, then hold the button for two seconds. Theradio produces one beep and the selecteddisplay is now the default.
AUTO n (Automatic Volume): Automaticvolume automatically adjusts the audio system tomake up for road and wind noise as you drive,by it increasing the volume as vehicle speedincreases.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press thisbutton to select AUTO VOLUME MIN (minimum),AUTO VOLUME MED (medium), or AUTOVOLUME MAX (maximum). Each higher settingprovides more volume compensation at fastervehicle speeds. To turn automatic volumeoff, press this button until AUTO VOLUME OFFappears on the display.
245
If your vehicle has the Bose® audio system, itincludes Bose® AudioPilot® noise compensationtechnology. When turned on, AudioPilot®
continuously adjusts the audio system tocompensate for background noise, so that themusic always sounds the same at the set volumelevel. This feature is most effective at lowerradio volume settings where background noisecan affect how well you hear the music beingplayed. At higher volume settings, where the musicis much louder than the background noise, theremay be little or no adjustments by AudioPilot®.
To use AudioPilot®, set the radio volume to yourdesired level. Turn AudioPilot® on by pressingthe automatic volume button until AVOL ONappears on the display. As the vehicle goes faster,the background noise increases. AudioPilot®
adjusts the audio system’s sound level toovercome background noise. To turn AudioPilot®
off, press the automatic volume button untilAVOL OFF appears on the display. For additionalinformation on AudioPilot®, visit www.bose.com.
MUTE: Press this button to silence the system.Press this button again to turn the sound on.
This button is not available on the Radiowith Six-Disc CD.
Finding a StationBAND: Press this button to switch between FM1,FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). Thedisplay shows the selection.
O /e (Tune): Turn this knob to select radiostations.
t SEEK u: Press the right or the left arrow to goto the next or to the previous station and stay there.
The radio only seeks stations with a strong signalthat are in the selected band.
t SCAN u: Press and hold either arrow fortwo seconds until FREQUENCY SCAN appears onthe display. The radio goes to a station, playsfor a few seconds, then goes on to the nextstation. Press either arrow again to stop scanning.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either arrowfor four seconds until PRESET SCAN appears onthe display. The radio goes to the next presetstation, plays for a few seconds, then goes to thenext preset station. Press either scan arrow againor one of the pushbuttons to stop scanning presets.
The radio only scans stations with a strong signalthat are in the selected band.
246
Setting Preset StationsUp to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can beprogrammed on the six numbered pushbuttons, byperforming the following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1or XM2 (if equipped).
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization.
5. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons until you hear a beep.Whenever that numbered pushbutton ispressed, the station that was set returns andthe equalization that was selected is storedfor that pushbutton.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)e (Bass/Treble/Midrange): Press this knob toselect BASS, MIDRANGE, or TREBLE. Turn theknob to increase or to decrease the tone. If a stationis weak or has static, decrease the treble.
To adjust the bass, midrange, and treble to themiddle position, press and hold this knob when thetone control is on the display. The level changes tothe middle position.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to themiddle position, press and hold this knob when notone or speaker control is displayed. AUDIOSETTINGS CENTERED appears on the display.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press thisbutton to select customized equalization settingsdesigned for country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock,and classical. Selecting CUSTOM or changingbass or treble, returns the EQ to the manual bassand treble settings.
The radio saves separate AUTO EQ settings foreach preset and source.
If the radio has the Bose® audio system, theequalization settings are EQ1 through EQ6 andCUSTOM.
247
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
e (Balance/Fade): To adjust the balancebetween the right and the left speakers, press thisknob until BALANCE appears on the display.Turn the knob to move the sound toward the rightor the left speakers.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rearspeakers, press this knob until FADE appearson the display. Turn the knob to move the soundtoward the front or the rear speakers.
To adjust the balance and fade to the middleposition, press and hold this knob when thespeaker control is on the display. The levelchanges to the middle position.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to themiddle position, press and hold this knob when notone or speaker control is displayed. AUDIOSETTINGS CENTERED appears on the display.
Finding a Category Station (RDS andXM™ (if equipped))To select and find a desired category perform thefollowing:
1. Press the CAT (category) button. The lastselected category appears on the display.
2. Turn the tune knob to select the category.
3. Once the desired category is displayed, presseither SEEK arrow to go to a category’sstation. SEEKING CATEGORY appears onthe display.
4. To go to another station within that category,press the CAT button to display the category,then press either SEEK arrow to go toanother station.
If both category and traffic are on, the radiosearches for stations with the selected categoryand traffic announcements.
If the radio cannot find the desired category,NONE appears on the display and the radioreturns to the last station tuned.
248
SCAN: Scan the stations within a category byperforming the following:
1. Press the CAT button. The last selectedcategory appears on the display.
2. Turn the tune knob to select the category.
3. Once the desired category is displayed, pressand hold either SCAN arrow until you hear abeep and SCAN CATEGORY appears onthe display. The radio begins scanningthe stations in the category.
4. Press either SCAN arrow to stop scanning.
If both category and TRAF (traffic) are on,the radio scans for stations with the selectedcategory and traffic announcements.
BAND (AF Alternate Frequency): Alternatefrequency allows the radio to switch to a strongerstation in the same category. To turn alternatefrequency on, press and hold BAND for fourseconds. AF ON appears on the display. The radiomay could to stations with a stronger frequency.
To turn alternate frequency off, press andhold BAND again for four seconds. AF OFFappears on the display. The radio will not switchto other stations.
This function does not apply for XM™ SatelliteRadio Service.
RDS MessagesALERT!: Alert warns of local or nationalemergencies. When an alert announcementcomes on the current radio station, ALERT!appears on the display. You will hear theannouncement, even if the volume is low or a CDis playing. If a CD is playing, play stops duringthe announcement. Alert announcements cannotbe turned off.
ALERT! is not affected by tests of the emergencybroadcast system. This feature is not supportedby all RDS stations.
4 (Information): If the current station has amessage, INFO (information) appears on thedisplay. Press this button to see the message. Themessage may display the artist, song title, callin phone numbers, etc.
If the entire message is not displayed, parts of themessage appears every three seconds. To scrollthrough the message, press and release thisbutton. A new group of words appears on thedisplay after every press of the button.
249
Once the complete message has displayed, INFOdisappears from the display until another newmessage is received. The last message can bedisplayed by pressing this button. The last messageuntil a new message is received or the radio istuned to a different station.
When a message is not available from a station,NO INFO appears on the display.
TRAF (Traffic): If TA (traffic) appears on thedisplay, the tuned station broadcasts trafficannouncements. When a traffic announcement isbroadcast on this station, you will hear it.
If the station does not broadcast trafficannouncements, press the TRAF button and theradio seeks to a station that does. When a stationthat broadcasts traffic announcements is found,the radio stops seeking and TA appears onthe display. If no station is found that broadcaststraffic announcements, NO TRAFFIC appearson the display.
If TA is on the display, press the TRAF button toturn off the traffic announcements.
The radio plays the traffic announcement even ifthe volume is low. The radio interrupts theplay of a CD if the last tuned station broadcaststraffic announcements.
This function does not apply to XM™ SatelliteRadio Service.
Radio Messages
CAL ERR (Calibration Error): The audio systemhas been calibrated for your vehicle from thefactory. If CAL ERR appears on the display, itmeans that the radio has not been configuredproperly for your vehicle and must be returned toyour dealer for service.
LOCKED: This message is displayed when theTHEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Takethe vehicle to your dealer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your dealer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write it downand provide it to your dealer when reporting theproblem.
250
XM™ Radio MessagesIf your vehicle has XM™ Satellite Radio Service,the radio may display screen messagespertaining to the XM™ radio service, software andhardware. See XM Radio Messages on page 265later in this section for further detail.
Playing a CD (Single CD Player)Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.The player pulls it in and the CD should beginplaying.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in theplayer, it stays in the player. When the ignition orradio is turned on, the CD starts playing where itstopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
When a CD is inserted, CD and the CD symbolappears on the display. As each new track starts toplay, the track number appears on the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs andthe smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality (and playbackperformance) may be reduced due to the CD-Rquality, method of recording, the quality ofthe music that has been recorded, and the waythe CD-R has been handled. For better playbackperformance when home burning audio discs,use brand named CD media with the [“CompactDisc” trade mark logo], and a burn rate nofaster than 12X.
There may be an increase in skipping, difficulty infinding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading andejecting. If these problems occur, check the bottomsurface of the CD. If the surface of the CD isdamaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched,the CD will not play properly. If the surface ofthe CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDs onpage 269 for more information.
251
If there is no apparent damage, try a knowngood CD.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caughtin the CD player. If a CD is recorded on apersonal computer and a description label isneeded, try labeling the top of the recorded CDwith a marking pen instead.
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insertmore than one CD into the slot at a time, orattempt to play scratched or damaged CDs, youcould damage the CD player. When using theCD player, use only CDs in good conditionwithout any label, load one CD at a time, andkeep the CD player and the loading slot free offoreign materials, liquids, and debris.
If an error appears on the display, see “CDMessages” later in this section.
O /e (Tune): Turn this knob to go to the nextor previous track.
{ (Reverse): Press and hold this button toreverse the current track.
| (Fast Forward): Press and hold this button tofast forward through the current track.
RDM (Random): Press this button to hear thetracks in random, rather than sequential,order. RANDOM DISC appears on the display.Press this button again to turn off random play.
RPT (Repeat): Press this button to hear atrack over again. REPEAT appears on the display.Press this button again to turn off repeat play.
MUTE: Press this button to silence the system.Press this button again to turn the sound on.
t SEEK u: Press the left arrow to go to thestart of the current track if more than eight secondshave played. Press the right arrow to go to thestart of the next track. If either arrow is heldor pressed more than once, the player continuesmoving backward or forward through the CD.
252
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhen a CD is playing. The inactive CD remainssafely inside the radio for future listening.
CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play aCD while listening to the radio. CD appears on thedisplay when a CD is in the player. If the systemhas a remote playback device, pressing this buttona second time allows the remote device to play.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): PressAUTO EQ to select the equalization setting whileplaying a CD. The equalization is storedwhenever a CD is played. For more information onAUTO EQ, see “AUTO EQ” listed previously inthis section.
X (Eject): Press this button to eject the CD.EJECT can be activated with either the ignition orradio off.
Playing a CD(s) (Six-Disc CD Player)If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in theplayer, it stays in the player. When the ignitionor radio is turned on, the CD starts playing whereit stopped, if it was the last selected audiosource.
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol appearson the CD. As each new track starts to play,the track number appears on the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs andthe smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality (and playbackperformance) may be reduced due to the CD-Rquality, method of recording, the quality ofthe music that has been recorded, and the waythe CD-R has been handled. For better playbackperformance when home burning audio discs,use brand named CD media with the [“CompactDisc” trade mark logo], and a burn rate nofaster than 12X.
There may be an increase in skipping, difficulty infinding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading andejecting. If these problems occur, check the bottomsurface of the CD. If the surface of the CD isdamaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched,the CD will not play properly. If the surface ofthe CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDs onpage 269 for more information.
253
If there is no apparent damage, try a knowngood CD.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caughtin the CD player. If a CD is recorded on apersonal computer and a description label isneeded, try labeling the top of the recorded CDwith a marking pen.
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insertmore than one CD into the slot at a time,or attempt to play scratched or damaged CDs,you could damage the CD player. Whenusing the CD player, use only CDs in goodcondition without any label, load one CD at atime, and keep the CD player and the loadingslot free of foreign materials, liquids, anddebris.
If an error appears on the display, see“CD Messages” later in this section.
M (Load): Press this button to load CDs into theCD player. This CD player holds up to six CDs.
To insert one CD, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Press and release the load button.
3. When INSET CD # appears on the display,load a CD and insert the CD partway into theslot, label side up. The player pulls the CD in.
To insert multiple CDs, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Press and hold the load button fortwo seconds.A beep will sound and LOAD ALL DISCappears on the display.
3. When INSERT CD # appears on the display,load a CD and insert the CD partway into theslot, label side up. The player pulls the CD in.Once the CD is loaded, wait for INSERT CD #to appear on the display, then load the nextCD. The CD player takes up to six CDs. Do notload more than six.
To load more than one CD but less than six,complete Steps 1 through 3. When finished loadingCDs, press the load button to cancel the loadingfunction. The radio begins to play the last CDloaded.
If more than one CD has been loaded, a numberfor each CD appears on the display.
254
Playing a Specific Loaded CDFor every CD loaded, a number appears on thedisplay. To play a specific CD press the numberedpushbutton that corresponds to the CD.
If an error appears on the display, see “CDMessages” later in this section.
X (Eject): Press this button to eject CD(s).
To eject the CD that is currently playing, press andrelease this button.
To eject multiple CDs, do the following:
1. Press and hold the eject button fortwo seconds.A beep will sound and EJECT ALL DISCSappears on the display.
2. When REMOVE DISC appears on the display,the CD ejects and can be removed.To stop ejecting the CDs, press the load orthe eject button.
If the CD is not removed, after 25 seconds, theCD is automatically pulled back into the player.If the CD is pushed back into the player, before the25 second time period is complete, the playersenses an error and tries to eject the CD severaltimes before stopping.
Do not repeatedly press the eject button to eject aCD after you have tried to push it in manually.The player’s 25-second eject timer resets at eachpress of eject, causing the player not to ejectthe CD until the 25-second time period haselapsed.
O /e (Tune): Turn this knob to go to the nextor previous track.
{ (Reverse): Press and hold this button toreverse within the current track.
| (Fast Forward): Press and hold this button tofast forward through the current track.
255
RDM (Random): Press this button to hear thetracks in random, rather than sequential order, onone CD or all of the loaded CDs.
To use random, do one of the following:
• To play the tracks on the CD you are listeningto in random order, press and release thisbutton until RANDOM DISC PLAY appears onthe display.
• To play the tracks on all of the CDs that areloaded in random order, press and releasethis button until RANDOM ALL DISCS appearson the display.
To turn off random play, press and release theRDM button until RANDOM OFF appears on thedisplay.
RPT (Repeat): Press this button to hear a trackor an entire CD over again.
To use repeat, do one of the following:
• To repeat a track, press and release thisbutton until REPEAT appears on the display.
• To repeat an entire CD, press and release thisbutton until REPEAT ONE DISC appears onthe display.
To turn off repeated play, press and release theRPT button until REPEAT OFF appears onthe display
t SEEK u: Press the left arrow to go to thestart of the current track, if more than ten secondshave played. Press the right arrow to go to thenext track. If either arrow is held or pressed morethan once, the player continues moving backwardor forward through the CD.
t SCAN u: To scan one CD, press and holdeither SCAN arrow for more than two seconds untilSCAN appears on the display and you hear abeep. The radio goes to the next track, plays for10 seconds, then goes to the next track. Presseither SCAN arrow again, to stop scanning.
To scan all loaded CDs, press and hold eitherSCAN arrow for more than four seconds until CDSCAN appears on the display and you hear abeep. Use this feature to listen to 10 seconds ofthe first track of each loaded CD. Press eitherSCAN arrow again, to stop scanning.
256
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhen a CD is playing. The inactive CD(s) remainssafely inside the radio for future listening.
CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play aCD when listening to the radio. CD appears on thedisplay when a CD is in the player. If yoursystem has a remote playback device, pressingthis button a second time allows the remote deviceto play.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): PressAUTO EQ to select the equalization setting whileplaying a CD. The equalization is storedwhenever a CD is played. For more information onAUTO EQ, see “AUTO EQ” listed previously inthis section.
Playing an MP3 CD-R DiscYour vehicle’s radio system may have the MP3feature. If it has this feature, it is capable of playingan MP3 CD-R disc. For more information onhow to play an MP3 CD-R disc, see Using an MP3on page 259 later in this section.
Using R (Song List) Mode (Single CD,MP3, and Six-Disc CD)This feature is capable of saving 20 trackselections. To save tracks into the song listfeature, perform the following steps:
1. Turn the CD player on and load it with at leastone CD.
2. Check to see that the CD player is not insong list mode. S-LIST should not appearon the display. If S-LIST displays, press thesong list button to turn it off.
3. Select the desired CD by pressing thenumbered pushbutton and then use the SEEKright arrow or turn the tune knob to locatethe track to be saved. The track beginsto play.
4. Press and hold the song list button to savethe track into memory. When song list ispressed, one beep is heard immediately.ADDED SONG appears on the display.
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for saving otherselections.
SONGLIST FULL appears on the display if you tryto save more than 20 selections.
257
To play the song list, press the song list button.The recorded tracks begins to play in theorder they were saved.
Seek through the song list by using the SEEKarrows. Seeking past the last saved track returnsto the first saved track.
To delete tracks from the song list, perform thefollowing steps:
1. Turn the CD player on.
2. Press the song list button to turn song list on.S-LIST appears on the display.
3. Press either SEEK arrow or turn the tuneknob to select the desired track to bedeleted.
4. Press and hold the song list button fortwo seconds. Release the button when SONGREMOVED appears on the display.
After a track has been deleted, the remainingtracks are moved up the list. When another trackis added to the song list, the track is added tothe end of the list.
To delete the entire song list, perform the followingsteps:
1. Turn the CD player on.
2. Press the song list button to turn song list on.S-LIST appears on the display.
3. Press and hold the song list button for morethan four seconds. One beep is heard andSONGLIST EMPTY appears on the displayindicating the song list has been deleted.
If a CD is ejected, and the song list containssaved tracks from that CD, those tracks areautomatically deleted from the song list. Any trackssaved to the song list again are added to thebottom of the list.
To end song list mode, press the song list button.One beep is heard and S-LIST is removedfrom the display.
258
CD Messages
CHECK CD: If this message appears on thedisplay and/or the CD comes out, it could be forone of the following reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns tonormal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When theroad becomes smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, orupside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hourand try again.
• There may have been a problem while burningthe CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any otherreason, try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your dealer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write it downand provide it to your dealer when reporting theproblem.
Using an MP3
MP3 CD-R Disc
MP3 FormatIf you burn your own MP3 disc on a personalcomputer:
• Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on aCD-R disc.
• Do not mix standard audio and MP3 files onone disc.
• Make sure playlists have a .mp3 or .wplextension, other file extensions may not work.
• Files can be recorded with a variety of fixed orvariable bit rates. Song title, artist name, andalbum are available for display by the radiowhen recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.
• Create a folder structure that makes it easy tofind songs while driving. Organize songs byalbums using one folder for each album.Each folder or album should contain 18 songsor less.
259
• Make sure to finalize the disc when burningan MP3 disc, using multiple sessions. It isusually better to burn the disc all at once.
• Do not use CD-RW discs.
• Do not use colored discs.
The player will be able to read and play amaximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists, 10 sessions,and 255 files. Long file names, folder names,or playlist names may use more disc memoryspace than necessary. To conserve space on thedisc, minimize the length of the file, folder, orplaylist names. You can also play an MP3 CD thatwas recorded using no file folders. The systemcan support up to 11 folders in depth, though, keepthe depth of the folders to a minimum in orderto keep down the complexity and confusionin trying to locate a particular folder duringplayback. If a CD contains more than themaximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists, 10 sessions,and 255 files the player lets you access andnavigate up to the maximum, but all items overthe maximum are ignored.
Root DirectoryThe root directory is treated as a folder. If the rootdirectory has compressed audio files, thedirectory is displayed as F1 ROOT. All filescontained directly under the root directory areaccessed prior to any root directory folders.However, playlists (Px) are always accessedbefore root folders or files.
Empty Directory or FolderIf a root directory or a folder exists somewhere inthe file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no compressed files directlybeneath them, the player advances to the nextfolder in the file structure that contains compressedaudio files. The empty folder does not display.
No FolderWhen the CD contains only compressed files, thefiles are located under the root folder. The nextand previous folder functions will not function on aCD that was recorded without folders or playlists.When displaying the name of the folder theradio displays ROOT.
260
When the CD contains only playlists andcompressed audio files, but no folders, all files arelocated under the root folder. The folder downand the folder up buttons searches playlists (Px)first and then goes to the root folder. Whenthe radio displays the name of the folder the radiodisplays ROOT.
Order of PlayTracks are played in the following order:
• Play begins from the first track in the firstplaylist and continues sequentially throughall tracks in each playlist. When the last trackof the last playlist has played, play continuesfrom the first track of the first playlist.
• If the CD does not contain any playlists, thenplay begins from the first track under the rootdirectory. When all tracks from the rootdirectory have played, play continues fromfiles according to their numerical listing. Afterplaying the last track from the last folder,play begins again at the first track of the firstfolder or root directory.
When play enters a new folder, the display doesnot automatically show the new folder name unlessthe folder mode has been chosen as the defaultdisplay. See the information button later inthis section for more information. The new trackname appears on the display.
File System and NamingThe song name that is displayed is the song namethat is contained in the ID3 tag. If the songname is not present in the ID3 tag, then the radiodisplays the file name without the extension(such as .mp3) as the track name.
Track names longer than 32 characters orfour pages are shortened. Parts of words on thelast page of text and the extension of the filenamewill not display.
Preprogrammed PlaylistsPreprogrammed playlists that were created byWinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™software can be accessed, however, they cannotbe edited using the radio. These playlists aretreated as special folders containing compressedaudio song files.
261
Playing an MP3Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.The player pulls it in, and READING appearson the display. The CD should begin playing andthe CD symbol appears on the display.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD-R inthe player, it stays in the player. When theignition or radio is turned on, the CD-R starts toplay where it stopped, if it was the last selectedaudio source.
As each new track starts to play, the track numberappears on the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDsand the smaller CDs are loaded in the samemanner.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality (and playbackperformance) may be reduced due to the CD-Rquality, method of recording, the quality ofthe music that has been recorded, and the waythe CD-R has been handled. For better playbackperformance when home burning audio discs,use brand named CD media with the [“CompactDisc” trade mark logo], and a burn rate nofaster than 12X.
There may be an increase in skipping, difficulty infinding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading andejecting. If these problems occur, check the bottomsurface of the CD. If the surface of the CD isdamaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched,the CD will not play properly. If the surface ofthe CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDs onpage 269 for more information.
If there is no apparent damage, try a knowngood CD.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caughtin the CD player. If a CD is recorded on apersonal computer and a description label isneeded, try labeling the top of the recorded CDwith a marking pen instead.
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insertmore than one CD into the slot at a time,or attempt to play scratched or damaged CDs,you could damage the CD player. Whenusing the CD player, use only CDs in goodcondition without any label, load one CD at atime, and keep the CD player and the loadingslot free of foreign materials, liquids, anddebris.
262
If an error appears on the display, see “CDMessages” later in this section.
O /e (Tune): Turn this knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to go to the next or previoustrack.
{ (Previous Folder): Press this button to go tothe first track in the previous folder. Press andhold this button to reverse through the currenttrack.
| (Next Folder): Press this pushbutton to go tothe first track in the next folder. Press and holdthis button to fast forward the current track.
RDM (Random): Press this button to hear thetracks in random, rather than sequential order, onone CD, one folder, or all of the loaded CDs.
To use random, do one of the following:
• To play the tracks on the CD you are listeningto in random order, press and release thisbutton until RANDOM DISC appears onthe display.
• To play the tracks in the folder you arelistening to in random order, press and releasethis button until RANDOM FOLDER appearson the display.
• To play the tracks on all of the CDs that areloaded in random order, press and releasethis button until RANDOM ALL appears on thedisplay.
To turn off random play, press and release theRDM button until RANDOM OFF appears on thedisplay.
263
RPT (Repeat): Press this button to hear a track,CD, or a folder over again.
To use repeat, do one of the following:
• To repeat a track, press and release thisbutton until REPEAT TRACK appears onthe display.
• To repeat a CD, press and release this buttonuntil REPEAT DISC appears on the display.
• To repeat a folder, press and releasethis button until REPEAT FOLDER appears onthe display.
To turn off repeated play, press and release theRPT button until REPEAT OFF appears onthe display
MUTE: Press this button to silence the system.Press this button again to turn the sound on.
This button is not available on the Radiowith Six-Disc CD.
t SEEK u: Press the left arrow to go to thestart of the current track, if more than 10 secondshave played. Press the right arrow to go to thenext track. If either arrow is held or pressed morethan once, the player continues moving backwardor forward through the CD.
4 (Information): Press this button to display theartist name and album contained in the ID3 tag.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhen a CD is playing. The inactive CD remainssafely inside the radio for future listening.
CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play aCD when listening to the radio. The CD symbolappears on the display when a CD is loaded.
Y (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD. Ejectcan activated with either the ignition or radio off.
264
XM Radio MessagesIf your vehicle has XM™ Satellite Radio Service, the radio may display some of the screen messages asshown in the XM™ Radio Message table. If any of these messages do appear on the radio display,follow the information and/or instructions provided in the table.
Radio Display Message Condition Action Required
XL (Explicit LanguageChannels)
XL on the radio display,after the channel name,indicates content withexplicit language.
These channels, or any others, can be blocked at acustomer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Updating Updating encryption code The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, andno action is required. This process should take no longerthan 30 seconds.
No Signal Loss of signal The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in alocation that is blocking the XM™ signal. When you moveinto an open area, the signal should return.
Loading XM Acquiring channel audio(after 4 second delay)
The audio system is acquiring and processing audio andtext data. No action is needed. This message shoulddisappear shortly.
CH Off Air Channel not in service This channel is not currently in service. Tune to anotherchannel.
CH Unavail Channel no longeravailable
This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.Tune to another station. If this station was one of thepresets, choose another station for that preset button.
265
Radio Display Message Condition Action Required
No Info Artist Name/Featurenot available
No artist information is available at this time on this channel.The system is working properly.
No Info Song/Program Titlenot available
No song title information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.
No Info Category Name notavailable
No category information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.
No Info No Text/Informationalmessage available
No text or informational messages are available at this timeon this channel. The system is working properly.
Not Found No channel available forthe chosen category
There are no channels available for the selected category.The system is working properly.
XM Locked Theft lock active The XM™ receiver in the vehicle may have previously beenin another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™ receiverscannot be swapped between vehicles. If this message isreceived after having your vehicle serviced, check with yourdealer.
Radio ID Radio ID label (channel 0) If tuned to channel 0, this message alternates with theXM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is neededto activate the service.
Unknown Radio ID not known(should only be ifhardware failure)
If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, therecould be a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer.
Chk XMRcvr Hardware failure If this message does not clear within a short period of time,your receiver could have a fault. Consult with your dealer.
266
Navigation/Radio SystemYour vehicle may have a navigation radio system.
The navigation system has built-in featuresintended to minimize driver distraction. Technologyalone, no matter how advanced, can neverreplace your own judgment. See the NavigationSystem manual for some tips to help youreduce distractions while driving.
Theft-Deterrent FeatureTHEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft ofyour vehicle’s radio. The feature worksautomatically by learning a portion of the VehicleIdentification Number (VIN). If the radio ismoved to a different vehicle, it will not operate andLOCKED will appear on the display.
With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio will notoperate if stolen.
Your radio has a blinking indicator light located onthe upper left side of the radio. The indicatorlight is used to show that the theft-deterrent featuremode is set. The blinking indicator light will onlyflash when the ignition is in the off position.
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
If your vehicle has thisfeature, some audiocontrols can be adjustedat the steering wheel.They include thefollowing:
x w: Press the up or the down arrow to go tothe next or to the previous radio station andstay there. The radio will only seek stations with astrong signal that are in the selected band.
To scan stations, press and hold either arrow fortwo seconds until SCAN appears on the displayand you hear a beep. The radio will go to a station,play for a few seconds, then go on to the nextstation. Press either arrow again to stop scanning.
267
To scan presets, press and hold either arrow forfour seconds until PRESET SCAN appears on thedisplay and you hear a beep. The radio will goto a station, play for a few seconds, then go on tothe next station. Press either arrow again tostop scanning.
When a CD is playing, press the up or the downarrow to go to the next or previous track.
To scan the current CD, press and hold either upor down arrow for more than two seconds. TheCD will go to the next track, play the first10 seconds, then go on to the next track. Presseither up or down arrow again to stop scanning.
To scan all of the CDs loaded, press and hold eitherup or down arrow for more than four seconds. TheCD will go to the next CD, play the first 10 secondsof each track, then go on to the next CD. Presseither up or down arrow again to stop scanning.
+ − (Volume): Press the plus or minus button toincrease or to decrease the volume.
1–6 (Preset Pushbuttons): Press this button toplay stations that are programmed on theradio preset pushbuttons. The radio will only seekpreset stations with a strong signal that are inthe selected band.
Radio ReceptionYou may experience frequency interference andstatic during normal radio reception if itemssuch as cellphone chargers, vehicle convenienceaccessories, and external electronic devicesare plugged into the accessory power outlet. Ifthere is interference or static, unplug the item fromthe accessory power outlet.
AMThe range for most AM stations is greater than forFM, especially at night. The longer range cancause station frequencies to interfere with eachother. For better radio reception, most AMradio stations will boost the power levels duringthe day, and then reduce these levels duringthe night. Static can also occur when things likestorms and power lines interfere with radioreception. When this happens, try reducing thetreble on your radio.
268
FM StereoFM stereo will give the best sound, but FM signalswill reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FMsignals, causing the sound to fade in and out.
XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceIf your vehicle as the XM™ Satellite RadioService, this type of radio service gives digitalradio reception from coast-to-coast in the48 contiguous United States, and in Canada. Justas with FM, tall buildings or hills can interferewith satellite radio signals, causing the sound tofade in and out. In addition, traveling or standingunder heavy foliage, bridges, garages, ortunnels may cause loss of the XM™ signal for aperiod of time. The radio may display NO SIGNALto indicate interference.
Care of Your CDsHandle CDs carefully. Store them in their originalcases or other protective cases and away fromdirect sunlight and dust. The CD player scans thebottom surface of the disc. If the surface of aCD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,or scratched, the CD will not play properly or notat all. If the surface of a CD is soiled, take asoft, lint free cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth ina mild, neutral detergent solution mixed withwater, and clean it. Make sure the wiping processstarts from the center to the edge.
Do not touch the bottom side of a CD whilehandling it; this could damage the surface. Pick upCDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge ofthe hole and the outer edge.
269
Care of the CD PlayerDo not use CD lens cleaners for CD playersbecause the lens of the CD optics can becomecontaminated by lubricants.
Diversity Antenna SystemThe AM-FM antenna is a hidden self tuningsystem. It optimizes the AM and FM signalsrelative to the vehicle’s position and radio stationsource. No maintenance or adjustments areneeded.
XM™ Satellite Radio AntennaSystemIf your vehicle has the XM™ Satellite RadioService, it will have an XM™ Satellite Radioantenna. This type of antenna is located on theroof or on the trunk lid of your vehicle. Keepthis antenna clear of snow and ice build up forclear radio reception.
270
Your Driving, the Road, andYour Vehicle ............................................ 272Defensive Driving ...................................... 272Drunken Driving ........................................ 273Control of a Vehicle .................................. 276Braking ...................................................... 276Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 277Braking in Emergencies ............................. 279Traction Control System (TCS) .................. 279Active Handling System ............................. 281Limited-Slip Rear Axle ............................... 283Selective Ride Control ............................... 284Steering .................................................... 284Off-Road Recovery .................................... 287Passing ..................................................... 287Loss of Control .......................................... 289Racing or Other Competitive Driving .......... 290
Driving at Night ......................................... 291Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ............ 293City Driving ............................................... 295Freeway Driving ........................................ 296Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................. 298Highway Hypnosis ..................................... 299Hill and Mountain Roads ........................... 300Winter Driving ........................................... 302If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud,
Ice, or Snow .......................................... 306Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out ........... 307Loading Your Vehicle ................................ 307
Towing ........................................................ 313Towing Your Vehicle ................................. 313Recreational Vehicle Towing ...................... 313Towing a Trailer ........................................ 313
Section 4 Driving Your Vehicle
271
Your Driving, the Road, andYour Vehicle
Defensive DrivingThe best advice anyone can give about driving is:Drive defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device inyour vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: TheyAre for Everyone on page 16.
{CAUTION:
Defensive driving really means “Be readyfor anything.” On city streets, rural roads,or expressways, it means “Always expectthe unexpected.” Assume that pedestriansor other drivers are going to be carelessand make mistakes. Anticipate what theymight do and be ready. Rear-end collisionsare about the most preventable ofaccidents. Yet they are common. Allowenough following distance. Defensivedriving requires that a driver concentrateon the driving task. Anything that distractsfrom the driving task makes properdefensive driving more difficult and caneven cause a collision, with resultinginjury. Ask a passenger to help do thesethings, or pull off the road in a safe place todo them. These simple defensive drivingtechniques could save your life.
272
Drunken DrivingDeath and injury associated with drinking anddriving is a national tragedy. It is the numberone contributor to the highway death toll,claiming thousands of victims every year.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs todrive a vehicle:
• Judgment
• Muscular Coordination
• Vision
• Attentiveness
Police records show that almost half of all motorvehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In mostcases, these deaths are the result of someone whowas drinking and driving. In recent years, morethan 16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deathshave been associated with the use of alcohol, withmore than 300,000 people injured.
Many adults — by some estimates, nearly halfthe adult population — choose never to drinkalcohol, so they never drive after drinking.For persons under 21, it is against the law inevery U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are goodmedical, psychological, and developmentalreasons for these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highwaysafety problem is for people never to drinkalcohol and then drive. But what if people do?How much is “too much” if someone plansto drive? It is a lot less than many might think.Although it depends on each person and situation,here is some general information on the problem.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) ofsomeone who is drinking depends uponfour things:
• The amount of alcohol consumed
• The drinker’s body weight
• The amount of food that is consumed beforeand during drinking
• The length of time it has taken the drinker toconsume the alcohol
273
According to the American Medical Association,a 180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end upwith a BAC of about 0.06 percent. The personwould reach the same BAC by drinking three4 ounce (120 ml) glasses of wine or three mixeddrinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces (45 ml) ofliquors like whiskey, gin, or vodka.
It is the amount of alcohol that counts. Forexample, if the same person drank three doublemartinis (3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each)within an hour, the person’s BAC would be closeto 0.12 percent. A person who consumes foodjust before or during drinking will have a somewhatlower BAC level.
There is a gender difference, too. Womengenerally have a lower relative percentage ofbody water than men. Since alcohol is carried inbody water, this means that a woman generally willreach a higher BAC level than a man of hersame body weight will when each has the samenumber of drinks.
The law in most U.S. states, and throughoutCanada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent. Insome other countries, the limit is even lower. Forexample, it is 0.05 percent in both France andGermany. The BAC limit for all commercial driversin the United States is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three tosix drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we haveseen, it depends on how much alcohol is in thedrinks, and how quickly the person drinks them.
274
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BACof 0.10 percent. Research shows that the drivingskills of many people are impaired at a BACapproaching 0.05 percent, and that the effects areworse at night. All drivers are impaired at BAClevels above 0.05 percent. Statistics show that thechance of being in a collision increases sharply fordrivers who have a BAC of 0.05 percent or above.A driver with a BAC level of 0.06 percent hasdoubled his or her chance of having a collision. At aBAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance of this driverhaving a collision is 12 times greater; at a level of0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of thealcohol in one drink. No amount of coffee ornumber of cold showers will speed that up.“I will be careful” is not the right answer. What ifthere is an emergency, a need to take suddenaction, as when a child darts into the street?A person with even a moderate BAC might not beable to react quickly enough to avoid thecollision.
There is something else about drinking and drivingthat many people do not know. Medical researchshows that alcohol in a person’s system can makecrash injuries worse, especially injuries to thebrain, spinal cord, or heart. This means that whenanyone who has been drinking — driver orpassenger — is in a crash, that person’s chanceof being killed or permanently disabled ishigher than if the person had not been drinking.
{CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes, perceptions,attentiveness, and judgment can beaffected by even a small amount ofalcohol. You can have a serious — oreven fatal — collision if you drive afterdrinking. Please do not drink and driveor ride with a driver who has beendrinking. Ride home in a cab; or if youare with a group, designate a driver whowill not drink.
275
Control of a VehicleYou have three systems that make yourvehicle go where you want it to go. They are thebrakes, the steering, and the accelerator. Allthree systems have to do their work at the placeswhere the tires meet the road.
Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow orice, it is easy to ask more of those control systemsthan the tires and road can provide. That meansyou can lose control of your vehicle. See TractionControl System (TCS) on page 279 and ActiveHandling System on page 281.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect yourvehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 318.
BrakingSee Brake System Warning Light on page 194.
Braking action involves perception time andreaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brakepedal. That is perception time. Then you have tobring up your foot and do it. That is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of asecond. But that is only an average. It mightbe less with one driver and as long as two orthree seconds or more with another. Age, physicalcondition, alertness, coordination, and eyesightall play a part. So do alcohol, drugs, andfrustration. But even in three-fourths of a second,a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in anemergency, so keeping enough space betweenyour vehicle and others is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances varygreatly with the surface of the road, whether it ispavement or gravel; the condition of the road,whether it is wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; thecondition of the brakes; the weight of the vehicle;and the amount of brake force applied.
276
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drivein spurts — heavy acceleration followed byheavy braking — rather than keeping pace withtraffic. This is a mistake. The brakes maynot have time to cool between hard stops. Thebrakes will wear out much faster if you do a lot ofheavy braking. If you keep pace with the trafficand allow realistic following distances, youwill eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. Thatmeans better braking and longer brake life.
If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you aredriving, brake normally but do not pump thebrakes. If you do, the pedal may get harder topush down. If the engine stops, you will still havesome power brake assist. But you will use itwhen you brake. Once the power assist is usedup, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedalwill be harder to push.
Under certain weather or operating conditions,occasional brake squeak, squeal, or other noisemay be heard with your vehicle’s performancebraking system. This brake system is designed forsuperior fade resistance and consistent operationusing high performance brake pads. Brake noise isnormal and does not affect system performance.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect yourvehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 318.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)Your vehicle has the Anti-Lock Brake System(ABS), an advanced electronic braking systemthat will help prevent a braking skid.
When you start your engine and begin to driveaway, ABS will check itself. You may hear amomentary motor or clicking noise while this testis going on, and you may even notice thatyour brake pedal moves a little. This is normal.
If there is a problemwith ABS, this warninglight will stay on.See Anti-Lock BrakeSystem WarningLight on page 195.
277
Let us say the road is wet and you are drivingsafely. Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front ofyou. You slam on the brakes and continue braking.Here is what happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately work the brakes at eachwheel.
ABS can change the brake pressure faster thanany driver could. The computer is programmedto make the most of available tire and roadconditions. This can help you steer around theobstacle while braking hard.
As you brake, your computer keeps receivingupdates on wheel speed and controls brakingpressure accordingly.
278
Remember: ABS does not change the time youneed to get your foot up to the brake pedalor always decrease stopping distance. If you gettoo close to the vehicle in front of you, you will nothave time to apply your brakes if that vehiclesuddenly slows or stops. Always leave enoughroom up ahead to stop, even though youhave ABS.
Using ABSDo not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedaldown firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You mayhear a motor or clicking noise and feel the brakepedal move a little during a stop, but this is normal.
Braking in EmergenciesWith ABS, you can steer and brake at the sametime. In many emergencies, steering can help youmore than even the very best braking.
Traction Control System (TCS)Your vehicle has a traction control system calledTCS that limits wheel spin. This is especially usefulin slippery road conditions. The system operatesonly if it senses that the rear wheels are spinningtoo much or are beginning to lose traction.When this happens, the system works the rearbrakes and reduces engine power (by closing thethrottle and managing engine spark) to limitwheel spin.
The TRACTION SYSTEM ACTIVE messagedisplays on the Driver Information Center (DIC)when the TCS system is limiting wheel spin. SeeDIC Warnings and Messages on page 212.You may feel or hear the system working, but thisis normal.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the TCSsystem begins to limit wheel spin, the cruisecontrol will automatically disengage. When roadconditions allow you to safely use it again,you may re-engage the cruise control. See TurnSignal/Multifunction Lever on page 158.
279
The SERVICETRACTION SYSTEMmessage and theTCS warning light willcome on to let you knowif there is a problemwith your TCS system.See DIC Warningsand Messageson page 212.
When this light and the SERVICE TRACTIONSYSTEM message are on, the system will not limitwheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
The TCS system automatically comes onwhenever you start your vehicle. To limit wheelspin, especially in slippery road conditions,you should always leave the system on. But youcan turn the TCS system off if you ever need to.
To turn the system off,press the button locatedon the console.
You can turn the system on or off at any time bypressing the ACTIVE HANDLING button. TheDIC will display the appropriate message whenyou push the button.
Notice: When traction control is turned off, orCompetitive Driving Mode is active, it ispossible to lose traction. If you attempt to shiftwith the rear wheels spinning with a loss oftraction, it is possible to cause damage to thetransmission. Do not attempt to shift when therear wheels do not have traction. Damagecaused by misuse of the vehicle is not covered.See your warranty book for additionalinformation.
280
Adding non-GM accessories can affect yourvehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 318 for more information.
Active Handling SystemThe Active Handling System is a computercontrolled system that helps the driver maintaindirectional control of the vehicle in difficult drivingconditions. This is accomplished by selectivelyapplying any one of the vehicle’s brakes.
When you first start your vehicle during cold winterweather and begin to drive away, the messageACTIVE HANDLING WARMING UP may bedisplayed in the DIC. This is normal. You canacknowledge this message by pressing the RESETbutton. The Active Handling System performance isaffected until the message, ACTIVE HANDLINGREADY, is displayed in the DIC.
The ACTIVE HANDLING CALIBRATING messagemay be displayed in the DIC and the instrumentpanel cluster light will be on after exceeding 18 mph(30 km/h) for 10 seconds. The Active HandlingSystem is off until the ACTIVE HANDLING READYmessage is displayed. This could take up to15 minutes.
The ACTIVE HANDLING message will come onwhen the system is operating. See DIC Warningsand Messages on page 212 for more information.You may also feel or hear the system working.This is normal.
The SERVICE ACTIVEHANDLING messagewill be displayed, theinstrument cluster lightwill come on, and achime will sound to letyou know if there is aproblem with the system.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 212 formore information.
When this light and the SERVICE ACTIVEHANDLING SYSTEM message are on, the systemis not operational. Adjust your driving accordingly.
281
The Active Handling System comes onautomatically whenever you start your vehicle. Tohelp maintain directional control of the vehicle, youshould always leave the system on. You can turnthe system off if you ever need to. If you turn theActive Handling System off, the Traction ControlSystem will also be turned off. Adjust your drivingaccordingly.
To turn the systemoff, press the ACTIVEHANDLING buttonon the console forfive seconds. You canturn the system on atany time by pressing thebutton. The DIC willdisplay the appropriatemessage when you pushthe button.
If the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) system detects aflat tire and the Driver Information Center (DIC)displays TIRE FLAT, or if the TPM system ismalfunctioning and the DIC displays SERVICETIRE MONITOR, the Active Handling System willbe affected as follows:
• The Active Handling System cannot be turnedoff by the driver.
• If the Active Handling System is off, it will beturned on automatically.
• Competitive Driving Mode is unavailable.
• The Active Handling System will feel different inaiding and maintaining directional control.
282
Competitive Driving ModeThe driver can select this optional handling modeby pressing the ACTIVE HANDLING button onthe console two times within a five secondtime period. COMPETITIVE DRIVING MODE willbe displayed in the DIC. Competitive DrivingMode allows the driver to have full control of therear wheels while the Active Handling Systemhelps maintain directional control of the vehicle byselective brake application. This involves lessintervention than with both the Active HandlingSystem and Traction Control Systems on.The instrument cluster light will not be on. TheTraction Control System will not be operating.Adjust your driving accordingly.
When you press the ACTIVE HANDLING buttonagain, or turn the ignition to Acc., the ActiveHandling and Traction Control Systems will be on.The TRACTION SYSTEM AND ACTIVEHANDLING-ON message will be displayedtemporarily in the DIC and a chime will be heard.
Notice: When traction control is turned off, orCompetitive Driving Mode is active, it ispossible to lose traction. If you attempt to shiftwith the rear wheels spinning with a loss oftraction, it is possible to cause damage to thetransmission. Do not attempt to shift whenthe rear wheels do not have traction. Damagecaused by misuse of the vehicle is notcovered. See your warranty book for additionalinformation.
Limited-Slip Rear AxleYour limited-slip rear axle can give you additionaltraction on snow, mud, ice, sand or gravel. Itworks like a standard axle most of the time, butwhen one of the rear wheels has no tractionand the other does, this feature will allowthe wheel with traction to move the vehicle.
283
Selective Ride ControlYou may have a ride control system on yourvehicle called Magnetic Selective Ride Control.The system provides the following performancebenefits:
• Reduced Impact Harshness
• Improved Road Isolation
• Improved High-Speed Stability
• Improved Handling Response
• Better Control of Body Ride Motions
This knob is located onthe center console. Turnit to select thesuspension of yourchoice.
TOUR: Use for normal city and highway driving.This setting provides a smooth, soft ride.
SPORT: Use where road conditions or personalpreference demand more control. This settingprovides more “feel”, or response to the roadconditions.
You can select a setting at any time. Based onroad conditions, steering wheel angle andyour vehicle speed, the system automaticallyadjusts to provide the best ride and handling.Select a new setting whenever driving conditionschange.
There are three Driver Information Center (DIC)messages that are displayed when a malfunctionoccurs with the Selective Ride Control system(SERVICE RIDE CONTROL, SHOCKSINOPERATIVE, MAXIMUM SPEED 80 MPH(129 KM/H). Refer to DIC Warnings and Messageson page 212 for more information.
Steering
Power SteeringIf you lose power steering assist because theengine stops or the system is not functioning, youcan steer but it will take much more effort.
284
Magnetic Speed Variable AssistSteeringYour vehicle has a steering system thatcontinuously adjusts the effort you feel whensteering at all vehicle speeds. It provides easewhen parking, yet a firm, solid feel at highwayspeeds.
Steering TipsIt is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentionedon the news happen on curves. Here is why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us issubject to the same laws of physics when driving oncurves. The traction of the tires against the roadsurface makes it possible for the vehicle to changeits path when you turn the front wheels. If there isno traction, inertia will keep the vehicle going in thesame direction. If you have ever tried to steer avehicle on wet ice, you will understand this.
The traction you can get in a curve depends onthe condition of the tires and the road surface, theangle at which the curve is banked, and yourspeed. While you are in a curve, speed is theone factor you can control.
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.Then you suddenly accelerate. Both controlsystems — steering and acceleration — have todo their work where the tires meet the road.Adding the sudden acceleration can demand toomuch of those places. You can lose control.See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 279.
What should you do if this ever happens? Easeup on the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle theway you want it to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that youshould adjust your speed. Of course, the postedspeeds are based on good weather and roadconditions. Under less favorable conditions you willwant to go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approacha curve, do it before you enter the curve, whilethe front wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” throughthe curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed.Wait to accelerate until you are out of the curve,and then accelerate gently into the straightaway.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect yourvehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 318.
285
Steering in EmergenciesThere are times when steering can be moreeffective than braking. For example, you comeover a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane,or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere, ora child darts out from between parked cars andstops right in front of you. You can avoidthese problems by braking — if you can stop intime. But sometimes you cannot; there is not room.That is the time for evasive action — steeringaround the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencieslike these. First apply your brakes.
See Braking on page 276. It is better to remove asmuch speed as you can from a possible collision.Then steer around the problem, to the left orright depending on the space available.
An emergency like this requires close attentionand a quick decision. If you are holding thesteering wheel at the recommended 9 and3 o’clock positions, you can turn it a full180 degrees very quickly without removing eitherhand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly,and just as quickly straighten the wheel once youhave avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are alwayspossible is a good reason to practice defensivedriving at all times and wear safety belts properly.
286
Off-Road RecoveryYou may find that your right wheels have droppedoff the edge of a road onto the shoulder whileyou are driving.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly belowthe pavement, recovery should be fairly easy.Ease off the accelerator and then, if thereis nothing in the way, steer so that your vehiclestraddles the edge of the pavement.
You can turn the steering wheel up to one-quarterturn until the right front tire contacts the pavementedge. Then turn your steering wheel to gostraight down the roadway.
PassingThe driver of a vehicle about to pass another on atwo-lane highway waits for just the right moment,accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, thengoes back into the right lane again. A simplemaneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on atwo-lane highway is a potentially dangerous move,since the passing vehicle occupies the same laneas oncoming traffic for several seconds. Amiscalculation, an error in judgment, or a briefsurrender to frustration or anger can suddenly putthe passing driver face to face with the worst of alltraffic accidents — the head-on collision.
287
So here are some tips for passing:
• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to thesides, and to crossroads for situationsthat might affect your passing patterns. If youhave any doubt whatsoever about makinga successful pass, wait for a better time.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, andlines. If you can see a sign up ahead that mightindicate a turn or an intersection, delay yourpass. A broken center line usually indicates it isall right to pass, providing the road ahead isclear. Never cross a solid line on your side ofthe lane or a double solid line, even if the roadseems empty of approaching traffic.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want topass while you are awaiting an opportunity. Forone thing, following too closely reduces yourarea of vision, especially if you are following alarger vehicle. Also, you will not have adequatespace if the vehicle ahead suddenly slows orstops. Keep back a reasonable distance.
• When it looks like a chance to pass is comingup, start to accelerate but stay in the right laneand do not get too close. Time your move soyou will be increasing speed as the time comes
to move into the other lane. If the way is clear topass, you will have a running start that morethan makes up for the distance you would loseby dropping back. And if something happens tocause you to cancel your pass, you need onlyslow down and drop back again and wait foranother opportunity.
• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slowvehicle, wait your turn. But take care thatsomeone is not trying to pass you as you pullout to pass the slow vehicle. Remember toglance over your shoulder and check theblind spot.
• Check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over yourshoulder, and start your left lane change signalbefore moving out of the right lane to pass.When you are far enough ahead of the passedvehicle to see its front in your vehicle’s insidemirror, activate the right lane change signal andmove back into the right lane. Remember thatyour vehicle’s passenger side outside mirror isconvex. The vehicle you just passed may seemto be farther away from you than it really is.
288
• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a timeon two-lane roads. Reconsider before passingthe next vehicle.
• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle toorapidly. Even though the brake lamps arenot flashing, it may be slowing down or startingto turn.
• If you are being passed, make it easy for thefollowing driver to get ahead of you. Perhapsyou can ease a little to the right.
Loss of ControlLet us review what driving experts say about whathappens when the three control systems — brakes,steering, and acceleration — do not have enoughfriction where the tires meet the road to do what thedriver has asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying tosteer and constantly seek an escape route orarea of less danger.
SkiddingIn a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.Defensive drivers avoid most skids by takingreasonable care suited to existing conditions, andby not overdriving those conditions. But skidsare always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to yourvehicle’s three control systems. In the braking skid,your wheels are not rolling. In the steering orcornering skid, too much speed or steering in acurve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force.And in the acceleration skid, too much throttlecauses the driving wheels to spin.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing yourfoot off the accelerator pedal.
Remember: Any traction control system helpsavoid only the acceleration skid. If your tractioncontrol system is off, then an accelerationskid is also best handled by easing your foot offthe accelerator pedal.
289
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot offthe accelerator pedal and quickly steer theway you want the vehicle to go. If you startsteering quickly enough, your vehicle maystraighten out. Always be ready for a second skidif it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow,ice, gravel, or other material is on the road.For safety, you will want to slow down and adjustyour driving to these conditions. It is importantto slow down on slippery surfaces becausestopping distance will be longer and vehicle controlmore limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, tryyour best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, orbraking, including reducing vehicle speed byshifting to a lower gear. Any sudden changes couldcause the tires to slide. You may not realize thesurface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding.Learn to recognize warning clues — such asenough water, ice, or packed snow on the road tomake a mirrored surface — and slow down whenyou have any doubt.
Remember: Any Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)helps avoid only the braking skid.
Racing or Other Competitive DrivingSee your warranty book before using yourvehicle for racing or other competitive driving.
Notice: If you use your vehicle for racing orother competitive driving, the engine mayuse more oil than it would with normal use.Low oil levels can damage the engine. Forinformation on how to add oil, see Engine Oilon page 332.
Z06 Only: Be sure to check the oil level oftenduring racing or other competitive drivingand keep the level at or near the upper markthat shows the proper operating range onthe engine oil dipstick.
Except Z06: Be sure to check the oil leveloften during racing or other competitive drivingand keep the level at or near 1 quart (1 L)above the upper mark that shows the properoperating range on the engine oil dipstick.After the competitive driving, remove excessoil so that the level on the dipstick is not abovethe upper mark that shows the properoperating range.
290
Vehicles with the Z51 performance package havegreaseable outer ends on both of the reartoe-links. Under normal use, lubrication should beperformed as described in the maintenanceschedule. See Scheduled Maintenance onpage 433 and Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 443. If you use the vehicle forracing, lubrication should be performed at theend of each racing day. See your dealer forlubrication and make sure any needed repairs aremade at once. Proper procedures for performingthese services can be found in the service manual.See Service Publications Ordering Informationon page 471.
Driving at NightNight driving is more dangerous than day driving.One reason is that some drivers are likely tobe impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with nightvision problems, or by fatigue.
Here are some tips on night driving.
• Drive defensively.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reduce theglare from headlamps behind you.
• Since you cannot see as well, you may needto slow down and keep more space betweenyou and other vehicles.
• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads.Your vehicle’s headlamps can light up only somuch road ahead.
• In remote areas, watch for animals.
• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safeplace and rest.
291
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.But as we get older these differences increase.A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice asmuch light to see the same thing at night as a20-year-old.
What you do in the daytime can also affect yournight vision. For example, if you spend theday in bright sunshine you are wise to wearsunglasses. Your eyes will have less troubleadjusting to night. But if you are driving, do notwear sunglasses at night. They may cut down onglare from headlamps, but they also make alot of things invisible.
You can be temporarily blinded by approachingheadlamps. It can take a second or two, oreven several seconds, for your eyes to re-adjustto the dark. When you are faced with severe glare,as from a driver who does not lower the highbeams, or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps,slow down a little. Avoid staring directly intothe approaching headlamps.
Keep the windshield and all the glass on yourvehicle clean — inside and out. Glare at night ismade much worse by dirt on the glass. Eventhe inside of the glass can build up a film causedby dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzle andflash more than clean glass would, making thepupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that the headlamps light up far less of aroadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep youreyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimlylighted objects. Just as the headlamps should bechecked regularly for proper aim, so should youreyes be examined regularly. Some drivers sufferfrom night blindness — the inability to see in dimlight — and are not even aware of it.
292
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On awet road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turn aswell because your tire-to-road traction is not asgood as on dry roads. And, if your tires do not havemuch tread left, you will get even less traction. It isalways wise to go slower and be cautious if rainstarts to fall while you are driving. The surface mayget wet suddenly when your reflexes are tuned fordriving on dry pavement.
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see.Even if your windshield wiper blades are in goodshape, a heavy rain can make it harder to seeroad signs and traffic signals, pavement markings,the edge of the road, and even people walking.
It is wise to keep your windshield wiping equipmentin good shape and keep your windshield washerfluid reservoir filled with washer fluid. Replace yourwindshield wiper inserts when they show signsof streaking or missing areas on the windshield, orwhen strips of rubber start to separate from theinserts.
{CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause accidents. Theymay not work as well in a quick stop andmay cause pulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle ofwater or a car wash, apply your brake pedallightly until your brakes work normally.
293
Driving too fast through large water puddles oreven going through some car washes can causeproblems, too. The water may affect your brakes.Try to avoid puddles. But if you cannot, try to slowdown before you hit them.
HydroplaningHydroplaning is dangerous. So much water canbuild up under your tires that they can actually rideon the water. This can happen if the road is wetenough and you are going fast enough. When yourvehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contactwith the road.
Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it canif your tires do not have much tread or if thepressure in one or more is low. It can happen ifa lot of water is standing on the road. If youcan see reflections from trees, telephone poles, orother vehicles, and raindrops dimple the water’ssurface, there could be hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds.There just is not a hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is to slow downwhen it is raining.
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
Notice: If you drive too quickly through deeppuddles or standing water, water can come inthrough your engine’s air intake and badlydamage your engine. Never drive through waterthat is slightly lower than the underbody of yourvehicle. If you cannot avoid deep puddles orstanding water, drive through them very slowly.
Driving Through Flowing Water
{CAUTION:
Flowing or rushing water creates strongforces. If you try to drive through flowingwater, as you might at a low watercrossing, your vehicle can be carried away.As little as six inches of flowing water cancarry away a smaller vehicle. If thishappens, you and other vehicle occupantscould drown. Do not ignore police warningsigns, and otherwise be very cautiousabout trying to drive through flowing water.
294
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips• Besides slowing down, allow some extra
following distance. And be especially carefulwhen you pass another vehicle. Allow yourselfmore clear room ahead, and be prepared tohave your view restricted by road spray.
• Have good tires with proper tread depth.See Tires on page 378.
City Driving
One of the biggest problems with city streets isthe amount of traffic on them. You will wantto watch out for what the other drivers are doingand pay attention to traffic signals.
295
Here are ways to increase your safety in citydriving:
• Know the best way to get to where you aregoing. Get a city map and plan your tripinto an unknown part of the city just as youwould for a cross-country trip.
• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscrossmost large cities. You will save time andenergy. See Freeway Driving on page 296.
• Treat a green light as a warning signal. Atraffic light is there because the corner isbusy enough to need it. When a light turnsgreen, and just before you start to move,check both ways for vehicles that have notcleared the intersection or may be running thered light.
Freeway Driving
Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways,parkways, expressways, turnpikes, orsuperhighways — are the safest of all roads.But they have their own special rules.
296
The most important advice on freeway drivingis: Keep up with traffic and keep to the right.Drive at the same speed most of the other driversare driving. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaksa smooth traffic flow. Treat the left lane ona freeway as a passing lane.
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leadsto the freeway. If you have a clear view of thefreeway as you drive along the entrance ramp, youshould begin to check traffic. Try to determinewhere you expect to blend with the flow. Try tomerge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed.Switch on your turn signal, check your mirrors, andglance over your shoulder as often as necessary.Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speedto the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if itis slower. Stay in the right lane unless you wantto pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors.Then use your turn signal.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quicklyover your shoulder to make sure there is notanother vehicle in your blind spot.
Once you are moving on the freeway, makecertain you allow a reasonable following distance.
Expect to move slightly slower at night.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to theproper lane well in advance. If you miss yourexit, do not, under any circumstances, stop andback up. Drive on to the next exit.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quitesharply. The exit speed is usually posted. Reduceyour speed according to your speedometer, notto your sense of motion. After driving for anydistance at higher speeds, you may tend to thinkyou are going slower than you actually are.
297
Before Leaving on a Long TripMake sure you are ready. Try to be well rested.If you must start when you are not fresh — suchas after a day’s work — do not plan to maketoo many miles that first part of the journey. Wearcomfortable clothing and shoes you can easilydrive in.
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep itserviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it needsservice, have it done before starting out. Of course,you will find experienced and able service expertsin GM dealerships all across North America. Theywill be ready and willing to help if you need it.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoirfull? Are all windows clean inside and outside?
• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have youchecked all levels?
• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lensesclean?
• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enoughfor long-distance driving? Are the tiresall inflated to the recommended pressure?
• Weather Forecasts: What is the weatheroutlook along your route? Should youdelay your trip a short time to avoid a majorstorm system?
• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
298
Highway HypnosisIs there actually such a condition as highwayhypnosis? Or is it just plain falling asleep at thewheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lack ofawareness, or whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of roadwith the same scenery, along with the hum of thetires on the road, the drone of the engine, and therush of the wind against the vehicle that can makeyou sleepy. Do not let it happen to you! If it does,your vehicle can leave the road in less than asecond, and you could crash and be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis?First, be aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated,with a comfortably cool interior.
• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road aheadand to the sides. Check your rearview mirrorsand your instruments frequently.
• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,service, or parking area and take a nap, getsome exercise, or both. For safety, treatdrowsiness on the highway as an emergency.
299
Hill and Mountain Roads
Driving on steep hills or mountains is differentfrom driving in flat or rolling terrain.
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you areplanning to visit there, here are some tips thatcan make your trips safer and more enjoyable.
• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Checkall fluid levels and also the brakes, tires,cooling system, and transmission. These partscan work hard on mountain roads.
{CAUTION:
If you do not shift down, your brakescould get so hot that they would not workwell. You would then have poor braking oreven none going down a hill. You couldcrash. Shift down to let your engine assistyour brakes on a steep downhill slope.
300
{CAUTION:
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or withthe ignition off is dangerous. Your brakeswill have to do all the work of slowingdown. They could get so hot that theywould not work well. You would then havepoor braking or even none going down ahill. You could crash. Always have yourengine running and your vehicle in gearwhen you go downhill.
• Know how to go down hills. The most importantthing to know is this: let your engine do some ofthe slowing down. Shift to a lower gear whenyou go down a steep or long hill.
• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shiftdown to a lower gear. The lower gears helpcool your engine and transmission, and you canclimb the hill better.
• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-laneroads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wideor cut across the center of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in your own lane.
• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. Therecould be something in your lane, like a stalledcar or an accident.
• You may see highway signs on mountains thatwarn of special problems. Examples are longgrades, passing or no-passing zones, a fallingrocks area, or winding roads. Be alert to theseand take appropriate action.
301
Winter Driving
Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You may want to put winter emergencysupplies in your vehicle.
Also see Tires on page 378.
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, asupply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, somewinter outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight,a red cloth, and a couple of reflective warningtriangles. And, if you will be driving under severeconditions, include a small bag of sand, apiece of old carpet, or a couple of burlap bagsto help provide traction. Be sure you properlysecure these items in your vehicle.
302
Driving On Snow or IceMost of the time, those places where the tiresmeet the road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between the tiresand the road, you can have a very slipperysituation. You will have a lot less traction, or grip,and will need to be very careful.
What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very coldsnow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on.But wet ice can be even more trouble because itmay offer the least traction of all. You can getwet ice when it is about freezing, 32°F (0°C), andfreezing rain begins to fall. Try to avoid drivingon wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there.
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed,blowing, or loose snow — drive with caution.
Traction control improves your ability to acceleratewhen driving on a slippery road. Even though yourvehicle has a traction control system, you will wantto slow down and adjust your driving to the roadconditions. Under certain conditions, you may wantto turn the traction control system off, such as whendriving through deep snow and loose gravel, to helpmaintain vehicle motion at lower speeds. SeeTraction Control System (TCS) on page 279. TheActive Handling System may also activate. SeeActive Handling System on page 281.
303
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) improves yourvehicle’s stability when you make a hard stopon a slippery road. Even though you have ABS,you will want to begin stopping sooner thanyou would on dry pavement. See Anti-Lock BrakeSystem (ABS) on page 277.
• Allow greater following distance on anyslippery road.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might befine until you hit a spot that is covered withice. On an otherwise clear road, ice patchesmay appear in shaded areas where thesun cannot reach, such as around clumps oftrees, behind buildings, or under bridges.Sometimes the surface of a curve or anoverpass may remain icy when thesurrounding roads are clear. If you see apatch of ice ahead of you, brake before youare on it. Try not to brake while you areactually on the ice, and avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers.
If You Are Caught in a BlizzardIf you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be ina serious situation. You should probably staywith your vehicle unless you know for sure that youare near help and you can hike through thesnow. Here are some things to do to summonhelp and keep yourself and your passengers safe:
• Turn on your hazard flashers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert policethat you have been stopped by the snow.
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket aroundyou. If you do not have blankets or extraclothing, make body insulators fromnewspapers, burlap bags, rags, floormats — anything you can wrap aroundyourself or tuck under your clothing tokeep warm.
304
You can run the engine to keep warm, but becareful.
{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases underyour vehicle. This can cause deadly CO(carbon monoxide) gas to get inside.CO could overcome you and kill you. Youcannot see it or smell it, so you might notknow it is in your vehicle. Clear awaysnow from around the base of yourvehicle, especially any that is blockingyour exhaust pipe. And check aroundagain from time to time to be sure snowdoes not collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side ofthe vehicle that is away from the wind.This will help keep CO out.
Run your engine only as long as you must. Thissaves fuel. When you run the engine, make it go alittle faster than just idle. That is, push theaccelerator slightly. This uses less fuel for theheat that you get and it keeps the battery charged.
305
You will need a well-charged battery to restart thevehicle, and possibly for signaling later on withyour headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.
Then, shut the engine off and close the windowalmost all the way to preserve the heat. Startthe engine again and repeat this only when youfeel really uncomfortable from the cold. But do it aslittle as possible. Preserve the fuel as long asyou can. To help keep warm, you can get out ofthe vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercisesevery half hour or so until help comes.
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice, or SnowIn order to free your vehicle when it is stuck,you will need to spin the wheels, but you do notwant to spin your wheels too fast. The methodknown as rocking can help you get out whenyou are stuck, but you must use caution.
{CAUTION:
If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and you orothers could be injured. And, thetransmission or other parts of the vehiclecan overheat. That could cause an enginecompartment fire or other damage. Whenyou are stuck, spin the wheels as little aspossible. Do not spin the wheels above35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on thespeedometer.
Notice: Spinning the wheels can destroyparts of your vehicle as well as the tires.If you spin the wheels too fast while shiftingthe transmission back and forth, you candestroy the transmission.
For information about using tire chains on yourvehicle, see Tire Chains on page 401.
306
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It OutFirst, turn the steering wheel left and right.That will clear the area around the front wheels.You should turn the traction control systemoff. See Traction Control System (TCS) onpage 279. Then shift back and forth betweenREVERSE (R) and a forward gear, spinning thewheels as little as possible. For a manualtransmission, shift slowly between either FIRST (1)or SECOND (2) and REVERSE (R), allowing thewheels to stop before shifting into gear. Releasethe accelerator pedal while you shift, andpress lightly on the accelerator pedal when thetransmission is in gear. By slowly spinningthe wheels in the forward and reverse directions,you will cause a rocking motion that may freeyour vehicle. If that does not get your vehicle outafter a few tries, it may need to be towed out.If your vehicle does need to be towed out,see Towing Your Vehicle on page 313.
Loading Your VehicleIt is very important to know how much weightyour vehicle can carry. This weight is called thevehicle capacity weight and includes the weight ofall occupants, cargo and all nonfactory-installedoptions. Two labels on your vehicle show how muchweight it may properly carry, the Tire and LoadingInformation label and the Certification label.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier thanthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,parts on your vehicle can break, and itcan change the way your vehicle handles.These could cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading can shortenthe life of your vehicle.
307
Tire and Loading Information Label A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Informationlabel is attached to the center pillar (B-pillar)of your vehicle. With the driver’s door open, youwill find the label attached below the doorlatch. This label shows the number of occupantseating positions (A), and the maximum vehiclecapacity weight (B) in kilograms and pounds.
The Tire and Loading Information label also showsthe size of the original equipment tires (C) andthe recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).For more information on tires and inflation seeTires on page 378 and Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 386.
There is also important loading information on thevehicle Certification label. It tells you the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rearaxle. See “Certification Label” later in thissection.
Label Example
308
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit1. Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should neverexceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on yourvehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driverand passengers that will be riding in yourvehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driverand passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the availableamount of cargo and luggage load capacity.For example, if the “XXX” amount equals1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle, the amount ofavailable cargo and luggage load capacity is650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggageand cargo being loaded on the vehicle. Thatweight may not safely exceed the availablecargo and luggage load capacity calculatedin Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the loadfrom your trailer will be transferred to yourvehicle. Consult this manual to determine howthis reduces the available cargo and luggageload capacity of your vehicle.Your vehicle is neither designed nor intendedto tow a trailer.
309
Item Description Total
A Vehicle CapacityWeight for Example 1 = 400 lbs (181 kg)
BSubtractOccupant Weight @150 lbs (68 kg) x 1 =
150 lbs (68 kg)
C Available Occupantand Cargo Weight = 250 lbs (113 kg)
Item Description Total
A Vehicle CapacityWeight for Example 2 = 400 lbs (181 kg)
BSubtractOccupant Weight @150 lbs (68 kg) x 2 =
300 lbs (136 kg)
C Available CargoWeight = 100 lbs (45 kg)
Example 1 Example 2
310
Item Description Total
A Vehicle CapacityWeight for Example 3 = 400 lbs (181 kg)
BSubtractOccupant Weight @200 lbs (91 kg) x 2 =
400 lbs (181 kg)
C Available CargoWeight = 0 lbs (0 kg)
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading informationlabel for specific information about your vehicle’scapacity weight and seating positions. Thecombined weight of the driver, passengers andcargo should never exceed your vehicle’s capacityweight.
Certification Label
A vehicle specific Certification label is attached tothe rear edge of the driver’s door. It tells youthe gross weight capacity of your vehicle, calledthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, alloccupants, fuel and cargo. Never exceed theGVWR for your vehicle, or the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) for either the front or rear axle.
Example 3
311
Do not load your vehicle with more weight than itwas designed to carry. See “Steps for DeterminingCorrect Load Limit” earlier in this section.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier thanthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,parts on your vehicle can break, and itcan change the way your vehicle handles.These could cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading can shortenthe life of your vehicle.
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may causedamage. Repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
If you put things inside your vehicle — likesuitcases, tools, packages or anything else — theywill go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you haveto stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, theywill keep going.
{CAUTION:
Things you put inside your vehicle canstrike and injure people in a sudden stopor turn, or in a crash.
• Put things in the rear area of yourvehicle. Try to spread the weightevenly.
• Never stack heavier things, likesuitcases, inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are above the tops ofthe seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured childrestraint in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside thevehicle, secure it whenever you can.
312
Towing
Towing Your VehicleConsult your dealer or a professional towingservice if you need to have your disabled vehicletowed. See Roadside Assistance Program onpage 458.
Recreational Vehicle TowingRecreational vehicle towing means towing yourvehicle behind another vehicle — such as behinda motorhome. The two most common types ofrecreational vehicle towing are known as “dinghytowing”, towing your vehicle with all four wheelson the ground, and “dolly towing”, towing yourvehicle with two wheels on the ground andtwo wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”.
Your vehicle was not designed to be towedwith any of its wheels on the ground. If yourvehicle must be towed, see “Towing Your Vehicle”earlier in this section.
Towing a TrailerYour Corvette is neither designed nor intended totow a trailer.
313
✍ NOTES
314
Service ........................................................ 318Accessories and Modifications ................... 318California Proposition 65 Warning .............. 319Doing Your Own Service Work .................. 319Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle .......................................... 320Fuel ............................................................. 320
Gasoline Octane ........................................ 320Gasoline Specifications .............................. 321California Fuel ........................................... 321Additives ................................................... 322Fuels in Foreign Countries ........................ 323Filling the Tank ......................................... 323Filling a Portable Fuel Container ............... 326
Checking Things Under the Hood .............. 326Hood Release ........................................... 327Engine Compartment Overview .................. 328Engine Oil ................................................. 332Engine Oil Life System .............................. 340Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ............................ 342Automatic Transmission Fluid .................... 345
Manual Transmission Fluid ........................ 346Hydraulic Clutch ........................................ 346Engine Coolant .......................................... 347Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap ............ 350Engine Overheating ................................... 350Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode ..................................... 352Cooling System ......................................... 352Power Steering Fluid ................................. 357Windshield Washer Fluid ........................... 359Brakes ...................................................... 360Battery ...................................................... 363Jump Starting ............................................ 364
Rear Axle .................................................... 370Bulb Replacement ....................................... 370
High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting ..... 371Halogen Bulbs ........................................... 371Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, and
Parking Lamps ....................................... 372Taillamps, Turn Signal, and Stoplamps ...... 373Replacement Bulbs ................................... 374
Section 5 Service and Appearance Care
315
Windshield Replacement ............................ 374Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ....... 375Tires ............................................................ 378
Winter Tires .............................................. 379Tire Sidewall Labeling ............................... 380Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 382Extended Mobility Tires ............................. 384Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................. 386High-Speed Operation ............................... 388Tire Pressure Monitor System ................... 389Tire Rotation ............................................. 392When It Is Time for New Tires .................. 393Buying New Tires ...................................... 393Different Size Tires and Wheels ................ 395Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..................... 396Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ............ 397Wheel Replacement .................................. 398Tire Chains ............................................... 401Lifting Your Vehicle ................................... 402If a Tire Goes Flat .................................... 406
Appearance Care ........................................ 407Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 407Fabric/Carpet ............................................. 409Coated Moldings ....................................... 409Leather ...................................................... 410Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic
Surfaces ................................................ 410Cargo Cover and Convenience Net ........... 411Care of Safety Belts .................................. 411Weatherstrips ............................................ 411Washing Your Vehicle ............................... 411Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................ 412Finish Care ............................................... 412Windshield and Wiper Blades .................... 413Removable Roof Panel .............................. 414Convertible Top ......................................... 414Aluminum Wheels ...................................... 415Tires ......................................................... 415Finish Damage .......................................... 416Underbody Maintenance ............................ 416Fiberglass Springs (Composite Springs) ..... 416Chemical Paint Spotting ............................ 416Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ............ 417
Section 5 Service and Appearance Care
316
Vehicle Identification .................................. 418Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ........... 418Service Parts Identification Label ............... 418
Electrical System ........................................ 419Add-On Electrical Equipment ..................... 419Headlamp Wiring ....................................... 419Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................ 419
Power Windows and Other PowerOptions .................................................. 420
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ....................... 420Instrument Panel Fuse Block ..................... 420Engine Compartment Fuse Block ............... 424
Capacities and Specifications .................... 427
Section 5 Service and Appearance Care
317
ServiceYour dealer knows your vehicle best and wantsyou to be happy with it. We hope you will goto your dealer for all your service needs. You willget genuine GM parts and GM-trained andsupported service people.
We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle allGM. Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
Accessories and ModificationsWhen you add non-GM accessories to your vehiclethey can affect your vehicle’s performance andsafety, including such things as, airbags, braking,stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systemslike anti-lock brakes, traction control andstability control. Some of these accessories mayeven cause malfunction or damage not covered bywarranty.
GM Accessories are designed to complement andfunction with other systems on your vehicle.Your GM dealer can accessorize your vehicleusing genuine GM Accessories. When you go toyour GM dealer and ask for GM Accessories,you will know that GM-trained and supportedservice technicians will perform the work usinggenuine GM Accessories.
318
California Proposition 65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including this one, containand/or emit chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth defects or otherreproductive harm. Engine exhaust, many parts andsystems (including some inside the vehicle), manyfluids, and some component wear by-productscontain and/or emit these chemicals.
Doing Your Own Service Work
{CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle couldbe damaged if you try to do service workon a vehicle without knowing enoughabout it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,experience, the proper replacementparts, and tools before you attempt anyvehicle maintenance task.
CAUTION: (Continued)
CAUTION: (Continued)
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts,and other fasteners. English andmetric fasteners can be easilyconfused. If you use the wrongfasteners, parts can later break or falloff. You could be hurt.
If you want to do some of your own service work,you will want to use the proper service manual.It tells you much more about how to service yourvehicle than this manual can. To order theproper service manual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 471.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Beforeattempting to do your own service work, seeServicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 64.
You should keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date of any servicework you perform. See Maintenance Recordon page 447.
319
Adding Equipment to the Outside ofYour VehicleThings you might add to the outside of yourvehicle can affect the airflow around it. This maycause wind noise and affect windshield washerperformance. Check with your dealer beforeadding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.
FuelUse of the recommended fuel is an important partof the proper maintenance of your vehicle. Tohelp keep your engine clean and maintain optimumvehicle performance, GM recommends the useof gasoline advertised as TOP TIER DetergentGasoline.
The 8th digit of your Vehicle Identification Number(VIN) shows the code letter or number thatidentifies your engine. You will find the VIN at thetop left of the instrument panel. See VehicleIdentification Number (VIN) on page 418.
Gasoline OctaneIf your vehicle has the 6.0L V8 engine (VINCode U), use premium unleaded gasoline with aposted octane rating of 91 or higher. You may alsouse regular unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octaneor higher, but your vehicle’s acceleration maybe slightly reduced, and you may notice a slightaudible knocking noise, commonly referred toas spark knock. If the octane is less than 87, youmay notice a heavy knocking noise when youdrive. If this occurs, use a gasoline rated at87 octane or higher as soon as possible.Otherwise, you might damage your engine. If youare using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higherand you hear heavy knocking, your engine needsservice.
If your vehicle has the 7.0L V8 engine (VINCode E), use premium unleaded gasoline with aposted octane rating of 91 or higher. For bestperformance, use premium unleaded gasoline witha posted octane rating of 93.
320
In an emergency, you can use regular unleadedgasoline with an octane rating of 87 or higher. If87 octane fuel is used, do not perform anyaggressive driving maneuvers such as wide openthrottle applications. You may also hear audiblespark knock during acceleration. Refill yourtank with premium fuel as soon as possible toavoid damaging your engine. If you are usinggasoline rated at 91 octane or higher and you hearheavy knocking, your engine needs service.
Gasoline SpecificationsAt a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTMspecification D 4814 in the United States orCAN/CGSB-3.5 in Canada. Some gasolines maycontain an octane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl(MMT). General Motors recommends against theuse of gasolines containing MMT. See Additiveson page 322 for additional information.
California FuelIf your vehicle is certified to meet CaliforniaEmissions Standards, it is designed to operate onfuels that meet California specifications. Seethe underhood emission control label. If this fuel isnot available in states adopting Californiaemissions standards, your vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meeting federalspecifications, but emission control systemperformance may be affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp may turn on and your vehicle mayfail a smog-check test. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp on page 198. If this occurs, return toyour authorized GM dealer for diagnosis. If it isdetermined that the condition is caused by the typeof fuel used, repairs may not be covered byyour warranty.
321
AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the UnitedStates are now required to contain additivesthat will help prevent engine and fuel systemdeposits from forming, allowing your emissioncontrol system to work properly. In most cases,you should not have to add anything to your fuel.However, some gasolines contain only theminimum amount of additive required to meetU.S. Environmental Protection Agency regulations.To help keep fuel injectors and intake valvesclean, or if your vehicle experiences problems dueto dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline thatis advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.Also, your dealer has additives that will helpcorrect and prevent most deposit-related problems.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethersand ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may beavailable in your area. General Motorsrecommends that you use these gasolines if theycomply with the specifications described earlier.
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuelscontaining more than 10% ethanol must not beused in vehicles that were not designed forthose fuels.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed forfuel that contains methanol. Do not usefuel containing methanol. It can corrode metalparts in your fuel system and also damagethe plastic and rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered under your warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for lowemissions may contain an octane-enhancingadditive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where youbuy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT.General Motors recommends against the use ofsuch gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can reducethe life of spark plugs and the performance ofthe emission control system may be affected. Themalfunction indicator lamp may turn on. If thisoccurs, return to your dealer for service.
322
Fuels in Foreign CountriesIf you plan on driving in another country outside theUnited States or Canada, the proper fuel may behard to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any otherfuel not recommended in the previous text on fuel.Costly repairs caused by use of improper fuel wouldnot be covered by your warranty.To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, orcontact a major oil company that does businessin the country where you will be driving.
Filling the Tank
{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel firecan cause bad injuries. To help avoidinjuries to you and others, read and followall the instructions on the pump island.Turn off your engine when you arerefueling. Do not smoke if you are nearfuel or refueling your vehicle.
CAUTION: (Continued)
CAUTION: (Continued)
Keep sparks, flames, and smokingmaterials away from fuel. Do not leave thefuel pump unattended when refueling yourvehicle. This is against the law in someplaces. Keep children away from the fuelpump; never let children pump fuel.
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hingedfuel door on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
323
The fuel door releasebutton is located on theinstrument panel to theleft of the steering wheel.Push the button torelease the fuel door.
There is also a manualfuel door release tab. Itis located againstthe upper trim in therear compartmenton the driver’s side ofthe vehicle. Pullthe tab to release thefuel door.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowlycounterclockwise. The fuel cap has a spring in it; ifthe cap is released too soon, it will spring backto the right.
While refueling, let the cap hang by the tetherbelow the fuel fill opening.
324
{CAUTION:
If you spill fuel and then somethingignites it, you could be badly burned. Fuelcan spray out on you if you open the fuelcap too quickly. This spray can happen ifyour tank is nearly full, and is more likelyin hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowlyand wait for any hiss noise to stop. Thenunscrew the cap all the way.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfillthe tank and wait a few seconds after you havefinished pumping before removing the nozzle.Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soonas possible. See Washing Your Vehicle onpage 411.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise untilit clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed.The diagnostic system can determine if the fuelcap has been left off or improperly installed.This would allow fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 198.
The CHECK GAS CAP message will be displayedon the Driver Information Center (DIC) if thefuel cap is not properly installed. See DICWarnings and Messages on page 212 for moreinformation.
{CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, donot remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow offuel by shutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant. Leave thearea immediately.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure toget the right type. Your dealer can get onefor you. If you get the wrong type, it may notfit properly. This may cause your malfunctionindicator lamp to light and may damageyour fuel tank and emissions system. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp on page 198.
325
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while itis in your vehicle. Static electricitydischarge from the container can ignite thegasoline vapor. You can be badly burnedand your vehicle damaged if this occurs.To help avoid injury to you and others:
• Dispense gasoline only into approvedcontainers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside avehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickupbed, or on any surface other than theground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with theinside of the fill opening beforeoperating the nozzle. Contact shouldbe maintained until the filling iscomplete.
• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.
Checking Things Underthe Hood
{CAUTION:
An electric fan under the hood can start upand injure you even when the engine is notrunning. Keep hands, clothing, and toolsaway from any underhood electric fan.
{CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engineparts and start a fire. These includeliquids like fuel, oil, coolant, brake fluid,windshield washer and other fluids, andplastic or rubber. You or others could beburned. Be careful not to drop or spillthings that will burn onto a hot engine.
326
Hood ReleaseTo open the hood, do the following:
1. Pull the hoodrelease lever withthis symbol onit. It is located insidethe vehicle belowthe instrumentpanel on thedriver’s side.
2. Go to the side of the vehicle and pull up onthe rear edge of the hood, near the windshield.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler capsare on properly. Then, just pull the hood downand close it firmly.
327
Engine Compartment OverviewIf your vehicle has the 6.0L LS2 V8 engine and you are facing the front, when you open the hood, here iswhat you will see:
328
A. Clutch Master Cylinder Reservoir (If Equipped).See Hydraulic Clutch on page 346.
B. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See“Adding Washer Fluid” under WindshieldWasher Fluid on page 359.
C. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid” underBrakes on page 360.
D. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap. SeeEngine Coolant on page 347.
E. Engine Air Cleaner/Filters. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 342.
F. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See PowerSteering Fluid on page 357.
G. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add EngineOil” under Engine Oil on page 332.
H. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”under Engine Oil on page 332.
I. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See EngineCompartment Fuse Block on page 424.
J. Passenger Compartment Air Filter (Out ofView). See Passenger Compartment Air Filteron page 184.
K. Battery. See Battery on page 363.
329
If your vehicle has the 7.0L LS7 V8 engine and you are facing the driver’s side of the vehicle, when youopen the hood, here is what you will see:
330
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 342.
B. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See PowerSteering Fluid on page 357.
C. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See EngineCompartment Fuse Block on page 424.
D. Remote Positive Terminal (Out of View). SeeBattery on page 363.
E. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”under Engine Oil on page 332.
F. Dry Sump Engine Oil Tank. See “ChangingEngine Oil and Filter (Z06 Only)” Engine Oil onpage 332.
G. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add EngineOil” under Engine Oil on page 332.
H. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap. SeeEngine Coolant on page 347.
I. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See“Adding Washer Fluid” under WindshieldWasher Fluid on page 359.
J. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid” underBrakes on page 360.
K. Clutch Master Cylinder Reservoir. SeeHydraulic Clutch on page 346.
331
Engine Oil
Checking Engine Oil (Except Z06)If the CHECK OIL LEVEL message on the DriverInformation Center (DIC) comes on, it meansyou need to check the engine oil level right away.For more information, see Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 205. You should check theengine oil level regularly; this is an addedreminder.
It is a good idea to check the engine oil levelevery time you get fuel. In order to get an accuratereading, the oil must be warm and the vehiclemust be on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.See Engine Compartment Overview on page 328for the location of the engine oil dipstick.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil a fewminutes to drain back into the oil pan. Ifyou do not do this, the oil dipstick might notshow the actual level.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with alint-free paper towel or a cloth, then pushit back in all the way. Remove it again,keeping the tip down.
Checking Engine Oil (Z06 Only)
A. Engine Oil DipstickB. Engine Oil Fill Cap
It is a good idea to check the engine oil levelevery time you get fuel. In order to get an accuratereading, the oil must be warm and the vehiclemust be on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.The dipstick is located on the dry sump engine oiltank. See Engine Compartment Overview onpage 328 for the location of the dry sump engineoil tank.
332
Z06 models have a racetrack-ready dry sumpengine lubrication system. This high-performancesystem operates differently than a standardengine lubrication system and requires a specialprocedure when checking the engine oil level.Follow this procedure closely when checking theengine oil level.
The engine oil level must be checked when theengine is warm. Cold oil level in the dry sump tankmay not indicate the actual amount of oil in thesystem. With this system, engine oil is contained inan external tank, separate from the engine.Under normal operating conditions, the oil panunder the engine does not store any oil. Ifthe vehicle has been parked for an extendedperiod without the engine being started, some oilwill seep back into the oil pan, reducing theamount of oil held in the dry sump tank and therecould be no engine oil at all showing on thedipstick. This is normal since the dipstick isdesigned to read engine oil level only after theengine has run long enough to reach normaloperating temperature.
Do not add engine oil based on cold enginedipstick readings. The engine oil level on thedipstick will also be inaccurate if checked while theengine is running.
1. To obtain an accurate engine oil levelreading, warm up the engine to at least175°F (80°C). Cold oil will not give a correctoil level reading.
2. Once the engine is warm, turn off the engine.Checking the oil while the engine is runningwill result in an incorrect oil level reading.
3. Wait at least five minutes (but not more than20 minutes) to allow oil to drain and settle inthe engine.
4. Remove the dipstick from the external engineoil tank and clean it with a lint-free papertowel or a cloth. Re-insert the dipstick into theexternal oil tank, pushing it all the way inuntil it stops.
5. Remove the dipstick from the oil tank andread the level on the cross-hatched area.Oil levels that fall in the cross-hatched areaare normal.
333
When to Add Engine Oil (Except Z06)
If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at thetip of the dipstick, you will need to add atleast one quart/liter of oil. But you must use theright kind. This section explains what kind of oilto use. For engine oil crankcase capacity,see Capacities and Specifications on page 427.
See Racing or Other Competitive Driving onpage 290 for additional information on engine oil.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the enginehas so much oil that the oil level gets abovethe cross-hatched area that shows theproper operating range, the engine could bedamaged.
See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 328 for thelocation of the engine oilfill cap.
Be sure to add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operating range. Pushthe dipstick all the way back in when you arethrough.
334
When to Add Engine Oil (Z06 Only)
If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at thetip of the dipstick, you will need to add atleast one quart/liter of oil through the oil fill capopening in the oil tank. But you must use the rightkind. This section explains what kind of oil touse. For engine oil crankcase capacity, seeCapacities and Specifications on page 427.
See Racing or Other Competitive Driving onpage 290 for additional information on engine oil.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the enginehas so much oil that the oil level gets abovethe cross-hatched area that shows theproper operating range, the engine could bedamaged.
See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 328 for thelocation of the externalengine oil tank andfill cap.
Be sure to add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operating range. Pushthe dipstick all the way back into the oil tank whenyou are through.
335
Changing Engine Oil and Filter(Z06 Only)Z06 models have a racetrack-ready dry sumpengine lubrication system. This high-performancesystem operates differently than a standardengine lubrication system and requires a specialprocedure when changing the engine oil and filter.Follow this procedure closely when changingthe engine oil and filter.
A. Engine Oil Drain PlugB. Seal
1. Remove the two engine oil drain plugs fromthe bottom of the engine oil pan. One drainplug drains the external oil tank via theoil transfer supply line. The other drain plugdrains residual oil from the crankcasesump. Allow the oil to drain.
336
2. Once the oil has been drained from theengine, remove the engine oil filter andallow the oil to drain.
3. Re-install both drain plugs and tighten them to18 lb ft (25 Y).
4. Replace the oil filter and tighten it to 18 lb ft(25 Y). See Normal MaintenanceReplacement Parts on page 445 for thecorrect filter.
5. Oil is filled through the opening in the top ofthe external engine oil tank. Remove the oilfill cap.
6. Add eight quarts (7.6 L) of oil to the oil tank.See Capacities and Specifications onpage 427.
7. Install the oil fill cap and insert the dipstick, ifremoved.
8. Start the engine and let it run at idle for atleast 15 seconds. This will circulate thefresh engine oil through the lubrication system.
9. Shut off the engine and check the oil level asdescribed under “Checking Engine Oil(Z06 Only).”
337
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use Look for two things:
• GM4718M
Your vehicle’s engine requires a special oilmeeting GM Standard GM4718M. Oils meetingthis standard may be identified as synthetic.However, not all synthetic oils will meet this GMstandard. You should look for and use only anoil that meets GM Standard GM4718M.
Notice: If you use oils that do not have theGM4718M Standard designation, you can causeengine damage not covered by your warranty.• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 isbest for your vehicle.These numbers on an oil container show itsviscosity, or thickness. Do not use otherviscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.
338
Oils meeting theserequirements shouldalso have the starburstsymbol on thecontainer. This symbolindicates that the oilhas been certified by theAmerican PetroleumInstitute (API).
You should look for this on the oil container, anduse only those oils that are identified as meetingGM Standard GM4718M and have the starburstsymbol on the front of the oil container.
Your vehicle’s engine is filled at the factory with aMobil 1® synthetic oil, which meets allrequirements for your vehicle.
Substitute Engine Oil: When adding oil to maintainengine oil level, oil meeting GM StandardGM4718M may not be available. You can addsubstitute oil designated SAE 5W-30 withthe starburst symbol at all temperatures. Substituteoil not meeting GM Standard GM4718M shouldnot be used for an oil change.
Engine Oil AdditivesDo not add anything to the oil. The recommendedoils with the starburst symbol that meet GMStandard GM4718M are all you will need for goodperformance and engine protection.
339
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine OilYour vehicle has a computer that lets you knowwhen to change your engine oil and filter.This is based on engine revolutions and enginetemperature, and not on mileage. Based on drivingconditions, the mileage at which an oil changewill be indicated can vary considerably. For the oillife system to work properly, you must reset thesystem every time the oil is changed.
Z06 models are equipped with a racetrack-readydry sump engine lubrication system. Thishigh-performance system operates differently thana standard engine lubrication system andrequires a special procedure when changing theengine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 332.
When the system has calculated that oil life hasbeen diminished, it will indicate that an oil change isnecessary. A CHANGE ENGINE OIL message willcome on. Change your oil as soon as possiblewithin the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possiblethat, if you are driving under the best conditions, theoil life system may not indicate that an oil change isnecessary for over a year. However, your engine oiland filter must be changed at least once a year andat this time the system must be reset. Your dealerhas GM-trained service people who will perform thiswork using genuine GM parts and reset the system.It is also important to check your oil regularly andkeep it at the proper level.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you mustchange your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km)since your last oil change. Remember to reset theoil life system whenever the oil is changed.
340
How to Reset the Engine Oil LifeSystemThe Engine Oil Life System calculates when tochange your engine oil and filter based on vehicleuse. Anytime your oil is changed, reset thesystem so it can calculate when the next oilchange is required. If a situation occurs where youchange your oil prior to a CHANGE ENGINEOIL message being turned on, reset the system.
To reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message afteran oil change, do the following:
1. Press the TRIP button so the OIL LIFEpercentage is displayed.
2. Press RESET and hold for two seconds. OILLIFE REMAINING 100% will appear.
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message comesback on when you start your vehicle, the engine oillife system has not reset. Repeat the procedure.
What to Do with Used OilUsed engine oil contains certain elements thatmay be unhealthy for your skin and couldeven cause cancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean your skin and nailswith soap and water, or a good hand cleaner.Wash or properly dispose of clothing or ragscontaining used engine oil. See the manufacturer’swarnings about the use and disposal of oilproducts.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If youchange your own oil, be sure to drain all the oilfrom the filter before disposal. Never dispose of oilby putting it in the trash, pouring it on theground, into sewers, or into streams or bodies ofwater. Instead, recycle it by taking it to a placethat collects used oil. If you have a problemproperly disposing of your used oil, ask yourdealer, a service station, or a local recyclingcenter for help.
341
Engine Air Cleaner/FilterSee Engine Compartment Overview on page 328for the location of the engine air cleaner/filters.
Notice: If you spray water into the engine aircleaner/filter intake and water enters theengine air cleaner/filter housing, you coulddamage your vehicle’s engine. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty. Do notspray water into the engine air cleaner/filterintake and/or housing.
If you are cleaning your vehicle with the hoodopen, take care not to spray water directlyinto either end of the air cleaner/filter housing, asshown in the illustration, as this could damageyour vehicle’s engine.
342
When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/FiltersInspect the air cleaner/filters at the Maintenance IIintervals and replace them at the first oil changeafter each 50,000 mile (83 000 km) interval.See Scheduled Maintenance on page 433 for moreinformation. If you are driving in dusty/dirtyconditions, inspect the filters at each engine oilchange.
How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filters (6.0L V8 Engine)To inspect the air cleaner/filters, remove the filtersfrom the vehicle and lightly shake the filters torelease loose dust and dirt. If the filters remaincaked with dirt, new filters are required.
To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filters,do the following:
1. Pull the latches on each side of the cover toopen, then move the latches up and out ofthe way.
2. Push the air cleaner/filter cover towardthe front of the vehicle and then pull it upand away.
343
3. Inspect or replace the filter. See NormalMaintenance Replacement Parts onpage 445.
4. Reverse Steps 1 and 2 to replace the aircleaner/filter cover.
5. Repeat the procedure for the second aircleaner/filter.
How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filters (7.0L V8 Engine)To inspect the air cleaner/filters, remove the filtersfrom the vehicle and lightly shake the filters torelease loose dust and dirt. If the filters remaincaked with dirt, new filters are required.
To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filters,do the following:
1. Remove the screws holding the filter elementin place.
2. Pull on latches found on either side of thefilter.
3. Inspect or replace the filter. See NormalMaintenance Replacement Parts onpage 445.
4. Reverse Steps 1 and 2 to replace the aircleaner/filter cover.
344
{CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you or othersto be burned. The air cleaner not onlycleans the air; it helps to stop flames ifthe engine backfires. If it is not there andthe engine backfires, you could beburned. Do not drive with it off, and becareful working on the engine with the aircleaner/filter off.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfirecan cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirtcan easily get into your engine, which willdamage it. Always have the air cleaner/filter inplace when you are driving.
Automatic Transmission Fluid
How to Check AutomaticTransmission FluidIt is not necessary to check the transmission fluidlevel. A transmission fluid leak is the onlyreason for fluid loss. If a leak occurs, take thevehicle to the dealership service department andhave it repaired as soon as possible.
There is a special procedure for checking andchanging the transmission fluid. Becausethis procedure is difficult, you should have thisdone at the dealership service department. Contactyour dealer for additional information or theprocedure can be found in the service manual. Topurchase a service manual, see ServicePublications Ordering Information on page 471.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatictransmission fluid may damage your vehicle,and the damages may not be covered byyour warranty. Always use the automatictransmission fluid listed in RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 443.
345
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed inAdditional Required Services on page 436, andbe sure to use the fluid listed in RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 443.
Manual Transmission FluidIt is not necessary to check the manualtransmission fluid level. A transmission fluid leak isthe only reason for fluid loss. If a leak occurs,take the vehicle to the dealership servicedepartment and have it repaired as soon aspossible. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 443 for the proper fluid to use.
Hydraulic ClutchIt is not necessary to regularly check clutch fluidunless you suspect there is a leak in the system.Adding fluid will not correct a leak.
A fluid loss in this system could indicate aproblem. Have the system inspected and repaired.
When to Check and What to Use
The hydraulic clutchfluid reservoir cap hasthis symbol on it.See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 328 forreservoir location.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinehow often you should check the fluid level inyour clutch master cylinder reservoir and for theproper fluid to use. See Owner Checks andServices on page 439 and Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 443.
346
How to Check and Add FluidMake sure the fluid level is at the MIN (Minimum)line on the side of the reservoir. If it is not,remove the cap and add the proper fluid until thelevel reaches the MIN line.
Engine CoolantThe cooling system in your vehicle is filled withDEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant isdesigned to remain in your vehicle for five years or150,000 miles (240 000 km), whichever occursfirst, if you add only DEX-COOL® extendedlife coolant.
The following explains your cooling system andhow to add coolant when it is low. If you havea problem with engine overheating, see EngineOverheating on page 350.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL® coolant will:
• Give freezing protection down to −34°F(−37°C).
• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
• Protect against rust and corrosion.
• Help keep the proper engine temperature.
• Let the warning lights and gages work as theyshould.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®
may cause premature engine, heater core,or radiator corrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant may require changing sooner, atthe first maintenance service after each30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,whichever occurs first. Any repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Always useDEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in yourvehicle.
347
What to UseUse a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable waterand one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which willnot damage aluminum parts. If you use this coolantmixture, you do not need to add anything else.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, canboil before the proper coolant mixture will.Your vehicle’s coolant warning system isset for the proper coolant mixture. Withplain water or the wrong mixture, yourengine could get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning. Your enginecould catch fire and you or others couldbe burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
Notice: If you use an improper coolantmixture, your engine could overheat and bebadly damaged. The repair cost would not becovered by your warranty. Too much waterin the mixture can freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core, and other parts.
If you have to add coolant more than four times ayear, have your dealer check your coolingsystem.
Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/oradditives in your vehicle’s cooling system, youcould damage your vehicle. Use only theproper mixture of the engine coolant listed inthis manual for the cooling system. SeeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants onpage 443 for more information.
348
Checking Coolant
The engine coolantsurge tank is locatedtoward the rear ofthe engine compartmenton the driver’s side ofthe vehicle. See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 328 formore information onlocation.
{CAUTION:
Turning the surge tank pressure cap whenthe engine and radiator are hot can allowsteam and scalding liquids to blow outand burn you badly. Never turn the surgetank pressure cap — even a little — whenthe engine and radiator are hot.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. Whenyour engine is cold, the coolant level should be atthe FULL COLD mark. The FULL COLD markis on the front of the coolant surge tank. Do notoverfill the surge tank. Too much coolant can resultin an overflow when the fluid is hot.
Adding CoolantIf you need more coolant, add the properDEX-COOL® coolant mixture at the surge tank,but only when the engine is cool.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant onhot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol, and it will burn if theengine parts are hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.
When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it ishand-tight and fully seated.
349
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightlyinstalled, coolant loss and possible enginedamage may occur. Be sure the cap is properlyand tightly secured.
The coolant surge tank pressure cap must be fullyinstalled on the coolant surge tank. See EngineCompartment Overview on page 328 for moreinformation on location.
Engine OverheatingYou will find an engine coolant temperature gageon the instrument panel cluster and a COOLANTOVER TEMPERATURE message on the DriverInformation Center (DIC). See Engine CoolantTemperature Gage on page 197 and DICWarnings and Messages on page 212 for moreinformation.
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
{CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine canburn you badly, even if you just open thehood. Stay away from the engine if yousee or hear steam coming from it. Turn itoff and get everyone away from thevehicle until it cools down. Wait untilthere is no sign of steam or coolantbefore you open the hood.
If you keep driving when the vehiclesengine is overheated, the liquids in it cancatch fire. You or others could be badlyburned. Stop your engine if it overheats,and get out of the vehicle until the engineis cool.
See Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode on page 352 forinformation on driving to a safe place inan emergency.
350
Notice: If your engine catches fire becauseyou keep driving with no coolant, your vehiclecan be badly damaged. The costly repairswould not be covered by your warranty. SeeOverheated Engine Protection Operating Modeon page 352 for information on driving to asafe place in an emergency.
If No Steam Is Coming From YourEngineIf you get an engine overheat warning but see orhear no steam, the problem may not be tooserious. Sometimes the engine can get a little toohot when you:
• Climb a long hill on a hot day.
• Stop after high-speed driving.
• Idle for long periods in traffic.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign ofsteam, try this for a minute or so:
1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle inNEUTRAL (N) while stopped. If it is safe to doso, pull off the road, shift to PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N) and let the engine idle.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highestfan speed and open the windows asnecessary.
If you no longer have the overheat warning, youcan drive. Just to be safe, drive slower forabout 10 minutes. If the warning does not comeback on, you can drive normally.
If the warning continues and you are notstopped, pull over, stop, and park your vehicleright away.
If there is still no sign of steam, you can idle theengine for three minutes while you are parked.If you still have the warning, turn off the engineand get everyone out of the vehicle until itcools down. Also, see “Overheated EngineProtection Operating Mode” later in this section.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to getservice help right away.
351
Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating ModeIf an overheated engine condition exists and themessages COOLANT OVER TEMPERATURE andREDUCED ENGINE POWER are displayed,along with the Check Engine light, an overheatprotection mode which alternates firing groups ofcylinders helps prevent engine damage. In thismode, you will notice a loss in power and engineperformance. This operating mode allows yourvehicle to be driven to a safe place in anemergency; you may drive up to 50 miles (80 km).
Notice: After driving in the overheatedengine protection operating mode, to avoidengine damage, allow the engine to cool beforeattempting any repair. The engine oil will beseverely degraded. Repair the cause of coolantloss, change the oil and reset the oil lifesystem. See Engine Oil on page 332.
Cooling SystemWhen you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here iswhat you will see:
A. Electric Engine Cooling FanB. Coolant Surge Tank with Pressure Cap
352
{CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under thehood can start up even when the engineis not running and can injure you. Keephands, clothing, and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.
If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank isboiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.The vehicle should be parked on a level surface.
The coolant level should be at the FULL COLDmark on the front of the coolant surge tank. If it isnot, you may have a leak at the pressure cap or inthe radiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator, waterpump or somewhere else in the cooling system.
{CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and otherengine parts, can be very hot. Do nottouch them. If you do, you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. Ifyou run the engine, it could lose allcoolant. That could cause an engine fire,and you could be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.
If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on,check to see if the electric engine cooling fanis running. If the engine is overheating, thefan should be running. If it is not, your vehicleneeds service.
Notice: Engine damage from running yourengine without coolant is not covered by yourwarranty. See Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode on page 352 for information ondriving to a safe place in an emergency.
353
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®
may cause premature engine, heater core,or radiator corrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant could require changing sooner, at30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,whichever occurs first. Any repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Always useDEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in yourvehicle.
How to Add Coolant to the CoolantSurge TankIf you have not found a problem yet, check to seeif coolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolantis visible but the coolant level is not at the FULLCOLD mark on the front of the coolant surgetank, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable waterand DEX-COOL® coolant at the coolant surgetank, but be sure the cooling system, including thecoolant surge tank pressure cap, is cool beforeyou do it. See Engine Coolant on page 347for more information.
If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, addcoolant as follows:
{CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hotcooling system can blow out and burnyou badly. They are under pressure, and ifyou turn the coolant surge tank pressurecap — even a little — they can come out athigh speed. Never turn the cap when thecooling system, including the coolantsurge tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait forthe cooling system and coolant surgetank pressure cap to cool if you ever haveto turn the pressure cap.
354
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, canboil before the proper coolant mixture will.Your vehicle’s coolant warning system isset for the proper coolant mixture. Withplain water or the wrong mixture, yourengine could get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning. Your enginecould catch fire and you or others couldbe burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze andcrack the engine, radiator, heater core andother parts. Use the recommended coolant andthe proper coolant mixture.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant onhot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol and it will burn if theengine parts are hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.
355
1. You can remove the coolant surge tankpressure cap when the cooling system,including the coolant surge tank pressure capand upper radiator hose, is no longer hot.Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwiseabout one-quarter turn and then stop.If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hissmeans there is still some pressure left.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly,and remove it.
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the propermixture until the level inside stabilizes atthe FULL COLD mark on the front of thesurge tank.
356
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off,start the engine and let it run until you canfeel the upper radiator hose getting hot. Watchout for the engine cooling fan.By this time, the coolant level inside thecoolant surge tank may be lower. If the level islower, add more of the proper mixture to thecoolant surge tank until the level stabilizesat the FULL COLD mark on the coolantsurge tank.
5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure thepressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.Check the level in the surge tank whenthe system has cooled down. If the coolant isnot at the proper level, repeat Steps 1through 4, then reinstall the pressure cap. Ifthe coolant is not at the proper level when thesystem cools down again, see your dealer.
Power Steering Fluid
See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 328 forreservoir location.
357
When to Check Power Steering FluidIt is not necessary to regularly check powersteering fluid unless you suspect there is a leak inthe system or you hear an unusual noise. Afluid loss in this system could indicate a problem.Have the system inspected and repaired.
How to Check Power Steering FluidTo check the power steering fluid, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition off and let the enginecompartment cool down.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoirclean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with aclean rag.
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
5. Remove the cap again and look at thefluid level on the dipstick. There are markingson both sides of the dipstick.
The level should be at the FULL COLD mark. Ifnecessary, add only enough fluid to bring the levelup to the mark.
When the enginecompartment is hot, thelevel should be atthe HOT mark. Whenthe engine compartmentis cool, the levelshould be at the FULLCOLD mark.
What to UseTo determine what kind of fluid to use, seeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 443.Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use theproper fluid can cause leaks and damage hosesand seals.
358
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to UseWhen you need windshield washer fluid, be sureto read the manufacturer’s instructions beforeuse. If you will be operating your vehicle in an areawhere the temperature may fall below freezing,use a fluid that has sufficient protection againstfreezing.
Adding Washer Fluid
Open the cap with thewasher symbol on it.Add washer fluiduntil the tank is full. SeeEngine CompartmentOverview on page 328for reservoir location.
Notice:• When using concentrated washer fluid,
follow the manufacturer’s instructionsfor adding water.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washerfluid. Water can cause the solution tofreeze and damage your washer fluid tankand other parts of the washer system.Also, water does not clean as wellas washer fluid.
• Fill your washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it is very cold.This allows for expansion if freezingoccurs, which could damage the tank if itis completely full.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) inyour windshield washer. It can damageyour washer system and paint.
359
Brakes
Brake Fluid
Your brake mastercylinder reservoir isfilled with DOT-3 brakefluid. See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 328 for thelocation of the reservoir.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluidlevel in the reservoir might go down. The firstis that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptablelevel during normal brake lining wear. Whennew linings are put in, the fluid level goes backup. The other reason is that fluid is leaking out ofthe brake system. If it is, you should have yourbrake system fixed, since a leak means thatsooner or later your brakes will not work well, orwill not work at all.
So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake fluid.Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If youadd fluid when your linings are worn, then you willhave too much fluid when you get new brakelinings. You should add or remove brake fluid, asnecessary, only when work is done on thebrake hydraulic system.
{CAUTION:
If you have too much brake fluid, it canspill on the engine. The fluid will burn ifthe engine is hot enough. You or otherscould be burned, and your vehicle couldbe damaged. Add brake fluid only whenwork is done on the brake hydraulicsystem. See “Checking Brake Fluid” inthis section.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinewhen to check your brake fluid. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 433.
360
Checking Brake FluidYou can check the brake fluid without taking offthe cap. Look at the brake fluid reservoir. The fluidlevel should be above the MIN mark on thereservoir. If it is not, have your brake systemchecked to see if there is a leak.
After work is done on the brake hydraulic system,make sure the level is between the MIN andMAX marks.
What to AddWhen you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3brake fluid. Refer to Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 443. Use new brake fluidfrom a sealed container only.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and thearea around the cap before removing it. Thiswill help keep dirt from entering the reservoir.
{CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in the brakesystem, the brakes may not work well, orthey may not even work at all. This couldcause a crash. Always use the properbrake fluid.
Notice:• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage
brake system parts. For example, just afew drops of mineral-based oil, suchas engine oil, in the brake system candamage brake system parts so badly thatthey will have to be replaced. Do notlet someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’spainted surfaces, the paint finish canbe damaged. Be careful not to spill brakefluid on your vehicle. If you do, wash itoff immediately. See Washing Your Vehicleon page 411.
361
Brake WearYour vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators thatmake a high-pitched warning sound when thebrake pads are worn and new pads are needed.The sound may come and go or be heard allthe time your vehicle is moving, except when youare pushing on the brake pedal firmly.
{CAUTION:
The brake wear warning sound means thatsoon the brakes will not work well. Thatcould lead to an accident. When you hearthe brake wear warning sound, have yourvehicle serviced.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-outbrake pads could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates may causea brake squeal when the brakes are first applied orlightly applied. This does not mean something iswrong with your brakes.
Brake linings should always be replaced ascomplete axle sets.
Brake Pedal TravelSee your dealer if the brake pedal does not returnto normal height, or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
Brake AdjustmentAs you make brake stops, your disc brakesautomatically adjust for wear.
362
Replacing Brake System PartsThe braking system on a vehicle is complex. Itsmany parts have to be of top quality and workwell together if the vehicle is to have really goodbraking. Your vehicle was designed and testedwith top-quality GM brake parts. When youreplace parts of your braking system — forexample, when your brake linings wear downand you need new ones put in — be sure youget new approved GM replacement parts. If you donot, your brakes may no longer work properly.For example, if someone puts in brake linings thatare wrong for your vehicle, thebalance between your front and rear brakes canchange — for the worse. The braking performanceyou have come to expect can change in manyother ways if someone puts in the wrongreplacement brake parts.
BatteryYour vehicle has a maintenance free battery.When it is time for a new battery, get one that hasthe replacement number shown on the originalbattery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco®
replacement battery.
For battery replacement, see your dealer or theservice manual. To purchase a service manual,see Service and Owner Publications in ServicePublications Ordering Information on page 471.Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the State of Californiato cause cancer and reproductive harm. Washhands after handling.
363
Vehicle StorageIf you are not going to drive your vehicle for 25days or more, remove the black, negative (-) cablefrom the battery. This will help keep your batteryfrom running down.
{CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you andgas that can explode. You can be badlyhurt if you are not careful. See JumpStarting on page 364 for tips on workingaround a battery without getting hurt.
Jump StartingIf your battery has run down, you may want to useanother vehicle and some jumper cables to startyour vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps todo it safely.
{CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can bedangerous because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.• They contain gas that can explode or
ignite.• They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly,some or all of these things can hurt you.
Notice: If you try to start your vehicle bypushing or pulling it, you could damage yourvehicle. Do not push or pull your vehicleto start it; instead, use the jump startingprocedure in this manual to start your vehiclewhen the battery has run down.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a12-volt battery with a negative ground system.
364
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a12-volt system with a negative ground,both vehicles can be damaged. Only usevehicles with 12-volt systems with negativegrounds to jump start your vehicle.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumpercables can reach, but be sure the vehicles arenot touching each other. If they are, it couldcause a ground connection you do notwant. You would not be able to start yourvehicle, and the bad grounding could damagethe electrical systems.To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling,set the parking brake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump start procedure. Putan automatic transmission in PARK (P) or amanual transmission in NEUTRAL beforesetting the parking brakes.
Notice: If you leave your radio or otheraccessories on during the jump startingprocedure, they could be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Always turn off your radio and otheraccessories when jump starting your vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles.Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged intothe cigarette lighter or the accessory poweroutlet. Turn off the radio and all lamps that arenot needed. This will avoid sparks and helpsave both batteries. And it could savethe radio!
365
4. Open the hoods and locate the positive (+)and negative (−) terminal locations on eachvehicle.
Your vehicle has a remote positive (+)terminal (A) and a remote negative (−)terminal (B), as shown in the illustration, whichshould be used to jump start your vehicle.The remote positive (+) terminal (A) canbe accessed by opening the cover of theengine compartment fuse block.
The remote negative (−) terminal (B) is locatedunderneath the engine cover, below theengine oil fill cap.See Engine Compartment Overview onpage 328 for the location of the enginecompartment fuse block and engine oil fill cap.You will not need to access the battery forjump starting. The remote terminals are for thatpurpose.
{CAUTION:
An electric fan can start up even when theengine is not running and can injure you.Keep hands, clothing and tools away fromany underhood electric fan.
366
{CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can causebattery gas to explode. People have beenhurt doing this, and some have beenblinded. Use a flashlight if you needmore light.
Be sure the battery has enough water. Youdo not need to add water to the batteryinstalled in your new vehicle. But if abattery has filler caps, be sure the rightamount of fluid is there. If it is low, addwater to take care of that first. If you do not,explosive gas could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burnyou. Do not get it on you. If youaccidentally get it in your eyes or on yourskin, flush the place with water and getmedical help immediately.
{CAUTION:
Fans or other moving engine parts caninjure you badly. Keep your hands awayfrom moving parts once the engine isrunning.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not haveloose or missing insulation. If they do, youcould get a shock. The vehicles couldbe damaged too.Before you connect the cables, here are somebasic things you should know. Positive (+)will go to positive (+) or to a remote positive (+)terminal if the vehicle has one. Negative (−)will go to a heavy, unpainted metal engine partor to a remote negative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) oryou will get a short that would damagethe battery and maybe other parts too. And donot connect the negative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal on the dead batterybecause this can cause sparks.
367
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to thepositive (+) terminal of the dead battery.Use a remote positive (+) terminal ifthe vehicle has one.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connectit to the positive (+) terminal of the goodbattery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal ifthe vehicle has one.
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable tothe negative (−) terminal of the good battery.Use a remote negative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.Do not let the other end touch anything untilthe next step. The other end of the negative (−)cable does not go to the dead battery. Itgoes to a heavy, unpainted metal engine partor to a remote negative (−) terminal on thevehicle with the dead battery.
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cableat least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the deadbattery, but not near engine parts that move.The electrical connection is just as good there,and the chance of sparks getting back to thebattery is much less.Your vehicle has a remote negative (−)terminal for this purpose.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good batteryand run the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the deadbattery. If it will not start after a few tries, itprobably needs service.
368
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected orremoved in the wrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage the vehicle. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty. Alwaysconnect and remove the jumper cables in thecorrect order, making sure that the cables donot touch each other or other metal.
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part orRemote Negative (−) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) andNegative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
To disconnect the jumper cables from bothvehicles, do the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable fromthe vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable fromthe vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from theother vehicle.
5. Return the engine fuse block cover to itsoriginal position.
6. You may also need to initialize the powerwindows. See “Power Window Initialize”under Power Windows on page 87 for moreinformation.
Jumper Cable Removal
369
Rear AxleWhen to Check LubricantIt is not necessary to regularly check rear axlefluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hearan unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate aproblem. Have it inspected and repaired.
How to Check Lubricant
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should beon a level surface.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plughole, you will need to add some lubricant.Add enough lubricant to raise the level to thebottom of the filler plug hole.
What to UseTo add lubricant when the level is low, useSAE 75W–90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM PartNo. U.S. 89021677, in Canada 89021678) meetingGM Specification 9986115. To completely refillafter draining, add Limited-Slip Axle LubricantAdditive (GM Part No. U.S. 1052358, inCanada 992694). See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 443. Then fill to the bottomof the filler plug hole with the Synthetic GearLubricant.
Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacement bulbs, seeReplacement Bulbs on page 374.
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in thissection, contact your dealer.
370
High Intensity Discharge (HID)Lighting
{CAUTION:
The low beam high intensity dischargelighting system operates at a very highvoltage. If you try to service any of thesystem components, you could beseriously injured. Have your dealer or aqualified technician service them.
Your vehicle has HID headlamps. After yourvehicle’s HID headlamp bulb has been replaced,you may notice that the beam is a slightly differentshade than it was originally. This is normal.
Halogen Bulbs
{CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gasinside and can burst if you drop orscratch the bulb. You or others could beinjured. Be sure to read and follow theinstructions on the bulb package.
371
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, andParking Lamps
A. High-beam HeadlampB. Low-beam HeadlampC. Front Parking/Turn Signal/Daytime Running
Lamp (DRL)
If the low-beam headlamp needs to be replaced,you will need to see your dealer. See HighIntensity Discharge (HID) Lighting on page 371 formore information.
To replace a high-beam or front parking/turnsignal/DRL bulb, do the following:
1. Turn the wheel to allow access to thewheel well.
2. Access the high-beam or front parking/turnsignal bulbs by removing the access panel.To do this, remove the three outer fastenersand move the cover back.
372
3. Remove the outer cover to expose thehigh-beam headlamp bulb socket oncethe access cover has been removed.
4. Remove theheadlamp bulb byreleasing theouter tabs from thesocket.
5. Remove the front parking/turn signal bulb byturning the bulb socket counterclockwise.
6. Replace the high-beam headlamp bulb with anew bulb and reattach to the bulb socket.Replace the front parking/turn signal bulb byturning the bulb socket clockwise.
7. Reverse the Steps 2 through 4 to reinstall.
Taillamps, Turn Signal, andStoplampsTo replace a stoplamp, taillamp/turn signal bulb,do the following:
1. Remove the screw from the top of the lampassembly.
2. Tilt out the lamp assembly.
373
3. Turn the bulb socket one-quarter turncounterclockwise and pull it out.
4. Pull the bulb straight out to remove it from thesocket.
5. Push the new bulb in the bulb socket until itsnaps into place.
6. Reinstall the lamp assembly by first lining upthe tabs on the bottom of the lamp assemblywith the tabs in the vehicle, then slide it in.
7. Replace the screw at the top of the lampassembly.
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp Bulb NumberFront Parking/TurnSignal/Daytime RunningLamp (DRL) 5702KAHeadlamp, High-Beam Lamp H9Sidemarker Lamp W3WStoplamp/Taillamp/Turn SignalLamp 3057KX
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contactyour dealer.
Windshield ReplacementKeep in mind that your windshield is part of theHead-Up Display (HUD) system. If you ever haveto get your windshield replaced, be sure to getone that is designed for HUD or your HUD imagemay look blurred or out of focus.
374
Windshield Wiper BladeReplacementWindshield wiper blades should be inspected forwear and cracking. See Scheduled Maintenanceon page 433 for more information.
Replacement blades come in different types andare removed in different ways. For the proper typeand length, see Normal Maintenance ReplacementParts on page 445.
It is a good idea to clean or replace the wiperblade assembly every six months.
Allowing the wiper blade arm to touch thewindshield when no wiper blade is installed coulddamage the windshield. Any damage thatoccurs would not be covered by your warranty. Donot allow the wiper blade arm to touch thewindshield.
To remove the wiper blade assembly, do thefollowing:
1. Open the hood to gain access to thewindshield wipers.
2. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.
A. Blade AssemblyB. Arm AssemblyC. Locking Tab
D. Blade PivotE. Hook SlotF. Arm Hook
375
3. Press down on the blade assembly pivotlocking tab (C). Pull down on the bladeassembly (A) to release it from the wiperarm hook (F).
4. Remove the insert from the bladeassembly (A). The insert has two notchesat one end that are locked by the bottomclaws of the blade assembly. At the notch end,pull the insert from the blade assembly.
To install the new wiper insert:
1. Slide the insert (D), notched end last, into theend with the two blade claws (A). Slide theinsert all the way through the blade claws atthe opposite end (B). Plastic caps (C) willbe forced off as the insert is fully installed.
376
2. Be sure the notches are locked by thebottom claws. Make sure that all other clawsare properly locked on both sides of theinsert slots.
3. Put the blade assembly pivot in the wiper armhook. Pull up until the pivot locking tab locksin the hook slot.
4. Carefully lower the wiper arm and bladeassembly onto the windshield.
Installation guide:
A. Claw in NotchB. Correct InstallationC. Incorrect Installation
377
TiresYour new vehicle comes with high-quality tiresmade by a leading tire manufacturer. If you everhave questions about your tire warranty and whereto obtain service, see your GM Warranty bookletfor details. For additional information refer tothe tire manufacturer’s booklet included with yourvehicle.
{CAUTION:
• Poorly maintained and improperlyused tires are dangerous.
• Overloading your tires can causeoverheating as a result of too muchfriction. You could have an air-out anda serious accident. See Loading YourVehicle on page 307.
CAUTION: (Continued)
CAUTION: (Continued)
• Underinflated tires pose the samedanger as overloaded tires. Theresulting accident could cause seriousinjury. Check all tires frequently tomaintain the recommended pressure.Tire pressure should be checked whenyour tires are cold. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 386.
• Overinflated tires are more likely to becut, punctured, or broken by a suddenimpact — such as when you hit apothole. Keep tires at therecommended pressure.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents.If your tread is badly worn, or ifyour tires have been damaged,replace them.
See High-Speed Operation on page 388 forinflation pressure adjustment for highspeed driving.
378
Low-Profile Performance TireThe original equipment tires on your vehicle areclassified as low-profile performance tires.These tires are designed for very responsivedriving on wet or dry pavement. You mayalso notice more road noise with low-profile tiresand that they tend to wear faster.
Notice: If your vehicle has low-profile tires,they are more susceptible to damage from roadhazards or curb impact than standard profiletires. Tire and/or wheel assembly damagecan occur when coming into contact with roadhazards like, potholes, or sharp edgedobjects, or when sliding into a curb. Your GMwarranty does not cover this type of damage.Keep tires set to the correct inflation pressureand, when possible avoid contact withcurbs, potholes, and other road hazards.
Winter TiresIf you expect to drive on snow or ice coveredroads often, you may want to get winter tires foryour vehicle.
All season tires provide good overall performanceon most surfaces but they may not offer the tractionyou would like or the same level of performance aswinter tires on snow or ice covered roads.
Winter tires, in general, are designed for increasedtraction on snow and ice covered roads. Withwinter tires, there may be decreased dryroad traction, increased road noise, and shortertread life. After switching to winter tires, be alert forchanges in vehicle handling and braking.
See your dealer for details regarding winter tireavailability and proper tire selection. Also,see Buying New Tires on page 393.
If you choose to use winter tires:
• Use tires of the same brand and tread type onall four wheel positions.
• Use only radial ply tires of the same size, loadrange, and speed rating as the originalequipment tires.
Winter tires with the same speed rating as youroriginal equipment tires may not be available forH, V, W, Y, and ZR speed rated tires. If youchoose winter tires with a lower speed rating,never exceed the tire’s maximum speed capability.
379
Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire is molded into itssidewall. The example below shows a typicalpassenger (p-metric) tire sidewall.
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination ofletters and numbers used to define a particulartire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type,and service description. See the “Tire Size”illustration later in this section for more detail.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification): Original equipment tires designedto GM’s specific tire performance criteria havea TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed allfederal safety guidelines.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): TheDepartment of Transportation (DOT) codeindicates that the tire is in compliance with theU.S. Department of Transportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The lettersand numbers following DOT code are the TireIdentification Number (TIN). The TIN showsthe manufacturer and plant code, tire size, anddate the tire was manufactured. The TIN is moldedonto both sides of the tire, although only oneside may have the date of manufacture.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord andnumber of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example
380
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are required to grade tiresbased on three performance factors: treadwear,traction and temperature resistance. For moreinformation see Uniform Tire Quality Grading onpage 396.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation LoadLimit: Maximum load that can be carried and themaximum pressure needed to support that load.
Tire SizeThe following illustration shows an example of atypical passenger (p-metric) vehicle tire size.
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The UnitedStates version of a metric tire sizing system. Theletter P as the first character in the tire sizemeans a passenger vehicle tire engineered tostandards set by the U. S. Tire and RimAssociation.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicatesthe tire section width in millimeters from sidewallto sidewall.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number thatindicates the tire height-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 60,as shown in item C of the illustration, it wouldmean that the tire’s sidewall is 60 percent as highas it is wide.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used toindicate the type of ply construction in the tire.The letter R means radial ply construction;the letter D means diagonal or bias plyconstruction; and the letter B means belted-biasply construction.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel ininches.
(F) Service Description: These charactersrepresent the load range and speed rating of thetire. The load index represents the load carrycapacity a tire is certified to carry. The load indexcan range from 1 to 279. The speed rating isthe maximum speed a tire is certified to carry aload. Speed ratings range from A to Z.
381
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tirepressing outward on each square inch of thetire. Air pressure is expressed in poundsper square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
Accessory Weight: This means the combinedweight of optional accessories. Some examples ofoptional accessories are, automatic transmission/transaxle, power steering, power brakes, powerwindows, power seats, and air conditioning.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s heightto its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that islocated between the plies and the tread. Cordsmay be made from steel or other reinforcingmaterials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrappedby steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the pliesare laid at alternate angles less than 90 degreesto the centerline of the tread.
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressurein a tire, measured in pounds per square inch(psi) or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built upheat from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressureon page 386.
Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motorvehicle with standard and optional equipmentincluding the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, andcoolant, but without passengers and cargo.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewallof a tire signifying that the tire is in compliancewith the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),an alphanumeric designator which can also identifythe tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,and date of production.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. SeeLoading Your Vehicle on page 307.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for thefront axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 307.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for therear axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 307.
382
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire, that must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used onlight duty trucks and some multipurpose passengervehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number rangingfrom 1 to 279 that corresponds to the loadcarrying capacity of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum airpressure to which a cold tire may be inflated.The maximum air pressure is molded ontothe sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tireat the maximum permissible inflation pressurefor that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum ofcurb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacityweight, and production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number ofoccupants a vehicle is designed to seat multipliedby 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicleon page 307.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seatingpositions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire that has a particular side thatfaces outward when mounted on a vehicle.The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,and/or model name molding that is higheror deeper than the same moldings on the othersidewall of the tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used onpassenger cars and some light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehiclemanufacturer’s recommended tire inflationpressure as shown on the tire placard. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 386 and LoadingYour Vehicle on page 307.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which theply cords that extend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon whichthe tire beads are seated.
383
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the treadand the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assignedto a tire indicating the maximum speed atwhich a tire can operate.
Traction: The friction between the tire and theroad surface. The amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes intocontact with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimescalled wear bars, that show across the tread ofa tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of treadremains. See When It Is Time for New Tires onpage 393.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards): A tire information system thatprovides consumers with ratings for a tire’straction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings aredetermined by tire manufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures. The ratings aremolded into the sidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading on page 396.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number ofdesignated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See LoadingYour Vehicle on page 307.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on anindividual tire due to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached toa vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weightand the original equipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure. See “Tire andLoading Information Label” under LoadingYour Vehicle on page 307.
Extended Mobility TiresYour vehicle, when new, had Goodyear ExtendedMobility Tires (EMT). There’s no spare tire, notire changing equipment and no place to store atire in the vehicle. Extended Mobility Tires performso well without any air that a Tire PressureMonitor (TPM) is used to alert you if a tire has lostpressure.
384
If a tire goes flat, you won’t need to stop on the sideof the road to change the tire. You can just keep ondriving. The shorter the distance you drive and theslower the speed, the greater the chance that thetire will not have to be replaced. If you drive on adeflated EMT for 25 miles (40 km) or less and atspeeds of 55 mph (90 km/h) or less, there is a goodchance that the tire can be repaired. The tire canoperate effectively with no air pressure for up to100 miles (160 km) at speeds up to 55 mph(90 km/h), but the tire would then have to bereplaced. When a tire is filled with air, it provides acushion between the road and the wheel. Becauseyou won’t have this cushion when driving on adeflated tire, try to avoid potholes that coulddamage your wheel and require replacement of it.
Some road hazards can damage a tire beyondrepair. This damage could occur even beforeyou’ve driven on the tire in a deflated condition.When a tire has been damaged, or if you’ve drivenany distance on a deflated EMT, check with anauthorized Goodyear EMT Service Center todetermine whether the tire can be repairedor should be replaced. To maintain your vehicle’sextended mobility feature, all replacement tiresmust be Extended Mobility Tires.
As soon as possible, contact the nearestauthorized GM or Goodyear EMT servicing facilityfor inspection and repair or replacement. Tolocate the nearest GM or Goodyear EMT servicingfacility, call Roadside Assistance. For phonenumbers and Roadside Assistance details seeRoadside Assistance Program on page 458.You may also contact Goodyear, for the nearestauthorized EMT servicing facility, by calling1-800-789-9878.
{CAUTION:
Extended mobility tires are constructeddifferently than other tires and couldexplode during improper service. You orothers could be injured or killed if youattempt to repair, replace, dismount, ormount a extended mobility tire. Let onlyan authorized EMT Service Center repair,replace, dismount and mount extendedmobility tires.
385
The valve stems on your extended mobility tireshave sensors that are part of the Tire PressureMonitor (TPM). See Tire Pressure Monitor Systemon page 389. The TPM sensors contain batterieswhich are designed to last for 10 years undernormal driving conditions. See your dealer if youever need to have a wheel replaced, or if thesensors ever need replacement.
Notice: Using liquid sealants can damage thetire valves and tire pressure monitor sensorsin your extended mobility tires. This damagewould not be covered by warranty. Don’tuse liquid sealants in your extended mobilitytires.
Inflation - Tire PressureTires need the correct amount of air pressure tooperate effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you thatunder-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It isnot. If your tires do not have enough air(under-inflation), you can get the following:• Too much flexing
• Too much heat
• Tire overloading
• Premature or irregular wear
• Poor handling
• Reduced fuel economy
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),you can get the following:• Unusual wear
• Poor handling
• Rough ride
• Needless damage from road hazards
386
A Tire and Loading Information label is attached tothe vehicle’s b-pillar. This label lists your vehicle’soriginal equipment tires and shows the correctinflation pressures for your tires when theyare cold. The recommended cold tire inflationpressure, shown on the label, is the minimumamount of air pressure needed to supportyour vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.
For additional information regarding how muchweight your vehicle can carry, and an example ofthe tire and loading information label, seeLoading Your Vehicle on page 307. How you loadyour vehicle affects vehicle handling and ridecomfort, never load your vehicle with more weightthan it was designed to carry.
When to CheckCheck your tires once a month or more.
How to CheckUse a good quality pocket-type gage to check tirepressure. You cannot tell if your tires areproperly inflated simply by looking at them. Radialtires may look properly inflated even whenthey’re under-inflated. Check the tire’s inflationpressure when the tires are cold. Cold means yourvehicle has been sitting for at least three hoursor driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement. If the cold tireinflation pressure matches the recommendedpressure on the Tire and Loading Informationlabel, no further adjustment is necessary. If theinflation pressure is low, add air until you reach therecommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing onthe metal stem in the center of the tire valve.Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valvestems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirtand moisture.
387
Tire Pressure Monitor SystemYour vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)that sends tire pressure information to theDriver Information Center (DIC). Using the DICcontrol buttons, the driver is able to checktire pressure levels in all four tires. See TirePressure Monitor System on page 389 and DICControls and Displays on page 206 for additionalinformation.
High-Speed Operation
{CAUTION:
Driving at high speeds, 100 mph(160 km/h) or higher, puts an additionalstrain on tires. Sustained high-speeddriving causes excessive heat build upand can cause sudden tire failure. Youcould have a crash and you or otherscould be killed. Some high-speed ratedtires require inflation pressure adjustmentfor high speed operation. When speedlimits and road conditions are such that avehicle can be driven at high speeds,make sure the tires are rated for highspeed operation, in excellent condition,and set to the correct cold tire inflationpressure for the vehicle load.
388
If you will be driving your vehicle at speeds of175 mph (282 km/h) or higher, where it is legal, setthe cold inflation pressure to the maximum inflationpressure shown on the tire sidewall, or38 psi (265 kPa), whichever is lower. See theexample following. When you end this high-speeddriving, return the tires to the cold inflation pressureshown on the Tire and Loading Information label.See Loading Your Vehicle on page 307.
Example:
You will find the maximum load and inflationpressure molded on the tire’s sidewall, in smallletters, near the rim flange. It will read somethinglike this: Maximum load 690 kg (1521 lbs)300 kPa (44 psi) Max. Press.
For this example, you would set the inflationpressure for high-speed driving at38 psi (265 kPa).
Racing or other competitive driving may affect thewarranty coverage of your vehicle. See yourwarranty booklet for more information.
Tire Pressure Monitor SystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) usesradio and sensor technology to check tire pressurelevels. TPMS sensors are mounted onto eachtire and wheel assembly. The TPMS sensorsmonitor the air pressure in your vehicle’s tires andtransmit tire pressure readings to a receiverlocated in the vehicle.
The TPMS is designed to alert the driver if a lowpressure condition exists. Using the DriverInformation Center (DIC), tire pressure levels canbe viewed by the driver. For additional informationand details about the DIC operation and displayssee DIC Controls and Displays on page 206and DIC Warnings and Messages on page 212.
When a low tire pressure condition is detected, theTPMS will illuminate the low tire pressurewarning symbol located in the instrument panelcluster. A DIC message to check the pressure in aspecific tire will also appear on the DIC display.
389
The low tire pressure warning symbol on theinstrument panel cluster and the LOW TIREPRESSURE message on the DIC display willappear at each ignition cycle until the tiresare inflated to the correct inflation pressure.
You may notice, during cooler weather conditions,that the low tire pressure warning light and theDIC warning message will appear when the vehicleis first started and then turn off as you start todrive the vehicle. This could be an early indicatorthat the tire pressures are getting low andneed to be inflated to the proper pressure.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), shouldbe checked monthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommended by the vehiclemanufacturer on the vehicle placard or tireinflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires ofa different size than the size indicated on thevehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tire inflationpressure for those tires.)
As an added safetyfeature, your vehiclehas been equipped witha tire pressuremonitoring system(TPMS) that illuminatesa low tire pressuretelltale when oneor more of your tires issignificantlyunder-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltaleilluminates, you should stop and check your tiresas soon as possible, and inflate them to theproper pressure. Driving on a significantlyunder-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat andcan lead to tire failure. Under-inflation alsoreduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute forproper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’sresponsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, evenif under-inflation has not reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
390
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMSmalfunction indicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly. The TPMSmalfunction indicator is combined with the low tirepressure telltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash for approximatelyone minute and then remain continuouslyilluminated. This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups as long as themalfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, thesystem may not be able to detect or signal lowtire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions mayoccur for a variety of reasons, including theinstallation of replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. Always check the TPMSmalfunction telltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that thereplacement or alternate tires and wheels allowthe TPMS to continue to function properly.
A Tire and Loading Information label, attached toyour vehicle, shows the size of your vehicle’soriginal equipment tires and the correct inflationpressure for your vehicle’s tires when theyare cold. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 307,for an example of the tire information label andits location on your vehicle. Also see Inflation - TirePressure on page 386.
Your vehicle’s TPMS can alert you about alow or high tire pressure condition but it doesnot replace normal tire maintenance. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 386 and WhenIt Is Time for New Tires on page 393.
The SERVICE TIRE MONITOR message, in theDIC, is displayed when the TPMS ismalfunctioning. For example, one or more TPMSsensors may be inoperable or missing. Also,the active handling system will be affected, seeActive Handling System on page 281. Seeyour dealer for service.
391
TPMS Sensor Identification CodesEach TPMS sensor has a unique identificationcode. Any time you replace one or more ofthe TPMS sensors, the identification codes willneed to be matched to the new tire/wheel position.The sensors are matched, to the tire/wheelpositions, in the following order: driver’s side fronttire, passenger’s side front tire, passenger’sside rear tire, and driver’s side rear tire using aTPMS diagnostic tool. See your GM dealerfor service.
Federal Communications Commission(FCC) and Industry and Science CanadaThe Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)operates on a radio frequency and complies withPart 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subjectto the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmfulinterference.
2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)operates on a radio frequency and complies withRSS-210 of Industry and Science Canada.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by otherthan an authorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.
Tire RotationThe tires on your vehicle are different sizes frontto rear. Due to this, your tires should not berotated. Each tire and wheel should be used onlyin the position it is in.
392
When It Is Time for New TiresOne way to tell when itis time for new tires isto check the treadwearindicators, which willappear when your tireshave only 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) or less of treadremaining.
You need a new tire if any of the followingstatements are true:• You can see the indicators at three or more
places around the tire.• You can see cord or fabric showing through
the tire’s rubber.• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or
snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric.• The tire has a bump, bulge or split.• The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage
that cannot be repaired well because of thesize or location of the damage.
Buying New TiresGM has developed and matched specific tires foryour vehicle. The original equipment tiresinstalled on your vehicle, when it was new, weredesigned to meet General Motors TirePerformance Criteria Specification (TPC spec)system rating. If you need replacement tires, GMstrongly recommends that you get tires withthe same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehiclewill continue to have tires that are designed togive the same performance and vehicle safety,during normal use, as the original tires.
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers overa dozen critical specifications that impact theoverall performance of your vehicle, includingbrake system performance, ride and handling,traction control, and tire pressure monitoringperformance. GM’s TPC Spec number is moldedonto the tire’s sidewall by the tire manufacturer.If the tires have an all-season tread design,the TPC spec number will be followed by an MSfor mud and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labelingon page 380 for additional information.
393
Winter tires with the same speed rating as youroriginal equipment tires may not be available for H,V, W, Y, and ZR speed rated tires. If you choosesnow tires with a lower speed rating, neverexceed the tire’s maximum speed capability.
{CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to losecontrol while driving. If you mix tires ofdifferent sizes (other than those originallyinstalled on your vehicle), brands, ortypes (radial and bias-belted tires), thevehicle may not handle properly, and youcould have a crash. Using tires ofdifferent sizes (other than those originallyinstalled on your vehicle), brands ortypes, may also cause damage to yourvehicle. Be sure to use the correct size,brand, and type tires on all four wheels.
{CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,the wheel rim flanges could developcracks after many miles of driving. A tireand/or wheel could fail suddenly, causinga crash. Use only radial-ply tires with thewheels on your vehicle.
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with thosethat do not have a TPC Spec number, makesure they are the same size, load range, speedrating, and construction type (radial andbias-belted tires) as your vehicle’s original tires.
394
Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoringsystem may give an inaccurate low-pressurewarning if non-TPC spec rated tires are installedon your vehicle. Non-TPC Spec rated tiresmay give a low-pressure warning that is higher orlower than the proper warning level you wouldget with TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire PressureMonitor System on page 389.
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listedon the Tire and Loading Information label.This label is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar(B-pillar). See Loading Your Vehicle on page 307for more information about the Tire and LoadingInformation label and its location on your vehicle.
Different Size Tires and WheelsIf you add wheels or tires that are a different sizethan your original equipment wheels and tires,this may affect the way your vehicle performs,including its braking, ride and handlingcharacteristics, stability, and resistance to rollover.Additionally, if your vehicle has electronicsystems such as, anti-lock brakes, traction control,and electronic stability control, the performanceof these systems can be affected.
{CAUTION:
If you add different sized wheels, yourvehicle may not provide an acceptablelevel of performance and safety if tires notrecommended for those wheels areselected. You may increase the chancethat you will crash and suffer seriousinjury. Only use GM specific wheel andtire systems developed for your vehicle,and have them properly installed by a GMcertified technician.
See Buying New Tires on page 393 andAccessories and Modifications on page 318 foradditional information.
395
Uniform Tire Quality GradingQuality grades can be found where applicable onthe tire sidewall between tread shoulder andmaximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature AThe following information relates to the systemdeveloped by the United States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), whichgrades tires by treadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. This applies only tovehicles sold in the United States. The grades aremolded on the sidewalls of most passenger cartires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)system does not apply to deep tread, winter-typesnow tires, space-saver, or temporary usespare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to somelimited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motorspassenger cars and light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, they must also conformto federal safety requirements and additionalGeneral Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)standards.
TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on the wear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specifiedgovernment test course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and a half(1.5) times as well on the government courseas a tire graded 100. The relative performanceof tires depends upon the actual conditions of theiruse, however, and may depart significantly fromthe norm due to variations in driving habits, servicepractices, and differences in road characteristicsand climate.
396
Traction – AA, A, B, CThe traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA,A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’sability to stop on wet pavement as measured undercontrolled conditions on specified government testsurfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked Cmay have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tireis based on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature – A, B, CThe temperature grades are A (the highest), B,and C, representing the tire’s resistance tothe generation of heat and its ability to dissipateheat when tested under controlled conditions on aspecified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause the material of the tireto degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessivetemperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performancewhich all passenger car tires must meet underthe Federal Motor Vehicle Safety StandardNo. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levelsof performance on the laboratory test wheelthan the minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that is properly inflatedand not overloaded. Excessive speed,under-inflation, or excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.
Wheel Alignment and Tire BalanceThe tires and wheels on your vehicle were alignedand balanced carefully at the factory to give youthe longest tire life and best overall performance.Adjustments to wheel alignment and tirebalancing will not be necessary on a regular basis.However, if you notice unusual tire wear or yourvehicle pulling to one side or the other, thealignment may need to be checked. If you noticeyour vehicle vibrating when driving on a smoothroad, your tires and wheels may need to berebalanced. See your dealer for proper diagnosis.
397
Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badlyrusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and wheelnuts should be replaced. If the wheel leaks air,replace it (except some aluminum wheels,which can sometimes be repaired). See yourdealer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the sameload-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offset, andbe mounted the same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels,wheel bolts or wheel nuts, replace them only withnew GM original equipment parts. This way,you will be sure to have the right wheel, wheelbolts, and wheel nuts for your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels,wheel bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehiclecan be dangerous. It could affect thebraking and handling of your vehicle,make your tires lose air and make youlose control. You could have a collision inwhich you or others could be injured.Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts,and wheel nuts for replacement.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also causeproblems with bearing life, brake cooling,speedometer or odometer calibration,headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle groundclearance, and tire clearance to the bodyand chassis.
398
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts towhich it is fastened, can make wheel nutsbecome loose after a time. The wheelcould come off and cause a crash. Whenyou change a wheel, remove any rust ordirt from places where the wheel attachesto the vehicle. In an emergency, you canuse a cloth or a paper towel to do this;but be sure to use a scraper or wire brushlater, if you need to, to get all the rust ordirt off.
{CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or thethreads of the wheel nuts. If you do, thewheel nuts might come loose and thewheel could fall off, causing a crash.
399
Tightening Wheel Lug Nuts
{CAUTION:
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperlytightened wheel nuts can cause the wheelto become loose and even come off. Thiscould lead to a crash. Be sure to use thecorrect wheel nuts. If you have to replacethem, be sure to get new GM originalequipment wheel nuts.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts canlead to brake pulsation and rotor damage.To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenlytighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequenceand to the proper torque specification.
Tighten the wheellug nuts firmly in acrisscross sequenceas shown.
400
Used Replacement Wheels
{CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle isdangerous. You cannot know how it hasbeen used or how far it has been driven. Itcould fail suddenly and cause a crash. Ifyou have to replace a wheel, use a newGM original equipment wheel.
Tire Chains
{CAUTION:
Do not use tire chains. There is not enoughclearance. Tire chains used on a vehiclewithout the proper amount of clearancecan cause damage to the brakes,suspension, or other vehicle parts. Thearea damaged by the tire chains couldcause you to lose control of your vehicleand you or others may be injured in acrash. Use another type of traction deviceonly if its manufacturer recommends it foruse on your vehicle and tire sizecombination and road conditions. Followthat manufacturer’s instructions. To helpavoid damage to your vehicle, drive slowly,re-adjust or remove the device if it iscontacting your vehicle, and do not spinyour wheels. If you do find traction devicesthat will fit, install them on the rear tires.
401
Lifting Your Vehicle
{CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle can cause an injury. Thevehicle can slip off the jack and roll overyou or other people. You and they couldbe badly injured. Find a level place to liftyour vehicle. To help prevent the vehiclefrom moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put an automatic transmission shiftlever in PARK (P), or shift a manualtransmission to FIRST (1) orREVERSE (R).
3. Turn off the engine.
To be even more certain the vehicle won’tmove, you can put blocks in front of andbehind the wheels.
{CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jackedup is dangerous. If the vehicle slips offthe jack, you could be badly injured orkilled. Never get under a vehicle when it issupported only by a jack.
{CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned can damage thevehicle and even make the vehicle fall. Tohelp avoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to place the jack in theproper location before raising the vehicle.
402
If you ever use a jack to lift your vehicle, followthe instructions that came with the jack, andbe sure to use the correct lifting points to avoiddamaging your vehicle.
Notice: Lifting your vehicle improperly candamage your vehicle and result in costlyrepairs not covered by your warranty. To liftyour vehicle properly, follow the advice inthis part.
To help prevent vehicle damage:• Be sure to place a block or pad between
the jack and the vehicle.• Make sure the jack you’re using spans at
least two crossmember ribs.• Lift only in the areas shown in the following
pictures.
For additional information, see your dealer andthe Chevrolet Corvette service manual.
Lifting From the Front
The front lifting points can be accessed fromeither side of your vehicle, behind the front tires.
403
1. Locate the front lifting points (A), according tothe illustration shown.
2. Be sure to place a block or pad between thejack and the vehicle.
3. Lift the vehicle with the jack, making surethe jack spans at least two of thecrossmember ribs (B).
404
Lifting From the Rear
The rear lifting points can be accessed from therear of the vehicle, on either the driver’s orpassenger’s side.
1. Locate the rear lifting points (A), according tothe illustration shown.
2. Be sure to place a block or pad between thejack and the vehicle.
405
3. Lift the vehicle with the jack, making surethe jack spans at least two of the crossmember ribs (B).
For more information, see Doing Your OwnService Work on page 319.
If a Tire Goes FlatYour Corvette has no spare tire, no tire changingequipment, and no place to store a tire.
It is unusual for a tire to blow out while you aredriving, especially if you maintain your tiresproperly. See Tires on page 378. If air goes out ofa tire, it is much more likely to leak out slowly.
Your vehicle has Extended Mobility Tires (EMT),so you will not need to stop on the side of the roadto change a flat tire. EMT tires can operateeffectively with no air pressure. If you drive on adeflated EMT for 25 miles (40 km) or less andat speeds of 55 mph (90 km/h) or less, there is agood chance that the tire can be repaired.Contact the nearest authorized Chevrolet orGoodyear EMT servicing facility, as soonas possible, to have the flat tire inspected andrepaired or replaced. For more information,see Extended Mobility Tires on page 384.
406
{CAUTION:
Special tools and procedures are requiredto service an Extended Mobility Tire(EMT). If these special tools andprocedures are not used you or otherscould be injured and your vehicle couldbe damaged. Always be sure the propertools and procedures, as described in theservice manual, are used.
To order a service manual, see ServicePublications Ordering Information on page 471.
Appearance Care
Cleaning the Inside of Your VehicleYour vehicle’s interior will continue to look itsbest if it is cleaned often. Although not alwaysvisible, dust and dirt can accumulate on yourupholstery. Dirt can damage carpet, fabric, leather,and plastic surfaces. Regular vacuuming isrecommended to remove particles from yourupholstery. It is important to keep your upholsteryfrom becoming and remaining heavily soiled.Soils should be removed as quickly as possible.Your vehicle’s interior may experience extremes ofheat that could cause stains to set rapidly.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequentcleaning. Use care because newspapers andgarments that transfer color to your homefurnishings may also transfer color to yourvehicle’s interior.
When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only usecleaners specifically designed for the surfacesbeing cleaned. Permanent damage may resultfrom using cleaners on surfaces for which theywere not intended.
407
Use glass cleaner only on glass. Remove anyaccidental over-spray from other surfacesimmediately. To prevent over-spray, apply cleanerdirectly to the cleaning cloth.
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners whencleaning glass surfaces on your vehicle, youcould scratch the glass and/or cause damageto the integrated radio antenna and therear window defogger. When cleaning theglass on your vehicle, use only a soft cloth andglass cleaner.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may becomeconcentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space.Before using cleaners, read and adhere to all safetyinstructions on the label. While cleaning yourvehicle’s interior, maintain adequate ventilation byopening your vehicle’s doors and windows.
Dust may be removed from small buttons andknobs using a small brush with soft bristles.
Your dealer has a product for cleaning yourvehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, youcan also obtain a product from your dealer toremove odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.
Do not clean your vehicle using the followingcleaners or techniques:
• Never use a knife or any other sharp object toremove a soil from any interior surface.
• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damageto your vehicle’s interior surfaces.
• Never apply heavy pressure or rubaggressively with a cleaning cloth. Use ofheavy pressure can damage your interior anddoes not improve the effectiveness of soilremoval.
• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoidlaundry detergents or dishwashing soaps withdegreasers. Using too much soap will leavea residue that leaves streaks and attracts dirt.For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops pergallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide.
• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery whilecleaning.
• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may resultfrom the use of many organic solvents suchas naptha, alcohol, etc.
408
Fabric/CarpetUse a vacuum cleaner with a soft brushattachment frequently to remove dust and loosedirt. A canister vacuum with a beater bar inthe nozzle may only be used on floor carpet andcarpeted floor mats. For soils, always try to removethem first with plain water or club soda. Beforecleaning, gently remove as much of the soilas possible using one of the following techniques:
• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soilwith a paper towel. Allow the soil to absorb intothe paper towel until no more can beremoved.
• For solid dry soils: remove as much aspossible and then vacuum.
To clean, use the following instructions:
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth withwater or club soda.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gentlyrub toward the center. Continue cleaning,using a clean area of the cloth each time itbecomes soiled.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until thecleaning cloth remains clean.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use amild soap solution and repeat the cleaningprocess that was used with plain water.
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabriccleaner or spot lifter may be necessary. When acommercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to beused, test a small hidden area for colorfastnessfirst. If the locally cleaned area gives anyimpression that a ring formation may result, cleanthe entire surface.
After the cleaning process has been completed, apaper towel can be used to blot excess moisturefrom the fabric or carpet.
Coated MoldingsThese moldings are around the hatch opening inthe rear area.
• When lightly soiled, wipe with a sponge or softlint-free cloth dampened with water.
• When heavily soiled, use warm soapy water.
409
LeatherA soft cloth dampened with water may be used toremove dust. If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a soft cloth dampened with a mild soapsolution can be used. Allow the leather to drynaturally. Do not use heat to dry. Never use steamto clean leather. Never use spot lifters or spotremovers on leather. Many commercial leathercleaners and coatings that are sold to preserveand protect leather may permanently changethe appearance and feel of your leather and arenot recommended. Do not use silicone orwax-based products, or those containing organicsolvents to clean your vehicle’s interior becausethey can alter the appearance by increasingthe gloss in a non-uniform manner. Never useshoe polish on your leather.
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and OtherPlastic SurfacesA soft cloth dampened with water may be used toremove dust. If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a clean soft cloth dampened with amild soap solution can be used to gently removedust and dirt. Never use spot lifters or removerson plastic surfaces. Many commercial cleaners andcoatings that are sold to preserve and protectsoft plastic surfaces may permanently change theappearance and feel of your interior and arenot recommended. Do not use silicone orwax-based products, or those containing organicsolvents to clean your vehicle’s interior becausethey can alter the appearance by increasingthe gloss in a non-uniform manner.
Some commercial products may increase gloss onyour instrument panel. The increase in glossmay cause annoying reflections in the windshieldand even make it difficult to see through thewindshield under certain conditions.
410
Cargo Cover and Convenience NetWash with warm water and mild detergent,rinse with cold water and tumble dry on low. Donot use chlorine bleach.
Care of Safety BeltsKeep belts clean and dry.
{CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If youdo, it may severely weaken them. In acrash, they might not be able to provideadequate protection. Clean safety beltsonly with mild soap and lukewarm water.
WeatherstripsSilicone grease on weatherstrips will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth. Duringvery cold, damp weather frequent application maybe required. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 443.
Washing Your VehicleThe paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty,depth of color, gloss retention, and durability.
The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is tokeep it clean by washing it often with lukewarmor cold water.
Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of thesun. Use a car washing soap. Do not usestrong soaps or chemical detergents. Be sure torinse the vehicle well, removing all soapresidue completely. GM-approved cleaningproducts can be obtained from your dealer. SeeVehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 417.
411
Do not use cleaning agents that are petroleumbased, or that contain acid or abrasives. Allcleaning agents should be flushed promptly andnot allowed to dry on the surface, or theycould stain. Dry the finish with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surfacescratches and water spotting.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through anautomatic car wash that does not have enoughclearance for the wide rear tires and wheels,you could damage your vehicle. Verify with themanager of the car wash that your vehiclewill fit before entering the car wash or use atouchless car wash.
High pressure car washes may cause water toenter the vehicle.
If you are cleaning your vehicle with the hoodopen, take care not to spray water directlyinto either end of the air cleaner/filter housing asthis could damage your vehicle’s engine. SeeEngine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 342 for moreinformation.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/LensesUse only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth anda car washing soap to clean exterior lampsand lenses. Follow instructions under WashingYour Vehicle on page 411.
Finish CareOccasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicleby hand may be necessary to remove residuefrom the paint finish. Approved cleaning productscan be obtained from your dealer. See VehicleCare/Appearance Materials on page 417.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressivepolishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paintfinish may damage it. Use only non-abrasivewaxes and polishes that are made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish on your vehicle.
412
The vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss tothe colored basecoat. Always use waxesand polishes that are non-abrasive and made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride andother salts, ice melting agents, road oil andtar, tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals fromindustrial chimneys, etc., can damage the vehicle’sfinish if they remain on painted surfaces. Washthe vehicle as soon as possible. If necessary, usenon-abrasive cleaners that are marked safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging,weather, and chemical fallout that can take theirtoll over a period of years. To help keep thepaint finish looking new, keep the vehicle in agarage or covered whenever possible.
Windshield and Wiper BladesIf the windshield is not clear after using thewindshield washer, or if the wiper blade chatterswhen running, wax, sap, or other material maybe on the blade or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a glasscleaning liquid or powder and water solution.The windshield is clean if beads do not form whenit is rinsed with water.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiperblades and affect their performance. Cleanthe blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth soakedin full-strength windshield washer solvent. Thenrinse the blade with water.
Check the wiper blades and clean them asnecessary; replace blades that look worn.
413
Removable Roof Panel
Notice: If you use a glass treatment and/orconditioner that contains ethyl alcohol or ethylsulfate on the roof panel, you could damagethe panel. The repairs would not be covered byyour warranty. Only use a GM-approvedglass cleaner on the roof panel.
Special care is necessary when cleaning,removing, and/or storing the roof panel.
• Flush with water to remove dust and dirt, thendry the panel.
• Clean a transparent roof panel with GM GlassCleaner. Leave the cleaner on the panel forone minute, then wipe the panel with asoft, lint-free cloth. Do not use glass cleaneron a painted roof panel.
• Do not use abrasive cleaning materials oneither type of panel.
If water drops are frequently allowed to dry on theroof panel, impurities in the water will adhere tothe top. These impurities may etch or marthe finish. When the panel gets wet, dry it off.
Convertible TopThe vehicle’s convertible top should be cleanedoften. However, high pressure car washesmay cause water to enter your vehicle.
When you hand wash the top, do it in partialshade. Use a mild soap, lukewarm water and asoft sponge. A chamois or cloth may leave lint onthe top, and a brush can chafe the threads inthe top fabric. Do not use detergents, harshcleaners, solvents or bleaching agents.
Wet the entire vehicle and wash the top evenly toavoid spots or rings. Let the soap remain onthe fabric for a few minutes. When the top is reallydirty, use a mild foam-type cleaner. Thoroughlyrinse the entire vehicle, then let the top dryin direct sunlight.
To protect the convertible top:
• After you wash the vehicle, make sure the topis completely dry before you lower it.
• Do not get any cleaner on the vehicle’spainted finish; it could leave streaks.
• If you decide to go through an automatic carwash, ask the manager if the equipmentcould damage your top.
414
Aluminum Wheels
Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, orcleaners that contain acid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels, you could damage thesurface of the wheel(s). The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Useonly GM-approved cleaners on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean clothwith mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water.After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft cleantowel. A wax may then be applied.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminumwheels could damage the wheels. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Use chrome polish on chrome wheels only.
The surface of these wheels is similar to thepainted surface of the vehicle. Do not use strongsoaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasivecleaners, cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaningbrushes on them because the surface couldbe damaged. Do not use chrome polish onaluminum wheels.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through anautomatic car wash that has silicone carbidetire cleaning brushes, you could damagethe aluminum or chrome-plated wheels. Therepairs would not be covered by your warranty.Never drive a vehicle equipped with aluminumor chrome-plated wheels through anautomatic car wash that uses silicone carbidetire cleaning brushes.
Do not take the vehicle through an automatic carwash that has silicone carbide tire cleaningbrushes. These brushes can also damage thesurface of these wheels.
TiresTo clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tirecleaner.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressingproducts on your vehicle may damage thepaint finish and/or tires. When applying a tiredressing, always wipe off any oversprayfrom all painted surfaces on your vehicle.
415
Finish DamageAny stone chips, fractures or deep scratches inthe finish should be repaired right away.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired withtouch-up materials available from your dealeror other service outlets. Larger areas of finishdamage can be corrected in your dealer’s bodyand paint shop.
Underbody MaintenanceChemicals used for ice and snow removal anddust control can collect on the underbody. If theseare not removed, corrosion and rust can developon the underbody parts such as fuel lines,frame, floor pan, and exhaust system even thoughthey have corrosion protection.
At least every spring, flush these materials from theunderbody with plain water. Clean any areas wheremud and debris can collect. Dirt packed in closeareas of the frame should be loosened before beingflushed. Your dealer or an underbody car washingsystem can do this for you.
Fiberglass Springs(Composite Springs)
Notice: If you use acidic or corrosive cleaningproducts, engine degreasers or aluminumcleaning agents on fiberglass springs, you maydamage the springs. The repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Use onlyapproved cleaners when cleaning yourvehicle’s fiberglass springs.
Chemical Paint SpottingSome weather and atmospheric conditions cancreate a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants canfall upon and attack painted surfaces on thevehicle. This damage can take two forms: blotchy,ring-shaped discolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paint surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GMwill repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfacesof new vehicles damaged by this fallout conditionwithin 12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) ofpurchase, whichever occurs first.
416
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Description UsagePolishing ClothWax-Treated
Interior and exteriorpolishing cloth.
Tar and RoadOil Remover
Removes tar, road oil,and asphalt.
Chrome Cleanerand Polish
Use on chrome orstainless steel.
White SidewallTire Cleaner
Removes soil and blackmarks from whitewalls.
Vinyl Cleaner Cleans vinyl.Convertible Top Cleaner Cleans convertible tops.Convertible Top Protector Protects convertible tops.
Glass Cleaner Removes dirt, grime,smoke and fingerprints.
Chrome and WireWheel Cleaner
Removes dirt and grimefrom chrome wheels andwire wheel covers.
Finish Enhancer
Removes dust,fingerprints, and surfacecontaminants. Spray onand wipe off.
Description Usage
Swirl Remover PolishRemoves swirl marks, finescratches, and other lightsurface contamination.
Cleaner Wax Removes light scratchesand protects finish.
Foaming Tire ShineLow Gloss
Cleans, shines, andprotects in one step. Nowiping necessary.
Wash Wax Concentrate
Medium foamingshampoo. Cleans andlightly waxes.Biodegradable andphosphate free.
Spot Lifter
Quickly removes spotsand stains from carpets,vinyl, and clothupholstery.
Odor EliminatorOdorless spray odoreliminator used on fabrics,vinyl, leather and carpet.
417
Vehicle Identification
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. Itappears on a plate in the front corner of theinstrument panel, on the driver’s side. You can seeit if you look through the windshield from outsideyour vehicle. The VIN also appears on the VehicleCertification and Service Parts labels and thecertificates of title and registration.
Engine IdentificationThe eighth character in the VIN is the enginecode. This code will help you identify your vehicle’sengine, specifications, and replacement parts.
Service Parts Identification LabelYou will find this label on the inside of the glovebox. It is very helpful if you ever need to orderparts. On this label, you will find the following:
• VIN
• Model designation
• Paint information
• Production options and special equipment
Do not remove this label from the vehicle.
418
Electrical System
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to yourvehicle unless you check with your dealerfirst. Some electrical equipment can damageyour vehicle and the damage would notbe covered by your warranty. Some add-onelectrical equipment can keep othercomponents from working as they should.
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Beforeattempting to add anything electrical to yourvehicle, see Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 64.
Headlamp WiringThe headlamp wiring is protected by fuses. Anelectrical overload will cause the lamps to remainoff. If this happens, have your headlamp wiringchecked right away.
Windshield Wiper FusesThe windshield wiper motor is protected by a fuseand an internal circuit breaker. If the motoroverheats due to heavy snow, etc., the wiper willstop until the motor cools. If the overload iscaused by some electrical problem and not snow,etc., be sure to get it fixed.
419
Power Windows and OtherPower OptionsCircuit breakers protect the power seats, powerwindows, and other power accessories. When thecurrent load is too heavy, the circuit breakeropens and closes, protecting the circuit until theproblem is fixed or goes away.
Fuses and Circuit BreakersThe wiring circuits in your vehicle are protectedfrom short circuits by a combination of J-Casefuses, mini-fuses and circuit breakers. This greatlyreduces the chance of fires caused by electricalproblems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. Ifthe band is broken or melted, replace the fuse.Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a new one ofthe identical size and rating.
If you ever have a problem on the road anddo not have a spare fuse, you can borrow onethat has the same amperage. Just pick somefeature of your vehicle that you can get alongwithout – like the radio or cigarette lighter – anduse its fuse, if it is the correct amperage. Replaceit as soon as you can.
Instrument Panel Fuse BlockThe instrument panel fuse block is located on thepassenger’s side of the vehicle, under theinstrument panel and under the toe-board.
Remove the carpet and toe-board covering toaccess the fuse block by pulling at the top of eachcorner of the panel. Open the fuse block coverto access the fuses.
420
You can remove fuses using the fuse puller.
Fuses UsageSPARE Spare FuseSPARE Spare FuseSPARE Spare Fuse
Fuses UsageSPARE Spare FuseTPA Tonneau Pulldown ActuatorONSTAR OnStar®
421
Fuses UsageDRIV DRSWTCH Driver Door Switch
TELESWTCH/MSM
Telescope Switch, Memory SeatModule
IGN SWTCH/INTR SNSR Ignition Switch, Intrusion Sensor
BCK/UP LAMP Reverse LampsREVERSELAMPS Reverse Lamps
Blank Not UsedSTOP LAMP Stop LampBTSI SOL/STRWHL LCK
Brake Transmission Shift Interlock,Steering Wheel Column Lock
BLANK Not UsedRDO/S-BAND/VICS Radio, S-Band, VICS
REARFOG/ALDL/TOP SWTCH
Rear Fog Lamp, Assembly LineDiagnostic Link Connector,Convertible Top Switch
GM LANRUN/CRNK GM LAN Devices
Fuses Usage
ISRVM/HVAC Electric Inside Rearview Mirror,Heating Ventilation, Air Conditioning
CRUISESWTCH Cruise Control Switch
TONNEAURELSE Tonneau Release
RUN CRNK Run/Crank RelayHTD SEAT/WPR RLY Heated Seat, Wiper Relays
ECM Engine Control ModuleSDM/AOSSWTCHAIRBAG
Sensing and Diagnostic Module,Automatic Occupant SensingModule, Airbag
CLSTR/HUD Cluster, Heads-Up DisplayHVAC/PWRSND
Heating, Ventilation/Air Conditioning,Power Sounder
EXH MDL Exhaust Module (Z06); Spare(Coupe and Convertible)
DR LCK Door LocksCTSY/LAMP Courtesy LampSWC DM Steering Wheel Dimming
422
Fuses UsageTONNEAURELSE Tonneau Release
TRUNK RELSE Trunk ReleaseREAR/FOG Rear Fog LampsFUEL DRRELSE Fuel Door Release
BLANK Not UsedBLANK Not Used
Fuses UsageLTR Cigarette LighterDRVR HTDSEAT Driver’s Heated Seat
WPR DWELL Wiper DwellBLANK Not UsedAUX PWR Auxiliary Power
Fuses UsagePASS HTDSEAT Passenger’s Heated Seat
BLANK Not UsedPWR/ WNDWS/TRUNK/FUELRELSE
Power Windows, Trunk, Fuel DoorRelease
TRUNK RELSE Trunk ReleaseBLANK Not UsedBLANK Not UsedPWR SEATSMSM Power Seats, Memory Seat Module
BLANK Not UsedBLANK Not UsedWPR/WSW Windshield Wiper/WasherBLANK Not Used
423
Engine Compartment Fuse BlockThere is one fuse block in the engine compartment located on the passenger’s side of the vehicle. SeeEngine Compartment Overview on page 328 for more information on location.
424
Fuse Usage
1 Transmission ControlModule/Transmission
2 Horn, Alternator Sense3 Anti-lock Brakes/Real Time Damping4 Wiper5 Stoplamps/Back-Up Lamps6 02 Sensor7 Battery Main 58 Park Lamps
9 Powertrain Relay Input/ElectronicThrottle Control
10 Manual Transmission Solenoids
11 Engine Control Module/TransmissionControl Module/Easy Key Module
12 Odd Numbered Fuel Injectors
13 Electronic Suspension Control(Option)
14 Canister Purge Solenoid, Mass AirFlow Sensor
15 Air Conditioner Compressor16 Even Numbered Fuel Injectors17 Windshield Washer
Fuse Usage18 Headlamp Washer
19 Passenger Side Low-BeamHeadlamp
20 Fuel Pump21 Driver Side Low-Beam Headlamp22 Front Fog Lamp
23 Passenger Side High-BeamHeadlamp
24 Driver Side High-Beam Headlamp
J-Style Fuses Usage25 Cooling Fan26 Battery Main 327 Anti-lock Brake System
28 Heating/Ventilation/Air ConditioningBlower
29 Battery Main 230 Starter31 Audio Amplifier32 Blank33 Battery Main 1
425
Micro-Relays Usage34 Horn35 Air Conditioning Compressor36 Windshield Washer37 Park, Position Lamps38 Front Fog Lamp39 High-Beam Headlamp46 Headlamp Washer55 Fuel Pump
Mini-Relays Usage40 Rear Defog41 Windshield Wiper High/Low42 Windshield Wiper Run/Accessory43 Crank44 Powertrain Ignition 145 Windshield Wiper On/Off47 Low-Beam Headlamp
Spare Fuses Usage48 Spare49 Spare50 Spare51 Spare52 Spare53 Spare54 Fuse Puller
Diodes Usage
§ Diode 1
§ Wiper
§ Diode 2
426
Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions.
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 443 for more information.
ApplicationCapacities
English Metric
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
For the air conditioning system refrigerant chargeamount, see the refrigerant caution label located
under the hood. See your dealer for moreinformation.
Cooling System 12.6 qt 11.9 L
Engine Oil with Filter
6.0 LV8 Engine 5.5 qt 5.2 L
6.0 LV8 Engine Performance Package (Z51) 6.0 qt 5.7 L
7.0 L V8 Engine 8.0 qt 7.6 L
Fuel Tank 18.0 gal 68.0 L
427
ApplicationCapacities
English Metric
Transmission Fluid
Automatic Transmission (Pan Removal and FilterReplacement) 6.5 qt 6.2 L
Manual Transmission – Base 3.6 qt 3.5 L
Manual Transmission – Z51 4.2 qt 4.0 L
Manual Transmission – Z06 4.5 qt 4.3 L
Wheel Nut Torque 100 lb ft 140 Y
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the appropriate level, as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid level after filling
Engine SpecificationsEngine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap Firing Order
6.0L V8 (LS2) U AutomaticManual
0.040 inch(1.016 mm) 1–8–7–2–6–5–4–3
7.0L V8 (LS7) E Manual 0.040 inch(1.016 mm) 1–8–7–2–6–5–4–3
Engine DataEngine Horsepower Torque Displacement Compression Ratio
6.0L V8 (LS2) 400 @ 6000 rpm 400 lb ft @ 4400 rpm 6.0L 10.9:1
7.0L V8 (LS7) 505 @6300 rpm 470 lb ft @ 4800 rpm 7.0L 11.0:1
428
Maintenance Schedule ................................ 430Introduction ............................................... 430Maintenance Requirements ........................ 430Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 431Using the Maintenance Schedule ............... 431Scheduled Maintenance ............................. 433Additional Required Services ..................... 436Maintenance Footnotes .............................. 437
Owner Checks and Services ..................... 439At Each Fuel Fill ....................................... 439At Least Once a Month ............................. 440At Least Once a Year ............................... 440Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ........ 443Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ... 445Engine Drive Belt Routing ......................... 446Maintenance Record .................................. 447
Section 6 Maintenance Schedule
429
Maintenance Schedule
IntroductionImportant: Keep engine oil at the proper leveland change as recommended.
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? ThePlan supplements your new vehicle warranties.See your Warranty and Owner Assistance bookletor your dealer for details.
Maintenance Requirements
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks,inspections, replacement parts, andrecommended fluids and lubricants asprescribed in this manual are necessary tokeep your vehicle in good working condition.Any damage caused by failure to followscheduled maintenance may not be coveredby warranty.
430
Your Vehicle and the EnvironmentProper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keepyour vehicle in good working condition, but alsohelps the environment. All recommendedmaintenance is important. Improper vehiclemaintenance can even affect the quality of the airwe breathe. Improper fluid levels or the wrongtire inflation can increase the level of emissionsfrom your vehicle. To help protect our environment,and to keep your vehicle in good condition, besure to maintain your vehicle properly.
Using the Maintenance ScheduleWe at General Motors want to help you keep yourvehicle in good working condition. But we donot know exactly how you will drive it. You maydrive very short distances only a few times a week.Or you may drive long distances all the time invery hot, dusty weather. You may use your vehiclein making deliveries. Or you may drive it towork, to do errands, or in many other ways.
Because of all the different ways people use theirvehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may needmore frequent checks and replacements. So pleaseread the following and note how you drive. If youhave any questions on how to keep your vehicle ingood condition, see your GM Goodwrench® dealer.
431
This schedule is for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo withinrecommended limits. You will find these limitson the Tire and Loading Information label.See Loading Your Vehicle on page 307.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces withinlegal driving limits.
• use the recommended fuel. See GasolineOctane on page 320.
The services in Scheduled Maintenance onpage 433 should be performed when indicated.See Additional Required Services on page 436 andMaintenance Footnotes on page 437 for furtherinformation.
{CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehiclecan be dangerous. In trying to do somejobs, you can be seriously injured. Do yourown maintenance work only if you have therequired know-how and the proper toolsand equipment for the job. If you have anydoubt, see your GM Goodwrench® dealer tohave a qualified technician do the work.
Some maintenance services can be complex. So,unless you are technically qualified and havethe necessary equipment, you should have yourGM Goodwrench® dealer do these jobs.
When you go to your GM Goodwrench® dealer foryour service needs, you will know that GM-trainedand supported service technicians will performthe work using genuine GM parts.
432
If you want to purchase service information,see Service Publications Ordering Informationon page 471.
Owner Checks and Services on page 439 tells youwhat should be checked, when to check it, andwhat you can easily do to help keep your vehicle ingood condition.
The proper replacement parts, fluids, andlubricants to use are listed in RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 443 and NormalMaintenance Replacement Parts on page 445.When your vehicle is serviced, make sure theseare used. All parts should be replaced and allnecessary repairs done before you or anyone elsedrives the vehicle. We recommend the use ofgenuine GM parts.
Scheduled MaintenanceWhen the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message comeson, it means that service is required for yourvehicle. Have your vehicle serviced as soon aspossible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It ispossible that, if you are driving under the bestconditions, the engine oil life system may notindicate that vehicle service is necessary for over ayear. However, your engine oil and filter must bechanged at least once a year and at this time thesystem must be reset. Your GM Goodwrench®
dealer has GM-trained service technicians who willperform this work using genuine GM parts and resetthe system.
433
If the engine oil life system is ever resetaccidentally, you must service your vehicle within3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last service.Remember to reset the oil life system wheneverthe oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life System onpage 340 for information on the Engine Oil LifeSystem and resetting the system.
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL messageappears, certain services, checks, and inspectionsare required. Required services are describedin the following for “Maintenance I” and“Maintenance II.” Generally, it is recommendedthat your first service be Maintenance I, yoursecond service be Maintenance II, and that youalternate Maintenance I and Maintenance IIthereafter. However, in some cases,Maintenance II may be required more often.
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if themessage comes on within 10 months since thevehicle was purchased or Maintenance IIwas performed.
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if theprevious service performed was Maintenance I.Always use Maintenance II whenever the messagecomes on 10 months or more since the lastservice or if the message has not come on at allfor one year.
434
Scheduled MaintenanceService Maintenance I Maintenance II
Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 332. Reset oil life system.See Engine Oil Life System on page 340. An Emission Control Service. • •
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (g). • •Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 342. See footnote (k). •
Check tire inflation pressures and tire wear. See Tires on page 378. • •Inspect brake system. See footnote (a). • •Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid asneeded. • •
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services”in this section. • •
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b). •Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c). •Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d). •Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e). •Lubricate body components. See footnote (f). •Replace passenger compartment air filter. See footnote (j). •
435
Additional Required ServicesThe following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicatedmiles (kilometers) shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000(40 000)
50,000(80 000)
75,000(120 000)
100,000(160 000)
125,000(200 000)
150,000(240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage orleaks. • • • • • •
Inspect exhaust system for loose ordamaged components. • • • • • •
Replace engine air cleaner filter. SeeEngine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 342. • • •
Change automatic transmission fluidand filter (severe service).See footnote (h).
• • •
Change automatic transmission fluidand filter (normal service). •
Replace spark plugs and inspect sparkplug wires. An Emission ControlService.
•
436
Additional Required Services (cont’d)
Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000(40 000)
50,000(80 000)
75,000(120 000)
100,000(160 000)
125,000(200 000)
150,000(240 000)
Engine cooling system service (or everyfive years, whichever occurs first). AnEmission Control Service.See footnote (i).
•
Inspect engine accessory drive belt. AnEmission Control Service.See footnote (l).
•
Maintenance Footnotes(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses forproper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing,etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors forsurface condition. Inspect other brake parts,including calipers, parking brake, etc.
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension andsteering system for damaged, loose, or missingparts or signs of wear. Inspect power steering linesand hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks,cracks, chafing, etc. If you have the Z06 or Z51performance package, lubricate the outer ends ofboth rear toe-links.
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replacedif they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated.Inspect all pipes, fittings, and clamps; replace withgenuine GM parts as needed. To help ensureproper operation, a pressure test of the coolingsystem and pressure cap and cleaning the outsideof the radiator and air conditioning condenser isrecommended at least once a year.
(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear orcracking. Replace wiper blades that appear wornor damaged or that streak or miss areas ofthe windshield.
437
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and allyour belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, andanchorages are working properly. Look forany other loose or damaged safety belt systemparts. If you see anything that might keep a safetybelt system from doing its job, have it repaired.Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced. Alsolook for any opened or broken airbag coverings,and have them repaired or replaced. Theairbag system does not need regular maintenance.
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders and bodydoor hinges. Lubricate all hinges and latches,including those for the hood, rear compartment,console door, and any folding seat hardware. Morefrequent lubrication may be required whenexposed to a corrosive environment. Applyingsilicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean clothwill make them last longer, seal better, and notstick or squeak.
(g) A fluid loss in any vehicle system couldindicate a problem. Have the system inspectedand repaired and the fluid level checked. Add fluidif needed.
(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filterif the vehicle is mainly driven under one ormore of these conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outsidetemperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) orhigher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.− Uses such as high performance operation.
(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system.This service can be complex; you should haveyour dealer perform this service. See EngineCoolant on page 347 for what to use. Inspecthoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap,and filler neck. Pressure test the coolingsystem and pressure cap.
(j) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,the filter may require replacement more often.
(k) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,inspect the filter at each engine oil change.
(l) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessivecracks, or obvious damage. Replace belt ifnecessary.
438
Owner Checks and ServicesThese owner checks and services should beperformed at the intervals specified to helpensure the safety, dependability, and emissioncontrol performance of your vehicle. YourGM Goodwrench® dealer can assist you withthese checks and services.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed atonce. Whenever any fluids or lubricants are addedto your vehicle, make sure they are the properones, as shown in Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 443.
At Each Fuel FillIt is important to perform these underhood checksat each fuel fill.
Engine Oil Level CheckCheck the engine oil level and add the properoil if necessary. See Engine Oil on page 332 forfurther details.
Notice: It is important to check your oilregularly and keep it at the proper level. Failureto keep your engine oil at the proper levelcan cause damage to your engine not coveredby your warranty.
Engine Coolant Level CheckCheck the engine coolant level and addDEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary. SeeEngine Coolant on page 347 for further details.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level CheckCheck the windshield washer fluid level in thewindshield washer fluid reservoir and add theproper fluid if necessary.
439
At Least Once a Month
Tire Inspection and Inflation CheckVisually inspect your vehicle’s tires for wearand make sure they are inflated to the correctpressures. See Inflation - Tire Pressureon page 386.
At Least Once a Year
Starter Switch Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If thevehicle moves, you or others could beinjured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enoughroom around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and theregular brake. See Parking Brake on page 103.Do not use the accelerator pedal, and beready to turn off the engine immediately ifit starts.
3. On automatic transmission vehicles, try tostart the engine in each gear. The vehicleshould start only in PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N). If the vehicle starts in anyother position, contact your GM Goodwrench®
dealer for service.On manual transmission vehicles, put the shiftlever in NEUTRAL, push the clutch pedaldown halfway, and try to start the engine. Thevehicle should start only when the clutchpedal is pushed down all the way to the floor.If the vehicle starts when the clutch pedalis not pushed all the way down, contact yourGM Goodwrench® dealer for service.
440
Automatic Transmission Shift LockControl System Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If thevehicle moves, you or others could beinjured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enoughroom around the vehicle. It should be parkedon a level surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See ParkingBrake on page 103.Be ready to apply the regular brakeimmediately if the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off and without applying theregular brake, try to move the shift lever outof PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shiftlever moves out of PARK (P), contact yourGM Goodwrench® dealer for service.
441
Parking Brake and AutomaticTransmission Park (P) Mechanism Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, yourvehicle could begin to move. You orothers could be injured and propertycould be damaged. Make sure there isroom in front of your vehicle in case itbegins to roll. Be ready to apply theregular brake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facingdownhill. Keeping your foot on the regularbrake, set the parking brake.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:With the engine running and transmission inNEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressurefrom the regular brake pedal. Do this until thevehicle is held by the parking brake only.
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holdingability: With the engine running, shift toPARK (P). Then release the parking brakefollowed by the regular brake.
Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service isrequired.
Underbody Flushing ServiceAt least every spring, use plain water to flush anycorrosive materials from the underbody. Takecare to clean thoroughly any areas where mud andother debris can collect.
442
Recommended Fluids andLubricantsFluids and lubricants identified below by name,part number, or specification may be obtained fromyour dealer.
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Engine Oil
The engine requires a specialengine oil meeting GM StandardGM4718M. Oils meeting thisstandard may be identified assynthetic, and should also beidentified with the AmericanPetroleum Institute Certified forGasoline Engines starburst symbol.However, not all synthetic API oilswith the starburst symbol will meetthis GM standard. You should lookfor and use only an oil that meetsGM Standard GM4718M.GM Goodwrench® oil meets all therequirements for your vehicle. Forthe proper viscosity, see Engine Oilon page 332.
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Engine Coolant
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and use only DEX-COOL®
Coolant. See Engine Coolant onpage 347.
Hydraulic BrakeSystem
Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid orequivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
WindshieldWasher GM Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
HydraulicClutch System
Hydraulic Clutch Fluid. Use onlyGM Part No. U.S. 88958860,in Canada 88901244, Super DOT-4brake fluid.
Power SteeringSystem
GM Power Steering Fluid(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,in Canada 89021186).
ChassisLubrication
(Rear Toe-LinkOuter Ends with
ZO6 or Z51Option)
Chassis Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,in Canada 88901242) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.
443
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
ManualTransmission
Manual Transmission Fluid(GM Part No. U.S. 88861800, inCanada 88861801).
AutomaticTransmission
DEXRON®-VI AutomaticTransmission Fluid.
Key LockCylinders
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).
Rear Axle(Limited-SlipDifferential)
SAE 75W-90 SyntheticAxle Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 89021677,in Canada 89021678) meetingGM Specification 9986115. With acomplete drain and refill, add4 ounces (118 ml), or 6.4 ounces(190 ml) for ZO6 Models, ofLimited-Slip Axle Lubricant Additive(GM Part No. U.S. 1052358,in Canada 992694) where required.See Rear Axle on page 370.
Usage Fluid/LubricantHood LatchAssembly,Secondary
Latch, Pivots,Spring
Anchor, andRelease Pawl
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,in Canada 992723) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.
Hood and DoorHinges
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).
WeatherstripConditioning
Weatherstrip Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,in Canada 10953518) orDielectric Silicone Grease(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,in Canada 992887).
444
Normal Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from yourGM dealer.
Part GM Part Number AC Delco® PartNumber
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter6.0L V8 10342024 A2945C7.0L V8 15776148 A3077C
Engine Oil Filter6.0L V8 89017524 PF487.0L V8 89017524 PF48
Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element 10345066 CF131CSpark Plug
6.0L V8 12571164 41-9857.0L V8 12571165 41-104
Windshield Wiper Blade20.7 inches (52.5 cm)
Driver’s Side 12335960 —Passenger’s Side 12335961 —
445
Engine Drive Belt Routing
6.0L and 7.0L Engines
446
Maintenance RecordAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service,and the type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 430.Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 439 can be added on the followingrecord pages. You should retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Date OdometerReading Serviced By Maintenance I or
Maintenance II Services Performed
447
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date OdometerReading Serviced By Maintenance I or
Maintenance II Services Performed
448
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date OdometerReading Serviced By Maintenance I or
Maintenance II Services Performed
449
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date OdometerReading Serviced By Maintenance I or
Maintenance II Services Performed
450
Customer Assistance and Information ....... 452Customer Satisfaction Procedure ............... 452Online Owner Center ................................. 455Customer Assistance for Text Telephone
(TTY) Users ........................................... 456Customer Assistance Offices ..................... 456GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ........ 457Roadside Assistance Program ................... 458Courtesy Transportation ............................. 461Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data
Recorders .............................................. 464Collision Damage Repair ........................... 465
Reporting Safety Defects ............................ 470Reporting Safety Defects to the United
States Government ................................ 470Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government ............................ 470Reporting Safety Defects to General
Motors ................................................... 470Service Publications Ordering
Information ............................................. 471
Section 7 Customer Assistance Information
451
Customer Assistance andInformation
Customer Satisfaction ProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill are importantto your dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, anyconcerns with the sales transaction or theoperation of your vehicle will be resolved by yourdealer’s sales or service departments. Sometimes,however, despite the best intentions of allconcerned, misunderstandings can occur. If yourconcern has not been resolved to yoursatisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a memberof dealership management. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level. If the matterhas already been reviewed with the sales,service, or parts manager, contact the owner ofthe dealership or the general manager.
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member ofdealership management, it appears your concerncannot be resolved by the dealership withoutfurther help, in the U.S., contact the ChevroletCustomer Assistance Center by calling1-800-222-1020. In Canada, contact GeneralMotors of Canada Customer CommunicationCentre by calling 1-800-263-3777 (English) or1-800-263-7854 (French).
We encourage you to call the toll-free number inorder to give your inquiry prompt attention. Pleasehave the following information available to givethe Customer Assistance Representative:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This isavailable from the vehicle registration ortitle, or the plate at the top left of theinstrument panel and visible through thewindshield.
• Dealership name and location.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage(kilometers).
When contacting Chevrolet, please remember thatyour concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’sfacility. That is why we suggest you followStep One first if you have a concern.
452
STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Both GeneralMotors and your dealer are committed to makingsure you are completely satisfied with yournew vehicle. However, if you continue to remainunsatisfied after following the procedure outlined inSteps 1 and 2, you should file with the BetterBusiness Bureau (BBB) Auto Line Programto enforce your rights.
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of courtprogram administered by the Council of BetterBusiness Bureaus to settle automotive disputesregarding vehicle repairs or the interpretationof the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Although youmay be required to resort to this informal disputeresolution program prior to filing a court action,use of the program is free of charge and your casewill generally be heard within 40 days. If you donot agree with the decision given in your case, youmay reject it and proceed with any other venuefor relief available to you.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Programusing the toll-free telephone number or write themat the following address:
BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and theDistrict of Columbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage, and other factors. GeneralMotors reserves the right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinue its participation inthis program.
453
STEP THREE — Canadian Owners: In the eventthat you do not feel your concerns have beenaddressed after following the procedure outlined inSteps 1 and 2, General Motors of CanadaLimited wants you to be aware of its participationin a no-charge Mediation/Arbitration Program.General Motors of Canada Limited has committedto binding arbitration of owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle service claims. The programprovides for the review of the facts involved byan impartial third party arbiter, and may include aninformal hearing before the arbiter. The programis designed so that the entire dispute settlementprocess, from the time you file your complaintto the final decision, should be completed in about70 days. We believe our impartial programoffers advantages over courts in most jurisdictionsbecause it is informal, quick, and free of charge.
For further information concerning eligibility inthe Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan(CAMVAP), call toll-free 1-800-207-0685.Alternatively, you may call the General MotorsCustomer Communication Centre, 1-800-263-3777(English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or you maywrite to:
The Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer Communication CentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Your inquiry should be accompanied by yourVehicle Identification Number (VIN).
454
Online Owner Center
Online Owner Center(United States only)The Owner Center is a resource for your GMownership needs. Specific vehicle information canbe found in one place.
The Online Owner Center allows you to:• Get e-mail service reminders.
• Access information about your specificvehicle, including tips and videos andan electronic version of this owner manual.
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service historyand maintenance schedule.
• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.
• Receive special promotions and privilegesonly available to members.
Refer to www.MyGMLink.com on the web forupdated information and to register your vehicle.
My GM Canada (Canada only)My GM Canada is a password-protected sectionof gmcanada.com where you can save informationon GM vehicles, get personalized offers, anduse handy tools and forms with greater ease.
Here are a few of the valuable tools and servicesyou will have access to:
− My Showroom: Find and save information onvehicles and current offers in your area.
− My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such asaddress and phone number for each ofyour preferred GM Dealers or Retailers.
− My Driveway: Receive service reminders andhelpful advice on owning and maintainingyour vehicle.
− My Preferences: Manage your profile,subscribe to E-News and use tools and formswith greater ease.
To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My GMCanada section within www.gmcanada.com.
455
Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) UsersTo assist customers who are deaf, hard ofhearing, or speech-impaired and who use TextTelephones (TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY equipmentavailable at its Customer Assistance Center.Any TTY user in the U.S. can communicate withChevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV (2438).(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
Customer Assistance OfficesChevrolet encourages customers to call thetoll-free number for assistance. However, if acustomer wishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet, theletter should be addressed to:
United States — Customer AssistanceChevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170
www.Chevrolet.com1-800-222-10201-800-833-2438(For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA(243-8872)Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From Puerto Rico:1-800-496-9992 (English)1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From U.S. Virgin Islands:1-800-496-9994Fax Number: 313-381-0022
Canada — Customer AssistanceGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
www.gmcanada.com1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephonedevices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
456
Overseas — Customer AssistancePlease contact the local General MotorsBusiness Unit.
Mexico, Central America andCaribbean Islands/Countries(Except Puerto Rico and U.S.Virgin Islands) — Customer Assistance
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.Customer Assistance CenterPaseo de la Reforma # 2740Col. Lomas de BezaresC.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.01-800-508-0000Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram
This program, available to qualified applicants,can reimburse you up to $1,000 of the costof eligible aftermarket adaptive equipment requiredfor your vehicle, such as hand controls or awheelchair/scooter lift.
The offer is available for a very limited period oftime from the date of vehicle purchase/lease.For more details, or to determine your vehicle’seligibility, visit gmmobility.com or call the GMMobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935.Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.
General Motors of Canada also has a MobilityProgram. Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)for details. TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.
457
Roadside Assistance ProgramIn the U.S., call 1-800-CHEV-USA(1-800-243-8872)
In Canada, call 1-800-268-6800
Service available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
As the owner of a new Chevrolet vehicle, youare automatically enrolled in the ChevroletRoadside Assistance program. This value-addedservice is intended to provide you with peaceof mind as you drive in the city or travel theopen road.
Who is Covered?Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicleoperator, regardless of ownership. A person drivingthis vehicle without the consent of the owner isnot eligible for coverage.
The following services are provided in the U.S.during the Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period and,in Canada, during the Base Warranty coverageperiod of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, up toa maximum coverage of $100.
• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for thecustomer to get to the nearest service station(about $5 in the U.S. and 10 litres inCanada). Service to provide diesel may berestricted. For safety reasons, propaneand other alternative fuels will not be providedthrough this service.
• Lock-out Service: To ensure security,the driver must present the vehicle registrationand personal ID before lock-out service isprovided. Lock-out service will be covered atno charge if you are unable to gain entryinto your vehicle. If your vehicle will not start,Roadside Assistance will arrange to haveyour vehicle towed to the nearest authorizeddealership. In the U.S., replacement keysmade at the customer’s expense will becovered within 10 miles (16 km).
458
• Emergency Tow From a Public Roadway orHighway: Tow to the nearest dealership forwarranty service or in the event of avehicle-disabling accident. Winch-outassistance when the vehicle is mired in sand,mud, or snow.
• Flat Tire Change: If your vehicle has a sparetire, installation of the tire in good conditionwill be covered at no charge. The customer isresponsible for the repair or replacement ofthe tire if not covered by a warrantable failure.
• Jump Start: No-start occurrences whichrequire a battery jump start will be covered atno charge.
Additional Services for CanadianCustomers• Trip Routing Service: Upon Request,
Roadside Assistance will send you detailed,computer-personalized maps, highlighting yourchoice of either the most direct route or themost scenic route to your destination,anywhere in North America, along with anyhelpful travel information we may havepertaining to your trip. To request this service,please call us toll-free at 1-800-268-6800.We will make every attempt to send yourpersonalized trip routing as quickly aspossible, but it is best to allow three weeksbefore your planned departure date.Trip routing requests will be limited tosix per calendar year.
459
• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance:In the event of a warranty related vehicledisablement, while en route and over250 kilometres from original point of departure,you may qualify for trip interruption expenseassistance. This assistance covers reasonablereimbursement of up to a maximum of$500 (Canadian) for (A) meals (maximum of$50/day), (B) lodging (maximum of $100/night)and (C) alternate ground transportation(maximum of $40/day). This benefit is to assistyou with some of the unplanned expenseyou may incur while waiting for your vehicle tobe repaired.Pre-authorization, original detailed receiptsand a copy of the repair order are required.Once authorization has been given, youradvisor will help you make any necessaryarrangements and explain how to claim for tripinterruption expense assistance.
• Alternative Service: There may be times,when Roadside Assistance cannot providetimely assistance, your advisor may authorizeyou to secure local emergency road service,and you will be reimbursed up to $100upon submission of the original receipt toRoadside Assistance.
In many instances, mechanical failures arecovered under Chevrolet’s Bumper-to-Bumperwarranty, and the duration of the Base WarrantyCoverage for Canadian customers of the newVehicle Limited Warranty. However, any cost forparts and labor for non-warranty repairs arethe responsibility of the driver.For prompt and efficient assistance when calling,please provide the following to the RoadsideAssistance Representative:• Your name, home address, and home
telephone number.• Telephone number of your location.• Location of the vehicle.• Model, year, color, and license plate number.• Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle.• Description of the problem.
While we hope you never have the occasion to useour service, it is added security while traveling foryou and your family. Remember, we are only aphone call away. U.S. customers call ChevroletRoadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA(1-800-243-8872), text telephone (TTY) users, call1-888-889-2438, Canadian customers call1-800-268-6800.
460
Chevrolet and General Motors of Canada Limitedreserve the right to limit services or reimbursementto an owner or driver when, in their solediscretion, the claims become excessive infrequency or type of occurrence.
Roadside Assistance is not part of or included inthe coverage provided by the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. Chevrolet and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right to make anychanges or discontinue the Roadside Assistanceprogram at any time without notification.
Towing and Road Service ExclusionsSpecifically excluded from Roadside Assistancecoverage are towing or services for vehiclesoperated on a non-public roadway or highway,fines, impound towing caused by a violationof local, Municipal, State, Provincial, or Federallaw, and mounting, dismounting or changingof snow tires, chains, or other traction devices.
Courtesy TransportationTo enhance your ownership experience, we andour participating dealers are proud to offerCourtesy Transportation, a customer supportprogram for new vehicles.
For warranty repairs during the Bumper-to-Bumper(U.S.) or Base Warranty Coverage period(Canada), provided by the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty, interim transportation may be availableunder the Courtesy Transportation program.Several courtesy transportation options areavailable to assist in reducing your inconveniencewhen warranty repairs are required.
Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the NewVehicle Limited Warranty and is available onlyat participating dealers. A separate booklet entitled“Warranty and Owner Assistance Information”furnished with each new vehicle provides detailedwarranty coverage information.
461
Scheduling Service AppointmentsWhen your vehicle requires warranty service,contact your dealer and request an appointment.By scheduling a service appointment andadvising your service consultant of yourtransportation needs, your dealer can helpminimize your inconvenience.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into theservice department immediately, keep driving ituntil it can be scheduled for service, unless,of course, the problem is safety-related. If it is,please call your dealership, let them know this, andask for instructions.
If the dealer requests that you simply drop thevehicle off for service, you are urged to do so asearly in the work day as possible to allow forthe same day repair.
Transportation OptionsWarranty service can generally be completedwhile you wait. However, if you are unable to wait,GM helps to minimize your inconvenience byproviding several transportation options.Depending on the circumstances, your dealer canoffer you one of the following:
Shuttle ServiceShuttle service is the preferred means of offeringCourtesy Transportation and participatingdealers can provide you with shuttle service to getyou to your destination with minimal interruptionof your daily schedule. This includes one-wayor round trip shuttle service within reasonable timeand distance parameters for the dealer’s area.
462
Public Transportation or FuelReimbursementIf your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,and public transportation is used as ‘shuttleservice,’ the reimbursement is limited to theassociated shuttle allowance and must besupported by original receipts. In addition, for U.S.customers, should you arrange transportationthrough a friend or relative, limited reimbursementfor reasonable fuel expenses may be available.Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and besupported by original receipts.
Courtesy Rental VehicleYour dealer may arrange to provide you with acourtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you fora rental vehicle that you obtain if your vehicle iskept for an overnight warranty repair. Rentalreimbursement will be limited and must besupported by original receipts. This requires thatyou sign and complete a rental agreementand meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicleprovider requirements. Requirements vary and
may include minimum age requirements, insurancecoverage, credit card, etc. You are responsiblefor fuel usage charges and may also beresponsible for taxes, levies, usage fees,excessive mileage, or rental usage beyond thecompletion of the repair.
Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicleas a courtesy rental.
Additional Program InformationAll program options, such as shuttle service, maynot be available at every dealer. Please contactyour dealer for specific information aboutavailability. All Courtesy Transportationarrangements will be administered by appropriatedealer personnel.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterallymodify, change or discontinue CourtesyTransportation at any time and to resolve allquestions of claim eligibility pursuant to the termsand conditions described herein at its solediscretion.
463
Vehicle Data Collection and EventData RecordersYour vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles,has a number of sophisticated computer systemsthat monitor and control several aspects of thevehicle’s performance. Your vehicle uses on-boardvehicle computers to monitor emission controlcomponents to optimize fuel economy, to monitorconditions for airbag deployment and, if the vehiclehas the Anti-lock Brake System (ABS), to provideanti-lock braking and to help the driver control thevehicle in difficult driving situations. Someinformation may be stored during regular operationsto facilitate repair of detected malfunctions; otherinformation is stored only in a crash event bycomputer systems, such as those commonly calledEvent Data Recorders (EDR).
In a crash event, computer systems, such as theairbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) inyour vehicle may record information about thecondition of the vehicle and how it was operated,such as data related to engine speed, brakeapplication, throttle position, vehicle speed, safetybelt usage, airbag readiness, airbag performance,and the severity of a collision.
This information has been used to improve vehiclecrash performance and may be used to improvecrash performance of future vehicles and drivingsafety. Unlike the data recorders on manyairplanes, these on-board systems do not recordsounds, such as conversation of vehicle occupants.
To read this information, special equipment isneeded and access to the vehicle or the devicethat stores the data is required. GM will not accessinformation about a crash event or share it withothers other than:
• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if thevehicle is leased, with the consent of thelessee,
• in response to an official request of police orsimilar government office,
• as part of GM’s defense of litigation throughthe discovery process, or
• as required by law.
464
In addition, once GM collects or receives data,GM may:
• use the data for GM research needs,
• make it available for research whereappropriate confidentiality is to be maintainedand need is shown, or
• share summary data which is not tied to aspecific vehicle with non-GM organizationsfor research purposes.
Others, such as law enforcement, may haveaccess to the special equipment that can read theinformation if they have access to the vehicleor the device that stores the data.
If your vehicle has OnStar®, please check theOnStar® subscription service agreement or manualfor information on its operations and datacollection.
Collision Damage RepairIf your vehicle is involved in a collision and it isdamaged, have the damage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the proper equipment andquality replacement parts. Poorly performedcollision repairs will diminish your vehicle’s resalevalue, and safety performance can becompromised in subsequent collisions.
Collision PartsGenuine GM Collision parts are new parts madewith the same materials and construction methodsas the parts with which your vehicle wasoriginally built. Genuine GM Collision parts areyour best choice to assure that your vehicle’sdesigned appearance, durability, and safety arepreserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can helpmaintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.
465
Recycled original equipment parts may also beused for repair. These parts are typically removedfrom vehicles that were total losses in prioraccidents. In most cases, the parts being recycledare from undamaged sections of the vehicle.A recycled original equipment GM part, may be anacceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’soriginally designed appearance and safetyperformance, however, the history of these partsis not known. Such parts are not covered byyour GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered by that warranty.
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. Theseare made by companies other than GM and maynot have been tested for your vehicle. As a result,these parts may fit poorly, exhibit prematuredurability/corrosion problems, and may not performproperly in subsequent collisions. Aftermarket partsare not covered by your GM New Vehicle LimitedWarranty, and any vehicle failure related to suchparts are not covered by that warranty.
Repair FacilityGM also recommends that you choose a collisionrepair facility that meets your needs before youever need collision repairs. Your GM dealermay have a collision repair center with GM-trainedtechnicians and state of the art equipment, orbe able to recommend a collision repair center thathas GM-trained technicians and comparableequipment.
Insuring Your VehicleProtect your investment in your GM vehicle withcomprehensive and collision insurance coverage.There are significant differences in the qualityof coverage afforded by various insurance policyterms. Many insurance policies provide reducedprotection to your GM vehicle by limitingcompensation for damage repairs by usingaftermarket collision parts. Some insurancecompanies will not specify aftermarket collisionparts. When purchasing insurance, we recommendthat you assure your vehicle will be repairedwith GM original equipment collision parts. If suchinsurance coverage is not available from yourcurrent insurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.
466
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing companymay require you to have insurance that assuresrepairs with Genuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts or GenuineManufacturer replacement parts. Read your leasecarefully, as you may be charged at the end ofyour lease for poor quality repairs.
If an Accident OccursHere is what to do if you are involved in anaccident.
• Try to relax and then check to make sure youare all right. If you are uninjured, make surethat no one else in your vehicle, or theother vehicle, is injured.
• If there has been an injury, call 911 for help.Do not leave the scene of an accident untilall matters have been taken care of. Moveyour vehicle only if its position puts youin danger or you are instructed to move it by apolice officer.
• Give only the necessary and requestedinformation to police and other parties involvedin the accident. Do not discuss your personalcondition, mental frame of mind, or anythingunrelated to the accident. This will help guardagainst post-accident legal action.
• If you need roadside assistance, callGM Roadside Assistance. See RoadsideAssistance Program on page 458 for moreinformation.
• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know wherethe towing service will be taking it. Get acard from the tow truck operator or write downthe driver’s name, the service’s name, andthe phone number.
• Remove any valuables from your vehicle beforeit is towed away. Make sure this includes yourinsurance information and registration if youkeep these items in your vehicle.
467
• Gather the important information you willneed from the other driver. Things like name,address, phone number, driver’s licensenumber, vehicle license plate, vehicle make,model and model year, Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN), insurance company and policynumber, and a general description of thedamage to the other vehicle.
• If possible, call your insurance company fromthe scene of the accident. They will walk youthrough the information they will need. If theyask for a police report, phone or go to the policedepartment headquarters the next day and youcan get a copy of the report for a nominal fee. Insome states/provinces with “no fault” insurancelaws, a report may not be necessary. This isespecially true if there are no injuries and bothvehicles are driveable.
• Choose a reputable collision repair facility foryour vehicle. Whether you select a GM dealeror a private collision repair facility to fix thedamage, make sure you are comfortable withthem. Remember, you will have to feelcomfortable with their work for a long time.
• Once you have an estimate, read it carefullyand make sure you understand what work willbe performed on your vehicle. If you have aquestion, ask for an explanation. Reputableshops welcome this opportunity.
468
Managing the Vehicle Damage RepairProcessIn the event that your vehicle requires damagerepairs, GM recommends that you take an activerole in its repair. If you have a pre-determinedrepair facility of choice, take your vehicle there, orhave it towed there. Specify to the facility thatany required replacement collision parts be originalequipment parts, either new Genuine GM partsor recycled original GM parts. Remember, recycledparts will not be covered by your GM vehiclewarranty.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you mustlive with the repair. Depending on your policylimits, your insurance company may initially valuethe repair using aftermarket parts. Discuss thiswith your repair professional, and insist onGenuine GM parts.
Remember if your vehicle is leased you may beobligated to have the vehicle repaired withGenuine GM parts, even if your insurancecoverage does not pay the full cost.
If another party’s insurance company is paying forthe repairs, you are not obligated to accept arepair valuation based on that insurancecompany’s collision policy repair limits, as youhave no contractual limits with that company. Insuch cases, you can have control of the repair andparts choices as long as cost stays withinreasonable limits.
469
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to theUnited States GovernmentIf you believe that your vehicle has a defect whichcould cause a crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediately inform the NationalHighway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),in addition to notifying General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may openan investigation, and if it finds that a safetydefect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order arecall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSAcannot become involved in individual problemsbetween you, your dealer, or General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the VehicleSafety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; orwrite to:
Administrator, NHTSA400 Seventh Street, SW.Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motorvehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
Reporting Safety Defects to theCanadian GovernmentIf you live in Canada, and you believe that yourvehicle has a safety defect, you shouldimmediately notify Transport Canada, in additionto notifying General Motors of Canada Limited.You may call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:
Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch2780 Sheffield RoadOttawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (or TransportCanada) in a situation like this, we certainly hopeyou will notify General Motors. Please call theChevrolet Customer Assistance Center at1-800-222-1020, or write:
Chevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170
470
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Service Publications OrderingInformation
Service ManualsService Manuals have the diagnosis and repairinformation on engines, transmission, axlesuspension, brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
Transmission, Transaxle, TransferCase Unit Repair ManualThis manual provides information on unit repairservice procedures, adjustments, andspecifications for GM transmissions, transaxles,and transfer cases.
Service BulletinsService Bulletins give technical service informationneeded to knowledgeably service GeneralMotors cars and trucks. Each bulletin containsinstructions to assist in the diagnosis and serviceof your vehicle.
In Canada, the service bulletin reference numbercan be obtained by contacting your GeneralMotors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE(1-800-463-7483). This reference number isneeded to order the service bulletin fromHelm, Inc.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $6.00 US + Processing Fee
471
Owner InformationOwner publications are written specifically forowners and intended to provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle. The ownermanual will include the Maintenance Schedule forall models.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual,and Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 US +Processing Fee
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 US +Processing Fee
Current and Past Model Order FormsTechnical Service Bulletins and Manuals areavailable for current and past model GM vehicles.To request an order form, please specify yearand model name of the vehicle.
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PMEastern TimeFor Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. onthe World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
Or you can write to:
Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207
Prices are subject to change without notice andwithout incurring obligation. Allow ample timefor delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices arequoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents areto make checks payable in U.S. funds.
472
AAccessories and Modifications ..................... 318Accessory Power Outlet(s) .......................... 176Active Handling System ............................... 281Active Handling System Light ...................... 196Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ....................................................... 65Additives, Fuel ............................................ 322Add-On Electrical Equipment ....................... 419Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ............................. 342Air Conditioning ........................................... 177Airbag
Passenger Status Indicator ....................... 190Readiness Light ....................................... 189
Airbag Sensing and DiagnosticModule (SDM) .......................................... 464
Airbag System ............................................... 50Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......................... 65How Does an Airbag Restrain? .................. 57Passenger Sensing System ....................... 59Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ..... 64What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .................. 57What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates? ................................................. 58When Should an Airbag Inflate? ................. 56
Airbag System (cont.)Where Are the Airbags? ............................. 53
Antenna, Diversity Antenna System ............. 270Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System .................................................... 270Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................... 277Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light ....... 195Appearance Care
Aluminum Wheels .................................... 415Care of Safety Belts ................................ 411Cargo Cover and Convenience Net .......... 411Chemical Paint Spotting ........................... 416Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .............. 412Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 407Coated Moldings ...................................... 409Convertible Top ........................................ 414Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 409Fiberglass Springs ................................... 416Finish Care .............................................. 412Finish Damage ......................................... 416Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces .................................... 410Leather .................................................... 410Removable Roof Panel ............................ 414Tires ........................................................ 415Underbody Maintenance ........................... 416Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials .......... 417
473
Appearance Care (cont.)Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 411Weatherstrips ........................................... 411Windshield and Wiper Blades ................... 413
Ashtray(s) .................................................... 177Audio System(s) .......................................... 242
Audio Steering Wheel Controls ................. 267Care of Your CD Player ........................... 270Care of Your CDs .................................... 269Diversity Antenna System ......................... 270Navigation/Radio System, see Navigation
Manual ................................................. 267Radio with CD ......................................... 244Setting the Time ...................................... 243Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................ 267Understanding Radio Reception ............... 268XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ...... 270
Automatic Door Lock ..................................... 81Automatic Transmission
Fluid ........................................................ 345Operation ................................................... 95
BBattery ........................................................ 363
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver ................. 170Run-Down Protection ............................... 171
Battery (cont.)Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................... 298Brake
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................. 277Emergencies ............................................ 279Parking .................................................... 103System Warning Light .............................. 194
Brakes ........................................................ 360Braking ....................................................... 276Braking in Emergencies ............................... 279Break-In, New Vehicle ................................... 90Bulb Replacement ....................................... 370
Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 371Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, and
Parking Lamps ..................................... 372High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting .... 371Replacement Bulbs .................................. 374Taillamps, Turn Signal, and Stoplamps ..... 373
Buying New Tires ........................................ 393
CCalibration .......................................... 108, 110California Fuel ............................................. 321California Proposition 65 Warning ................ 319Canadian Owners ........................................... 3Capacities and Specifications ...................... 427
474
Carbon Monoxide ............... 83, 106, 302, 313Care of
Safety Belts ............................................. 411Your CD Player ........................................ 270Your CDs ................................................. 269
Cargo Cover ............................................... 132CD, MP3 ..................................................... 259Center Console Storage Area ...................... 129Chains, Tire ................................................. 401Check
Engine Light ............................................ 198Checking Things Under the Hood ................ 326Chemical Paint Spotting .............................. 416Child Restraints
Child Restraint Systems ............................. 37Infants and Young Children ........................ 34Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children ........................................... 42, 45Older Children ........................................... 31Securing a Child Restraint in the
Passenger Seat Position ......................... 46Cigarette Lighter .......................................... 177Cleaning
Aluminum Wheels .................................... 415Cargo Cover and Convenience Net .......... 411Coated Moldings ...................................... 409Convertible Top ........................................ 414
Cleaning (cont.)Exterior Lamps/Lenses ............................. 412Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 409Fiberglass Springs ................................... 416Finish Care .............................................. 412Inside of Your Vehicle .............................. 407Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces .................................... 410Leather .................................................... 410Removable Roof Panel ............................ 414Tires ........................................................ 415Underbody Maintenance ........................... 416Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 411Weatherstrips ........................................... 411Windshield and Wiper Blades ................... 413
Climate Control SystemAir Filter, Passenger Compartment ........... 184Dual Automatic ......................................... 177Outlet Adjustment ..................................... 184
Clutch, Hydraulic ......................................... 346Collision Damage Repair ............................. 465Compass ............................................ 108, 110Competitive Driving, Racing or Other ........... 290Control of a Vehicle ..................................... 276Convenience Net ......................................... 131Convertible Top .................................. 138, 145
475
CoolantEngine Temperature Gage ........................ 197Heater, Engine ........................................... 94Surge Tank Pressure Cap ........................ 350
Cooling System ........................................... 352Courtesy Lamps .......................................... 171Cruise Control ............................................. 162Cupholder(s) ................................................ 128Customer Assistance Information
Courtesy Transportation ........................... 461Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users ......................... 456Customer Assistance Offices .................... 456Customer Satisfaction Procedure .............. 452GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ...... 457Reporting Safety Defects to General
Motors .................................................. 470Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government .......................... 470Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government .................... 470Roadside Assistance Program .................. 458Service Publications Ordering
Information ........................................... 471
DDaytime Running Lamps ............................. 167Defensive Driving ........................................ 272Disc, MP3 ................................................... 259Diversity Antenna System ............................ 270Doing Your Own Service Work .................... 319Door
Automatic Door Lock ................................. 81Locks ......................................................... 78Power Door Locks ..................................... 81Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ....... 82
DriverPosition, Safety Belt ................................... 22
Driver Information Center (DIC) ................... 205DIC Controls and Displays ....................... 206DIC Vehicle Personalization ..................... 232DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 212Other Messages ....................................... 230
DrivingAt Night ................................................... 291City .......................................................... 295Defensive ................................................. 272Drunken ................................................... 273Freeway ................................................... 296
476
Driving (cont.)Hill and Mountain Roads .......................... 300In Rain and on Wet Roads ...................... 293Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .......... 307Winter ...................................................... 302
Dual Automatic Climate Control System ....... 177
EElectrical System
Add-On Equipment ................................... 419Engine Compartment Fuse Block ............. 424Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...................... 420Headlamp Wiring ..................................... 419Instrument Panel Fuse Block ................... 420Power Windows and Other Power
Options ................................................. 420Windshield Wiper Fuses ........................... 419
EngineAir Cleaner/Filter ...................................... 342Battery ..................................................... 363Check and Service Engine Soon Light ..... 198Coolant .................................................... 347Coolant Heater .......................................... 94Coolant Temperature Gage ...................... 197Drive Belt Routing .................................... 446
Engine (cont.)Engine Compartment Overview ................ 328Exhaust ................................................... 106Oil ........................................................... 332Oil Life System ........................................ 340Oil Pressure Gage ................................... 202Overheated Protection Operating Mode .... 352Overheating ............................................. 350Starting ...................................................... 91
Entry/Exit Lighting ....................................... 171Event Data Recorders (EDR) ...................... 464Extended Mobility Tires ............................... 384Extender, Safety Belt ..................................... 30Exterior Lamps ............................................ 166Exterior Lighting Battery Saver .................... 170
FFilter
Engine Air Cleaner ................................... 342Finish Damage ............................................ 416Flashers, Hazard Warning ........................... 156Flash-to-Pass .............................................. 160Flat Tire ...................................................... 406Floor Mats ................................................... 129
477
FluidAutomatic Transmission ............................ 345Manual Transmission ................................ 346Power Steering ........................................ 357Windshield Washer .................................. 359
Fog Lamp Light ........................................... 203Fog Lamps .................................................. 169Fuel ............................................................ 320
Additives .................................................. 322California Fuel .......................................... 321Filling a Portable Fuel Container .............. 326Filling Your Tank ...................................... 323Fuels in Foreign Countries ....................... 323Gage ....................................................... 204Gasoline Octane ...................................... 320Gasoline Specifications ............................ 321
FusesEngine Compartment Fuse Block ............. 424Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...................... 420Instrument Panel Fuse Block ................... 420Windshield Wiper ..................................... 419
GGage
Engine Coolant Temperature .................... 197Engine Oil Pressure ................................. 202Fuel ......................................................... 204Speedometer ........................................... 188Tachometer .............................................. 188Voltmeter Gage ........................................ 192
Garage Door Opener ................................... 118Gasoline
Octane ..................................................... 320Specifications ........................................... 321
Glove Box ................................................... 128GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .......... 457
HHatch/Trunk ................................................... 83Hazard Warning Flashers ............................ 156Headlamp Wiring ......................................... 419Headlamps
Bulb Replacement .................................... 370Daytime Running Lamps .......................... 167Flash-to-Pass ........................................... 160Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 371
478
Headlamps (cont.)Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, and
Parking Lamps ..................................... 372High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting .... 371High/Low Beam Changer ......................... 160On Reminder ........................................... 167Wiper Activated ........................................ 167
Head-Up Display (HUD) .............................. 172Heated Seats ................................................ 10Heater ......................................................... 177Highbeam On Light ..................................... 204High-Speed Operation, Tires ........................ 388Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 299Hill and Mountain Roads ............................. 300Hood
Checking Things Under ............................ 326Release ................................................... 327
Horn ............................................................ 157How to Use This Manual ................................ 4How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............... 21Hydraulic Clutch .......................................... 346
IIgnition Positions ........................................... 90Infants and Young Children, Restraints .......... 34Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................... 386
Installing the Roof Panel ............................. 137Instrument Panel
Overview .................................................. 154Instrument Panel (I/P)
Brightness ................................................ 170Cluster ..................................................... 186
JJump Starting .............................................. 364
KKeyless Access System ................................. 73Keyless Access System, Operation ................ 74Keys ............................................................. 71
LLabeling, Tire Sidewall ................................. 380Lamps
Battery Run-Down Protection ................... 171Courtesy .................................................. 171Exterior .................................................... 166Exterior Lighting Battery Saver ................. 170Fog .......................................................... 169
479
Lamps (cont.)Reading ................................................... 171Twilight Sentinel® ..................................... 169
LATCH SystemChild Restraints .................................. 42, 45
Latches, Seatback ......................................... 15Lifting Your Vehicle, Tires ............................ 402Light
Active Handling System ........................... 196Airbag Readiness ..................................... 189Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ............. 195Brake System Warning ............................. 194Fog Lamp ................................................ 203Highbeam On .......................................... 204Lights On Reminder ................................. 204Malfunction Indicator ................................ 198One-to-Four Shift ..................................... 193Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............ 190Safety Belt Reminder ............................... 188Security ................................................... 203TCS Warning Light .................................. 195Tire Pressure ........................................... 197Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning ................................................ 195Lighting
Entry/Exit ................................................. 171Limited-Slip Rear Axle ................................. 283
Loading Your Vehicle ................................... 307Lockout Protection ......................................... 82Locks
Automatic Door Lock ................................. 81Door .......................................................... 78Lockout Protection ..................................... 82Power Door ............................................... 81Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ....... 82
Loss of Control ........................................... 289Lumbar
Power and Side Bolsters ............................. 9
MMaintenance Schedule
Additional Required Services .................... 436At Each Fuel Fill ...................................... 439At Least Once a Month ............................ 440At Least Once a Year .............................. 440Introduction .............................................. 430Maintenance Footnotes ............................ 437Maintenance Record ................................ 447Maintenance Requirements ...................... 430Normal Maintenance Replacement
Parts .................................................... 445Owner Checks and Services .................... 439Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ....... 443
480
Maintenance Schedule (cont.)Scheduled Maintenance ........................... 433Using ....................................................... 431Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 431
Malfunction Indicator Light ........................... 198Manual Seats .................................................. 8Manual Transmission
Fluid ........................................................ 346Operation ................................................. 100
Memory Seat, Mirrors, Steering WheelControls ..................................................... 10
MessageDIC Warnings and Messages ................... 212
MirrorsAutomatic Dimming Rearview with
Compass .............................................. 110Automatic Dimming Rearview with
OnStar® and Compass ......................... 108Manual Rearview Mirror ........................... 108Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror ........... 114Outside Convex Mirror ............................. 114Outside Power Heated Mirrors ................. 113
MP3 ............................................................ 259MyGMLink.com ............................................ 455
NNavigation/Radio System, see Navigation
Manual ..................................................... 267New Vehicle Break-In .................................... 90Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..... 445
OOdometer .................................................... 188Off-Road Recovery ...................................... 287Oil
Engine ..................................................... 332Engine Oil Pressure Gage ....................... 202
Oil, Engine Oil Life System ......................... 340Older Children, Restraints ............................. 31One-to-Four Shift Light ................................ 193Online Owner Center ................................... 455OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ........ 114Other Warning Devices ................................ 157Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 184Outlet(s), Accessory Power .......................... 176Outside
Automatic Dimming Mirror ........................ 114Convex Mirror .......................................... 114Power Heated Mirrors .............................. 113
481
Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode ....................................... 352
Owner Checks and Services ....................... 439Owners, Canadian .......................................... 3
PPaint, Damage ............................................ 416Park (P)
Shifting Into ............................................. 103Shifting Out of ......................................... 105
ParkingBrake ....................................................... 103Over Things That Burn ............................ 106
Parking Your Vehicle ................................... 105Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............... 190Passenger Compartment Air Filter ............... 184Passenger Position, Safety Belts ................... 30Passenger Sensing System ........................... 59Passing ....................................................... 287Power
Accessory Outlet(s) .................................. 176Door Locks ................................................ 81Electrical System ..................................... 420Lumbar and Side Bolsters ........................... 9Retained Accessory (RAP) ......................... 91Seat ............................................................ 8
Power (cont.)Steering Fluid .......................................... 357Windows .................................................... 87
Pretensioners, Safety Belt ............................. 30Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ........... 82
QQuestions and Answers About Safety Belts ... 20
RRacing or Other Competitive Driving ............ 290Radios ........................................................ 242
Care of Your CD Player ........................... 270Care of Your CDs .................................... 269Navigation/Radio System, see
Navigation Manual ................................ 267Radio with CD ......................................... 244Setting the Time ...................................... 243Theft-Deterrent ......................................... 267Understanding Reception ......................... 268
Reading Lamps ........................................... 171Rear Axle .................................................... 370
Limited-Slip .............................................. 283Rear Storage Area ...................................... 130
482
Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming withCompass ................................................. 110
Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming withOnStar® and Compass ............................. 108
Rearview Mirrors ......................................... 108Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 13Recommended Fluids and Lubricants .......... 443Recreational Vehicle Towing ........................ 313Removing the Roof Panel ........................... 133Replacement Bulbs ..................................... 374Replacement, Windshield ............................. 374Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government ............................. 470General Motors ........................................ 470United States Government ....................... 470
Restraint System CheckChecking the Restraint Systems ................. 66Replacing Restraint System Parts After
a Crash .................................................. 67Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ................. 91Roadside
Assistance Program ................................. 458Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .............. 307Roof Panel .................................................. 133
Installing the Roof Panel .......................... 137Removing the Roof Panel ........................ 133
Roof Panel (cont.)Storing the Roof Panel ............................. 136
Routing, Engine Drive Belt .......................... 446Running the Engine While Parked ............... 107
SSafety Belt
Pretensioners ............................................. 30Reminder Light ........................................ 188
Safety BeltsCare of .................................................... 411Driver Position ........................................... 22How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............ 21Passenger Position .................................... 30Questions and Answers About Safety
Belts ....................................................... 20Safety Belt Extender .................................. 30Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ............. 29Safety Belts Are for Everyone .................... 16
Safety Warnings and Symbols ......................... 4Scheduled Maintenance ............................... 433Seatback Latches .......................................... 15Seats
Heated Seats ............................................. 10Manual ........................................................ 8Memory, Mirrors ......................................... 10
483
Seats (cont.)Power Lumbar and Side Bolsters ................. 9Power Seats ................................................ 8Reclining Seatbacks ................................... 13Seatback Latches ...................................... 15
Securing a Child RestraintPassenger Seat Position ............................ 46
Security Light .............................................. 203Selective Ride Control ................................. 284Service ........................................................ 318
Accessories and Modifications .................. 318Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your
Vehicle ................................................. 320California Proposition 65 Warning ............. 319Doing Your Own Work ............................. 319Engine Soon Light ................................... 198Publications Ordering Information ............. 471
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......... 64Setting the Time .......................................... 243Shifting Into Park (P) ................................... 103Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................... 105Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .................. 159Specifications, Capacities ............................ 427Speedometer ............................................... 188Starting Your Engine ..................................... 91Steering ...................................................... 284Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ................... 267
Steering Wheel Controls, Memory ................. 10Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel .......................... 157Storage Areas
Center Console Storage Area ................... 129Convenience Net ..................................... 131Cupholder(s) ............................................ 128Glove Box ................................................ 128Rear Storage Area ................................... 130
Storing the Roof Panel ................................ 136Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ............... 306Sun Visors .................................................... 87
TTachometer ................................................. 188Taillamps
Turn Signal, and Stoplamps ..................... 373TCS Warning Light ...................................... 195Theft-Deterrent, Radio ................................. 267Theft-Deterrent System .................................. 88Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................ 88Tilt Wheel .................................................... 157Tire
Pressure Light .......................................... 197Tires ........................................................... 378
Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning ..................... 415Buying New Tires ..................................... 393
484
Tires (cont.)Chains ..................................................... 401Cleaning .................................................. 415Different Size ........................................... 395Extended Mobility ..................................... 384High-Speed Operation .............................. 388If a Tire Goes Flat ................................... 406Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................ 386Lifting Your Vehicle .................................. 402Pressure Monitor System ......................... 389Rotation ................................................... 392Tire Sidewall Labeling .............................. 380Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 382Uniform Tire Quality Grading .................... 396Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ........... 397Wheel Replacement ................................. 398When It Is Time for New Tires ................. 393Winter Tires ............................................. 379
TowingRecreational Vehicle ................................. 313Towing a Trailer ....................................... 313Your Vehicle ............................................. 313
TractionActive Handling System ........................... 281Control System (TCS) .............................. 279Control System Warning Light .................. 195
Traction (cont.)Limited-Slip Rear Axle .............................. 283Selective Ride Control .............................. 284
TransmissionFluid, Automatic ....................................... 345Fluid, Manual ........................................... 346One-to-Four Shift Light ............................. 193
Transmission Operation, Automatic ................ 95Transmission Operation, Manual .................. 100Trunk/Hatch ................................................... 83Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................... 159Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................... 158Twilight Sentinel® ........................................ 169
UUnderstanding Radio Reception ................... 268Uniform Tire Quality Grading ....................... 396Universal Home Remote System ................. 118
Operation ........................................ 119, 124
VVehicle
Control ..................................................... 276Damage Warnings ....................................... 5
485
Vehicle (cont.)Loading .................................................... 307Parking Your ............................................ 105Symbols ...................................................... 5
Vehicle Data Collection and Event DataRecorders ................................................ 464
Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) .......................................... 418Service Parts Identification Label .............. 418
Vehicle PersonalizationDIC .......................................................... 232
Ventilation Adjustment .................................. 184Visors ........................................................... 87Voltmeter Gage ........................................... 192
WWarning Lights, Gages and Indicators ......... 186Warnings
DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 212Hazard Warning Flashers ......................... 156Other Warning Devices ............................ 157Safety and Symbols ..................................... 4Vehicle Damage .......................................... 5
WheelsAlignment and Tire Balance ..................... 397Different Size ........................................... 395Replacement ............................................ 398
Windows ....................................................... 86Power ........................................................ 87
WindshieldReplacement ............................................ 374Washer .................................................... 161Washer Fluid ........................................... 359Wiper Blade Replacement ........................ 375Wiper Blades, Cleaning ............................ 413Wiper Fuses ............................................ 419Wipers ..................................................... 160
Winter Driving ............................................. 302Winter Tires ................................................. 379Wiper Activated Headlamps ......................... 167
XXM Radio Messages ................................... 265XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ......... 270
YYour Vehicle and the Environment ............... 431
486
